course specifications -...

Course Specifications | 1st Semester | Page - 1

COURSE SPECIFICATIONS

Following are the specifications for all the courses taught in Dentistry listed according to eachsemester in which they are taught.1ST SEMESTER

FIRST YEAR [PRE DENTAL]FIRST SEMESTER

CODE COURSE TITLE TH PR CRH COH P-REQ163 PRE English Language I 15 0 3161 PRE Medical Physics I 2 2 3108 PRE Medical Chemistry I 2 2 3102 PRE Medical Biology I 2 2 3101 ARAB Arabic Language Skills 2 0 2101 COM Introduction to computer 2 2 3

TOTAL 6 25 8 17

Course Specifications | 2nd Semester | Page - 2

2N D SEMESTER

FIRST YEAR [PRE DENTAL]

SECOND SEMESTER

CODE COURSE TITLE TH PR CRH COH P-REQ164 PRE English Language II 15 0 3 163 PRE162 PRE Medical Physics II 2 2 3 161 PRE109 PRE Medical Chemistry II 2 2 3 108 PRE106 PRE Medical Biology II 3 2 4 102 PRE105 PRE Study Skills 1 0 1101 ISLM Islamic Culture I 2 0 2TOTAL 6 25 6 16

Course Specifications | 3rd Semester | Page - 3

3R D SEMESTER

SECOND YEAR

THIRD SEMESTERCODE COURSE TITLE TH PR CRH COH P-REQ221 RDS Basic Dental

Biomaterials1 0 1 1 162 PRE

223 RDS Dental Anatomy &Occlusion I

1 3 2 4 106 PRE,162 PRE251 DMS Gross Anatomy &Histology I

3 6 5 9 106 PRE,109 PRE253 DMS Physiology I 2 3 3 5 106 PRE,109 PRE255 DMS Biochemistry I 2 0 2 2 106 PRE,109 PRE261 DEN Introduction to Dentalprofession, BehaviouralSciences & Ethics

1 0 1 1102 ARAB Arabic Writing 2 0 2 2102 ISLM Islamic Culture II 2 0 2 2TOTAL 8 14 12 18 26

Course Specifications | 3rd Semester | Basic Dental Biomaterials | Page - 4

BASIC DENTAL BIOMATERIALS1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: College of Dentistry

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the student should have: Basic knowledge on chemical and physical concepts. Knowledge of the behavior of biomaterials within the mouth. Insight into some of dental materials which could be useful for dental treatments. For everyone of those materials, chemical and physical reactions in processing, the most importantmaterial-technical indications, procedure of use and indications have to be known. Knowledge of the techniques required to control the materials properties in order tocommunicate more effectively with dental laboratory technicians.C. Course descriptionPhysical, mechanical, chemical, and biological behavior of a variety of dental materials will becovered in this program. Basic dental biomaterial course serves as foundation course indentistry, which particularly deals in restoration and treatment of teeth. In this course, thephysical, mechanical, surface properties of metallic, ceramic, and polymeric materials arediscussed in details.

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Basic Dental Biomaterials221 RDSb. Credit hoursc. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of the faculty member responsible for course Jazan Universitye. Year / Semester at which course offered 2nd year / 3rd Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 162 PREg. Co-requisite for the course --h. Location if not main campus Shawajara Campus

Jazan University | College of Dentistry | BDS-Curriculum


I. Topic to be covered

Topic Numberweeks

Contact hours

1. Introduction to materials in dentistry 1 22. Structure of matters 1 23. Mechanical properties 2 44. Rheological properties 1 25. Physical properties 1 26. Polymers 2 47. Impression materials 5 108. Model and die materials 2 4Revision (16th week)Final exam (17th week)II. Course Component

Lectures Component Practical/Fieldwork/Internship1. Introduction todental materials - Materials used in dentistry:- ( metals , compositepolymers and ceramic)- Important dental terms:- ( prosthesis, crown , bridge,partial denture , complete denture, ridge, dentulousridge ,edentulous ridge, partial edentulous ridge )2. Structure ofmatters - Types of primary bond:- ( Ionic, metallic, Covalent )

- Types of secondary bond:- (dispersion force, polarforce)- Types of solids:- (crystalline, non- crystalline)



3.Mechanicalproperties - Types of stress :- (tensile, compressive, shear ,complex).- Types of strain :- ( elastic , plastic)- Stress strain curve:- ( elongation , rigidity, flexibility,ductility, malleability, resilience, toughness)- Other mechanical properties:- (transverse strength,tear strength, fatigue strength, compressiveproperties, impact strength, tensile properties ofbrittle materials)-Surface mechanical properties: (Hardness ,Frictionand Wear)4. Rheologicalproperties - Viscoelasticity, strain/ time curve- Types of fluids and pastes:- ( Newtonian, dilatant,pseudoplastic)- Time dependence viscosity: - (working time, settingtime).- Creep

--

5. PhysicalProperties - Thermal properties :-( Heat of fusion, thermalconductivity, specific heat, thermal diffusivity andcoefficient of thermal expansion, exothermicreaction).- Optical properties: - (color, pigmentation,metamerism, fluorescence, opacity, translucency,transparency, index of refraction).- Other properties:- ( water sorption, solubility,density)6. Polymers - Basic nature of polymers-Structure and properties.- Application of polymers.-Addition polymerization.- Condensation polymerization.- Physical change occurs during polymerizationreaction.- Plasticizer.

--



- Cross linking.- Copolymer.- Glass transition temperature.- Thermal behavior of polymers.7. Impressionmaterials - Ideal requirement of impression materials.- Classification of impression materials (non-elastic,elastic)- Impression compound.- Zinc oxide eugenol.- Hydrocolloid impression (alginate and agar.- Elastomeric impression (polysulfide, condensationsilicone, addition silicone, polyether).- Composition , setting reaction , properties,applications and recent advances of each impressionmaterial)8. Model and diematerials - Ideal requirement of model and die materials.- Gypsum products (Chemical, physical nature, settingreaction, properties, manipulation and application).- Copper electroplated die.-Silver electroplated die.-Ceramic die.III. Addition learning hours expected for students- 20 Semester

IV. Development of learning outcomes in Domains

a- knowledge and understanding

At the completion of this course, the dental student should be able to:a.1. Understand deeply the chemical and physical basics essential for handling of the dentalbiomaterials.a.2. Situate the limitations and the durability of every material in an objective dental and



social perspectivea.3. Select the proper material for a specific dental treatment judiciously and in a well-considered mannera.4. Select material from the commercial market independently and criticallyb- Intellectual skills

At the completion of this course, the dental student should be able to:b1 Analyze the problems systematically and solve them.b2 Distinguish the best innovative dental techniques, materials and tools.b3 Criticize the scientific studies.c- Professional and practical skills

At the completion of this course, the dental student should be able to:c1 Solve the problems that will aid in making appropriate selections of materials for eachpatient's unique needs.c2 Inform the patient correctly, objectively and sufficiently about possible side-effects of thematerials.d- General and transferable skills

Through group working in research, the dental student will:d1 Gain the skill of discussing and accepting different opinion.d2 Use and access a rang of learning resources.d3 Evaluate his own strength and weakness.e- AttitudeThrough the communication with the staff members, the student will:e1 Develop ethical characters for good communication generally with people andspecifically with patients.e2 Have self-confidence.e3 Have emotional maturity.



e4 Demonstrate ethical relationship with staff.

D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations as academic adviceConsultations: 2 hours / week Academic advice: 2 hours / weekE. Learning resources

Course notes, handouts, slides.

Essential text books:

o Craig RG, Power JM. Restorative dental materials. 11th ed. St. Louis, Mosby, 2006.o Phillip's Science of Dental Materials (Anusavice Phillip's Science of dental materials )by Knneth J. Anusavice. 2003

Recommended text books:

o McCabe JF. Applied Dental Materials. 7th edition. Blackwell Science, London, 1990.o O’Brien WJ. Dental Materials and Their Selection. 3rd edition. Quintessence, 2002.o Combe EC. Notes on Dental Materials. 6th edition. New York, Chuchill Livingstone,1992.o Introduction to Dental Materials by Richard van Noort 2007.

F. Facilities required

a. Accommodation

o Lecture room for 40 – 60 students.o Labs for 40- 60 students.

V. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester

Assessment Task Proportion

Continues assessment Midterm 30 %Summative assessment Oral 10%

Written exam 60%



b. Computing resources

o Computers with CD / DVDo Computers with access to internet (PubMed: Medline search in the internationalscientific journals).

C. Other resources

o Over head projectorso White board and markers.

G. Course evaluation and improvement processes

a. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching:

o Teacher-student discussion, focus group.o Student's surveys on effectiveness of teaching.o Student's personal written feedbacks.o Teaching appraisal questionnaire.

b. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by instructors or by the department:

o Monitoring student's performance and progress through periodic examination andassessments and assessments exercises.o Feedback, self-appraisal and department discussion on evaluating the effectivenessof teaching.o Peer evaluation.o Students and departmental feedbacks.

c. Processes for improvement of teaching:

o By identifying and evaluating weak area areas and working on its improvement.o Continuing dental education programs.o Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.

d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement:

o Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examination committee.o Evaluation and assessment of student's exam reports.o Remarking of a sample assignment within the faculty members and faculty fromoutside the collage.o Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as a whole.

e. Arrangements for review and effective planning for course:



Review:o Semester and yearly review for student's performance in all teaching fields.o Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferable skills.o Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledge from facultyleaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite.o Comparing student's performance benchmarks from other similar institutes andworking on its improvement.o Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs' and requirements.o Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvement strategies.o Provide additional training for staff as and when required.o Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvement strategies.o Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in the line withinternational standards.


Course Specifications | 3rd Semester | Dental Anatomy & Occlusion I | Page - 12

DENTAL ANATOMY & OCCLUSION IInstitution Jazan UniversityCollege/Department : College of DentistryA Course Identification and General Information1 Course title and code Dental Anatomy & Occlusion I,223 RDS2 Credit hours 2 Credit hours (1+1+3)3 Contact hours 5 contact hours4 Program(s) in which the course is offered Dentistry5 Name of faculty member responsible for the course Prof.Amel Radwan el HakProf.Naglaa Nagy6 Level at which this course is offered 3rd Level7 Year at which this course is offered Second Year8 Pre-requisites for this course 106 PRE, 162 PRE9 Co-requisites for this course ------10 Location if not on main campus Al-Shawgra

B ObjectivesAfter the completion of the course, the student should have knowledge of the following: Descriptive terms in human masticatory system and dental anatomy. Dental formula and notation systems. Anatomical landmarks of teeth. Macroscopic structure of the features of the crown and the root of both permanent anddeciduous teeth. Macroscopic structure of the characteristics of the endodontic space of anterior teeth (pulpchamber and canal). Order of eruption of both permanent and deciduous teeth. Brief microscopic structure of various dental tissues (dentin, enamel, cementum and dentalpulp). Radiologic anatomy of the teeth and the jaws during different period of dentition, biologicalvariability, asymmetry of teeth. Genetic influences on tooth morphology. Self-protective features of teeth; geometric outlines of both anterior and posterior teethA. Plans for developing and improving the course:



1. Review and analyse collective summary of student performance of all teachingsection of the course every year.2. Acquire feedback regarding planning for improvement of transferable skills andlevel of retention of required knowledge from faculty teaching courses that demandthis course as prerequisite.C. Course Description:Dental Anatomy & Occlusion I is 2 credit hour course that deals with the basics of oraland facial structures as well as the anatomy and morphology of both permanent andprimary teeth. The course will comprise of lectures and laboratory work. This wouldinclude the characteristics common in maintaining anatomical tooth form whichpromotes health of the dental structures. Lab will involve imparting technical skillsutilizing dental wax to recreate anatomical crown morphology and function. Uponcompletion of lectures and the labs, students should be able to able to carve anteriorteeth with proper anatomy and contour. They also will be able to understand theanatomy of the head and oral cavity. Dental Anatomy and Occlusion provides thestudent with the basic didactic information and technical skills prerequisite for thoseadvanced preclinical courses which follow in Restorative Dentistry. This course will betaught during the third semester second year.

I. Topics to be coveredTopics No. of WeeksIntroduction 3Morphology of permanent maxillary and mandibular anterior teeth 6Geometric outlines of teeth 2Morphology of maxillary premolars 1Physiologic tooth form 1II. Course components (total contact hours per semester):Topics No. of Weeks Date ContacthoursIntroduction to dental anatomy and terminology:

Anatomy of orofacial complex: form andfunction Dento-osseous structures Types of human dentitions. Tooth surfaces, line and point angles. Dental formula and notation systems. Anatomical landmarks of teeth.

3 25-9-20102-10-20109-10-2010 3Morphology of permanent teeth (crown and root) &pulp chambers and canals (endodontic space):

Maxillary central incisor. Maxillary lateral incisor. Mandibular central incisor. Mandibular lateral incisor. Maxillary canine. Mandibular canine.

1111111

16-10-201023-10-201030-10-20106-11-201027-11-20104-12-201011-12-2010

1111111



Geometric forms and functions of teeth Maxillary 1st premolar Maxillary 2nd premolar Physiologic tooth form Revision

111118-12-201025-12-20101-1-20118-1-2011

1111Lab Practical No. of Weeks1) Introduction2) Carving of maxillary central incisor3) Carving of maxillary lateral incisor4) Revision5) Carving of mandibular central incisor6) Carving of mandibular lateral incisor7) Revision8) Carving of maxillary canine9) Carving of mandibular canine10) Revision11) Carving of maxillary premolars12) Revision13) Revision

2111111111111

25-9-20102-10-20109-10-201016-10-201023-10-201030-10-20106-11-201027-11-20104-12-201011-12-201018-12-201025-12-20101-1 20118-1-2011

6333333333333Lecture: 14 14 Lab: 14III. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learninga. Knowledge(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquired

a- Knowledge:

By the end of the course, the students will be able to:a.1. Define dental formulae and depict human dental formula for permanent anddeciduous teeth.a.2. Comprehend the advantage and disadvantage of different notation systems.a.3. Describe different stages of tooth development and calcification (chronology).a.4. Name the landmarks of each tooth.a.5. Acknowledge the minutiae morphology of human permanent anterior andupper premolars teeth which are relevant to dental practice.a.6. Describe the specific anatomical features of each tooth which helps in diagnosisand treatment of oral diseases.a.7. Identify the relationship between tooth contours and periodontal health whichhelps in aesthetic and clinical treatment.a.8. Detect any deviation in anatomy of permanent teeth.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge



1. Lectures /small group discussion to present main themes and concepts of theories.2. Brainstorming to illustrate the differences in core concepts(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired:1. Multiple choice question (MCQ).2. Matching.b. Cognitive Skills(i) By the end of the course, the students will be able to:b.1 Demonstrate the ability to recognize patient’s age from the chronology of his/herteeth.b.2Develop recognition of tooth abnormalities(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills1. Group Discussion(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skillsMCQc. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility(i) By the end of the course, students will be able toa.1. Differentiate between the morphological characteristics of permanent teeth.a.2. Summarize the relation between the dental and para-dental tissues.a.3. Depict the common and the uncommon morphology of different root canals anddetect any deviation from usual.a.4. Illustrate the physiological tooth form that affects the supporting dental andpara-dental tissues.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities1. Direct interactions with students to apply and critique interpersonal skills.d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills(i) By the end of the course students will be able toa.1. Be familiar with different tooth numbering systems.a.2. Recognize the morphology of permanent teeth.a.3. Demonstrate the difference between the morphology of anterior permanent teeth.a.4. Recognize the anatomical land marks of all teeth.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills1.Group tutorial to facilitate selection & utilization of appropriate web material



(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills1.Assignments5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the SemesterAssessment Assessment task(eg. essay, test, examination etc.) Weekdue Proportion of FinalAssessment1 Quiz 1 5th 10%2 Midterm exam 10th 20%3 Activities (Seminars, assignment …. etc) ------ 10%4 Written exam-Practical exam 14th 60%D. Student Support1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and academicadvice.Consultations: 2hrs/ weekacademic advice: 2hrs/ weekE Learning Resources1. Required Text:1. Wheeler's Dental Anatomy, Physiology and Occlusion by Major M. Ash. 2009.2.Essential References:1) Dental Anatomy Coloring Book by Margaret J. Fehrenbach. 2007.2) Woelfel's Dental Anatomy: Its Relevance to Dentistry (Point (Lippincott Williams &Wilkins) by Rickne C. Scheid. 2007.3) Kraus Dental Anat & Occlusions by Ronald E. Jordan, Leonard Abrams, and BertramS. Kraus. 1992 ( or last edition).4) Netter's Head and Neck Anatomy for Dentistry (Netter Basic Science)by Neil ScottNorton. 2006.5) Illustrated Anatomy of the Head and Neck (Fehrenbach, Illustrated Anatomy of theHead and Neck) by Margaret J. Fehrenbach and Susan W. Herring. 2006.6) Berkovitz, B. K. B. (2002). Oral Anatomy, Embryology and Histology. 3rd ed. Mosby,Edinburgh.7) Head, Neck and Dental Anatomy by Marjorie J. Short. 2002.8) Quick Reference Guide Dental Anatomy (Quick Study Academic) by Rich Marino.,



20044-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc

Medicare web Site. Pub med. Sciencedirect

F. Facilities Required1. Computing resources1. Internet.3. Other resources1. PowerPointG Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching1. Students/teacher focus groups.2. Students' personal written reflections.3. Students' teaching appraisal questionnaire.2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department1. Analysis of students' performance progress through factor analysis of written periodicalexams.2. Criteria analysis of students' performance progress for practice and interpersonal skillsby the department.3. Peer evaluation of the instructor.3. Processes for Improvement of Teaching1. Continuous education for new areas that will enhance present performance.2. Visitors of teaching experts in the field for modelling performance.4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by anindependent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of asample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)1. Periodic exchange and remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member inanother institution.2. Departmental committee to revise sample of randomly selected exams3. Departmental revision of exam report (grade, maximum, min, average, mode andmedian)


Course Specifications | 3rd Semester | Physiology I | Page - 18

PHYSIOLOGY IInstitution Jazan UniversityCollege/Department : College of DentistryA. Course Identification and General Information1. Course title and code: physiology -2532. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours (2+1).3. Program(s) in which the course is offered: Dentistry4. Name of faculty member responsible for the course Dr. Mohamed AbdelMohsen5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 3rd Level , second Year6. Pre-requisites for this course : Biophysics7. Co-requisites for this course:8. Location if not on main campus Al-ShawajarahB. Objectives

At the end of the course the students should be able to:1. Understand the major theories of physiology.2. Understand different branches of physiology each individual.3. Describe the various mechanisms of actions in physiology.4. Describe the general physiological functions of different systems of the body.5. Integrate theoretical knowledge of physiology into clinical problem.2. Plans for developing and improving the course:1. Review and analyse collective students' performance in internship rotation eachsemester.2. Review and analyse collective summary of student performance of all teaching section ofthe course every yearly.3. Acquire feedback regarding planning for improvement of transferable skills and level ofretention of required knowledge from faculty teaching courses that demand this courseas prerequisite.4. Benchmark student performance with other similar program teaching similar course.C. Course Description:The course is required for all undergraduate 2nd year dentist students. The course introducesthe student to various physiological functions and mechanisms of action of different parts of allbody systems. Students involved in this course are expected to, integrate knowledge base fromthe basic sciences theory courses; utilize them in understanding physiology. The focus of thetraining is on the practical skills in respiratory and blood systems. Learning of students is



enhanced through the direct interaction between them and with the teacher in the form of smallgroup learning (seminars & tutorials) that will help the students to understand well and takingself confidence.I. Topics to be Covered Topic No ofWeeks Contacthours

Introduction. General physiology. Homeostasis

1st Week 3

Introduction to autonomic nervous system. Sympathetic nervous system & its functions. Noradrenergic receptors. 2nd Week 3 Parasympathetic nervous system & its functions. Cholinergic receptors. 3rd Week 3 Physiology of nerve. Neurotrophins & their functions 4th Week 3 Physiology of muscles. Differentiate different types of muscles. Quiz-1 5th Week 3 General respiratory functions. Mechanisms of respiration. 6th Week 3 Steps of respiration. Transport of gases in blood. Pulmonary function tests (volumes & capacities). 7th Week 3 Disorders of respiration (pathophysiology). Aviation & space physiology. Deep sea physiology. 8th Week 3 General functions of blood. Red blood cells physiology (pathophysiology of anaemia). 9th Week



3 White blood cell physiology. Immunity. Platelet physiology (bleeding and hemostasis) Quiz-2 10th Week 3 General functions of Gastrointestinal tract (GIT) & theirregulation. GIT motility. GIT secretion. 11th Week 3 Liver functions & Jaundice. GIT absorption. Specific emphasis on swallowing & salivation. 12th Week 3 General Revision 13th Week Final Exam. 14th Week

2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):Lecture: 36 Tutorial: ---------- Practical Internship: Other: ---------

3. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning

a. Knowledge1. Integrate theoretical knowledge related to physiology.

(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge3. Lectures /small group discussion to present main themes and concepts of theories andphysiological modalities4. Brainstorming to illustrate the differences in core concepts related to theories andphysiological modalities



5. Reading assignment to integrate concepts of physiological theories with actual practicein pathophysiology of different diseases..(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired:1. Multiple choice question (MCQ) (to recognize main concept of physiology.2. Short essay (to provide the meaning of different physiological functions andmechanisms).b. Cognitive Skills(i)Cognitive skills to be developed1. Demonstrate ability to use self abilities on working with colleagues and teacher.2. Demonstrate knowledgeable skill performance in carrying out specific physiological lab.Tests.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills2. Role-plays to simulate different behaviours and interaction.3. Seminars to insure the appropriate application of different topics.4. Case study to develop rationales for pathophysiology and diagnosis.5. Attending skill lab. to acquire multidisciplinary professional approach.6. Scenarios to critique and propose physiological case study, as well as means ofevaluation of case.(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills1. MCQ (to assess and recognize the different physiological functions).c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be developed1. Develop awareness into one’s own attitude towards different topics of physiology.2. Value one’s own mental health practices as a professional physiologist.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities1. Conviction mirror to reflect behaviour during role plays assisting in self-awareness.2. Videotaping of actual students interactions in groups or one-to-one student patientinteraction (or role plays) to teach dynamics of interaction.3. Direct usage of lab. tools (real-life simulation) to apply and critique interpersonal skills.(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility1. Oral semi structure interview (to demonstrate the ability of communications).2. Seminar (to present project outcome as a demonstration of ability to apply interviewingand interpersonal therapeutic communication skills between student and teacher).d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills



(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.Use of web based material related to anatomy and histology to apprise the advancedunderstanding of practical physiology.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skillsGroup tutorial to facilitate selection & utilization of these materials.(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skillsAssignments (to present recent different topic related to physiology).5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the SemesterAssessment Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project,examination etc.) Week due Proportionof FinalAssessment1 Quiz 1 5th 15 %2 Quiz 2 10th 15 %3 Activities (Seminars, tutorials, survey, presentation,assignment …. etc) and regular attendance. ------ 10 %4 Final written exam 14th 60 %D. Student Support1.Arrangements for visiting different will occupied laboratories2. Providing good environment for studying e.g. data shows, computers and airconditioned classes.

E Learning Resources2. Required Text(s):

1- Gyuton and hall physiology 2006.



C. 2. Essential References1- Gannong physiology 2010.

2. Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc Medicare web Site. EBSCO web Site. Pub med. Medicare. Apta.org Wikipedia.

F. Facilities Required3. Computing resources1. Internet.2. Membership in web based physiological data bases.3. Membership in evidence-based physiological sites.4. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, list requirementsor attach list)1. Video recording apparatus and facility.2. Conviction mirror.3. Magmatic teaching board.4. PowerPoint/ transparency projectorG Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes

1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching1. Students/teacher focus groups.2. Students' personal written reflections.3. Students' teaching appraisal questionnaire.4. Students' clinical training appraisal questionnaire2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department1. Analysis of students' performance progress through factor analysis of written periodicalexams.2. Criteria analysis of students' performance progress for practice and interpersonal skillsby the department.3. Peer evaluation of the instructor.4. Feedback to/from clinical preceptors



3. Processes for Improvement of Teaching1. Staff development of areas which are not satisfactorily taught.2. Continuous education for new areas that will enhance present performance.3. Visitors of teaching experts in the field for modelling performance.4. Clinical preceptor training.4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by anindependent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of asample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)1. Departmental committee to revise sample of randomly selected exams.2. Departmental revision of exam report (grade, maximum, min, average, mode andmedian).3. Periodic exchange and remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member inanother institution).4. Clinical examination of independent physical therapy faculty member.5. Co evaluation of students' performance including course teacher and lab. preceptor


Course Specifications | 3rd Semester | Biochemistry I | Page - 25

BIOCHEMISTRY I1. Institution: College of Dentistry2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and generalinformationa. Course title and code Biochemistry I, 255 DMSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsiblefor course Dr Ayman Darwishe. Year/Semester at which course offered 2nd year | 3rdSemesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 106 PRE, 109 PREg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Shawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesAt the end of the course the students should be able to:1. Define the biochemistry, describe the chemical composition of humans.2. Describe the carbohydrate, and lipid compounds found in humans.3. Describe the general structure of fatty acid4. To define and identify high energy bonds5. To describe the glycogen metabolism, glycolytic pathway, citric acid cycle, hexosemonophosphate shunt, gluconeogenesis with particular stress on its regulation, and therole in metabolism6. To describe lipid digestion7. To depict fatty aid activation and oxidation8. To describe fatty aid biosynthesis y fatty acid Synthase multienzyme complex andtriglyceride biosynthesis9. To outline ketone body metabolismTo depict the structure and classes of lipoproteinPlans for developing and improving the course:1. Review and analyse collective summary of student performance of all teachingsection of the course every year.2. Acquire feedback regarding planning for improvement of transferable skills andlevel of retention of required knowledge from faculty teaching courses that demandthis course as prerequisite.

C. Course descriptionThe course is required for all undergraduate 2nd year BDS students. This course isdesigned to equip the students with necessary knowledge of biochemistry that wouldenable them to work with proficiency in a hospital environment.



I. Topics to be coveredTopics No. of WeeksIntroduction 1Intermediary Metabolism 4 ½ WIntegration of Metabolism 1 WLipid Metabolism 5 ½ WII. Course components (total contact hours per semester):Topics No. of Weeks Date ContacthoursIntroduction 1 26-9-2010 2Intermediary Metabolism:1) Introduction to carbohydrates2) Digestion and absorption ofcarbohydrates3) Glycogen metabolism4) Oxidative Phosphorylation5) Glycolysis6) Tricarboxylic acid cycle7) Gluconeogenesis8) Pentose phosphate pathway and NADPH

1½ W1 W½ W½ W½ W½ W

2-10-201016-10-201019-10-201026-10-201030-10-20101-11-20106-11-2010

2121111Integration of Metabolism1. Insulina. Regulation of insulin secretionb. Metabolic effects of insulin2. Hypoglycemia and its types3. Diabetes Mellitus4. OBESITY

1 W 6-11-2010 2TUTORIAL 1 W 22-11-2010Lipid Metabolism14) Introduction to Lipids15) Lipoproteins & lipid profile16) Cell membranes17) Digestion and absorption of Lipids18) Metabolism of dietary lipids19) Fatty acid and triglyceride metabolismspecially:a. β-oxidation of fatty acidsb. Ketogenesis & Ketolysis & Ketosisc. Fatty acid synthesisd. Triglyceride synthesis and catabolismand hormonal regulation20) Cholesterol synthesis

1 W½ W½ W½ W½ W½ W½ W½ W½ W½ W

29-11-201006-12-201011-12-201013-12-201018-12-201020-12-201025-12-201027-12-201001-01-201103-01-2011

2111111111TUTORIAL 1 W 08-01-2011 2



Lecture: 26 Tutorial: 4I. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20/Semester3. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning

a. Knowledge(iv) Description of the knowledge to be acquireda. At the end of the course the students should be able to understand, recall,describe(read):a) The basic processes of life in molecular terms using the cell as a unit of study.b) The normal and abnormal biochemical processes in man.c) The impact of the inherited metabolic disorders in medicine.b. At the end of the course the students should be able to integrate theoreticalknowledge related to biochemistry into clinical practice(v) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge1. Lectures /small group discussion to present main themes and concepts of theories.2. Brainstorming to illustrate the differences in core concepts(vi) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired:1. Multiple choice question (MCQ).2. Matching.

b. Cognitive Skills

(i)Cognitive skills to be developed1. Demonstrate ability to use biochemical markers of diabetes and lipid profiles onworking with colleagues, family members, and teacher.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills1. Case study approach to develop rationales for diagnosis of metabolic problems.(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills1. MCQ (to assess and recognize the different metabolic abnormalities).2. Scenarios or real-life simulation (to interpret/ apply psychodynamic of dentist in clinicin presence of diabetic patient).c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility

(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be developed1. Develop awareness into one’s own attitude towards medical disorders of the dentalpatients.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities1. Direct interactions with students to apply and critique interpersonal skills.



d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills

(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.1. Use of web based material related to medical biochemistry of metabolism.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills1. Group tutorial to facilitate selection & utilization of appropriate web material(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills1. Assignments (to present recent different topic related to metabolic diseases)5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the SemesterAssessment Assessment task(eg. essay, test, examination etc.) Weekdue Proportion of FinalAssessment1 Quiz 1 5th 15%2 Quiz 2 10th 15%3 Activities (Seminars, assignment …. etc) ------ 10%4 Written exam 14th 60%D. Student Support1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and academicadvice.Consultations: 2hrs/ weekacademic advice: 2hrs/ weekE Learning Resources3. Required Text:1. A Textbook of Biochemistry with Clinical Correlations. T. M. Devlin, 6th Edition,2006, Wiley- Liss publisher. ISBN 978-0-470-28173-41. Essential References:1. Biochemistry: A Short Course [Deckle Edge]. John L. Tymoczko, Jeremy M. Berg, LubertStryer. 2010, W. H. Freeman and Company publisher. ISBN: 0-7167-5840-7.2. Biochemistry, Lippincott’s Illustrated Reviews. Richard Harvey & Denise Ferrier, 5thEdition, 2010, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins Publisher. ISBN: 9781609139988.2. Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc


F. Facilities Required1. Computing resources



1. Internet.2. Other resources5. PowerPointG Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching1. Students/teacher focus groups.2. Students' personal written reflections.3. Students' teaching appraisal questionnaire.2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department1. Analysis of students' performance progress through factor analysis of writtenperiodical exams.2. Criteria analysis of students' performance progress for practice and interpersonalskills by the department.3. Peer evaluation of the instructor.3. Processes for Improvement of Teaching1. Continuous education for new areas that will enhance present performance.2. Visitors of teaching experts in the field for modelling performance.4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by anindependent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange andremarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)1. Periodic exchange and remarking of a sample of assignments with a facultymember in another institution.2. Departmental committee to revise sample of randomly selected exams3. Departmental revision of exam report (grade, maximum, min, average, mode andmedian)


Course Specifications | 3rd Semester | Introduction to Dental Profession, Behavioural Sciences &Ethics | Page - 30

INTRODUCTION TO DENTAL PROFESSION, BEHAVIOURAL SCIENCES & ETHICS1. Institution: College of Dentistry2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and generalinformationa. Course title and code Introduction to Dental Profession,

Behavioural Sciences & Ethics, 261DENb. Credit hours 1c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsiblefor course Dr.Ashwin.J.Dr.Aadil Inamdare. Year/Semester at which course offered 2nd year | 3rdSemesterf. Pre-requisites for the course -g. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Shawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesUpon completion of the course the students should be able to: Provide an over view of the concepts, principles and procedures of various specialties indentistry. Address the behavioural aspects in Dentistry with particular emphasis placed onunderstanding human behaviour, patient management and the ethical responsibilityinherent within the scope of the dental profession. Development of health culture, tasks, classification, uniqueness of medicine Principles of dental education and foundation of schools of dental studies. Dental information and documentation (educational, clinical, scientific, practicalapplication), visual media and dental medicine. Understand different modes of ethical reasoning. Describe legal and ethical codes and the relationship to malpractice lawsuits. Know about informed consent and peer review. Understand importance of confidentiality in different patient conditions. Recognize the importance of professionalism. Be aware of professional and ethical decision making.C. Course descriptionThis course is provided as a one of the first courses to the 1st year Dental studentsenrolled in college of Dental Sciences. This course gives the students, an overview ofdentistry. The course will provide the dental students with an introduction to concepts,



principles and procedures of various disciplines in dentistry with emphasis onprevention, comprehensive treatment and patient management. Dental curriculumorientation and regulations in pre-clinic and clinic area will be provided. The secondpart of the course will deal with Behavioural dentistry. It will deal with theinterdisciplinary field concerned with development and integration of behavioural andbio-dental science knowledge and techniques relevant to oral health and disease, andthe application of this knowledge and these techniques in prevention, diagnosis,treatment and rehabilitation. The third part of the course in ethics aims to developdental practitioners to think and act in ethical manner. The course will help studentsunderstand the ethical and legal principles common in dentistry. The course willprovide information on the legal requirements of informed consent, and themaintenance of confidentiality in the dental environment.I. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of Weeks Contact hoursIntroduction to Dentistry 1 1Operative Dentistry 1 1Dental Radiology 1 1Pedodontics 1 1Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery 1 1Prosthodontic Dental Sciences 1 1Community Dentistry 1 1Orthodontics 1 1Periodontics 1 1Oral Pathology 1 1Oral Medicine & Diagnosis 1 1Endodontics 1 1Behavioral Science & communication skills & Ethics inDentistry 1 1Behavioral Dentistry 1 1Total 14 14II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others14 14 - -

III. Addition learning hours expected for students per week -20/SemesterIV. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning

Skills Description Teachingstrategies

Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Should know thedifferent Lectures. 2 MCQ quiz examsMid-term MCQ



specialities indentistry. examFinal theory examOrals/viva-voceb. Cognitive Should know thedifferentprocedures carriedout in differentspecialities indentistry

Lectures. 2 MCQ quiz examsMid-term MCQexamFinal theory examOrals/viva-vocec. Interpersonal &

ResponsibilitiesDemonstrateethical relationshipwith staff.Should developgood workingrelations with hisprofessionalcolleagues.Should followproper protocol forregular clinicalattendance

Interactive sessionswith students Continuousmonitoring ofstudents byconcerned staff.

d. CommunicationInformationTechnology &Numerical skills

Students will betaught to regularlyupdate theirknowledge relatedto various fields indentistry byincreased use ofinternet/web basedinformation

List of web sitesprovidingknowledge ondifferent dentalspecialities.Registration ofonline journalse. Psychomotor skills - - -

V. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semesterAssessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 15%MCQ’s II 15%Midterm 10%Summative Assessment 60% Practical Exams 20%Written Exams 40%

D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2hrs|week Academic advice: 2hrs|week



E. Learning resources1. An Introduction to the History of Dentistry: With Medical & Dental Chronology &Bibliographic Data by Bernhard Wolf Weinberger. 2005.2. A New Introduction to Social and Behavioural Sciences in Dentistry by GibsonNewton. 2007.3. Essential Skills for Dentists by Peter Mossey, Gareth Holsgrove, Elizabeth Davenport,and David Stirrups. 2006.4. Understanding Dental Health (Understanding Health and Sickness Series) by FrancisG. Serio. 1998.5. Professionalism and Ethics for Dental Care Professionals by Fiona Stuart-Wilson.2009.6. Good Medical Practice: Professionalism, Ethics and Law by Kerry J. Breen, StephenM. Cordner, Colin J. H. Thomson, and Vernon D. Plueckhahn. 2010.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Labs for 40-60 studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement:



Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.

Course Specifications | 4th Semester | Page - 35

4TH SEMESTER

SECOND YEARFOURTH SEMESTER

CODE COURSE TITLE TH PR CRH COH P-REQ211 MDS Oral Biology & Histology I 1 3 2 4 106 PRE,109 PRE222 RDS Advanced DentalBiomaterials 1 3 2 4 221 RDS

224 RDS Dental Anatomy &Occlusion II 1 3 2 4 223 RDS

252 DMS Gross Anatomy &Histology II 3 6 5 9 251 DMS254 DMS Physiology II 2 3 3 5 253 DMS256 DMS Biochemistry II 2 3 3 5 255 DMS103 ISLM Islamic Culture III 2 0 2 2

TOTAL 7 12 21 19 33

Course Specifications | 4th Semester | Oral Biology & Histology I | Page - 36

ORAL BIOLOGY & HISTOLOGY IInstitution Jazan UniversityCollege/Department : College of DentistryA Course Identification and General Information

1 Course title and code Oral Biology & Histology I211 MDS2 Credit hours 2 Credit hours (1+3)3 Contact hours 4 contact hours4 Program(s) in which the course is offered Dentistry5 Name of faculty member responsible for the course Prof. Naglaa NagyProf. Amel Radwan El Hak6 Level at which this course is offered 4th Level7 Year at which this course is offered Second Year8 Pre-requisites for this course 106 PRE, 109 PRE; 211 MDS9 Co-requisites for this course ------10 Location if not on main campus Al-Shawgra

B Objectives

At the end of the course the students should be able to:

Understand the Emberiology of the facial and oral structure. Identify the biological principles and details of the development, structure, and functionof the hard and soft tissues of the oral cavity. Understand the normal structures of the oral tissues which helps in diagnosis regardingoral pathology and oral medicine courses. Realize the macroscopic and microscopic anatomy of the dental structure. Identify the histological structures of enamel, dentine, pulp, cementum and periodontalligament. Recognize the function of the dental structure2. Plans for developing and improving the course:3. Review and analyse collective summary of student performance of all teachingsection of the course every year.4. Acquire feedback regarding planning for improvement of transferable skills andlevel of retention of required knowledge from faculty teaching courses that demandthis course as prerequisite.



C. Course Description:The Oral Biology & Histology I course in dentistry covers the development, microscopicand sub-microscopic structure and functional aspects of hard dental of the oral cavity. Italso covers the Embryonic development of head and neck; morpho-differentiation offace and oral structures; and relationships between development and structure, andfunction in the histology and ultrastructure of oral tissues. The course thus serves as apreparatory course for Oral pathology, Oral medicine, Orthodontics and Periodontics inthe following years. The Oral Biology course will consolidate and augment informationfor the following year of study. The basic-bridging knowledge in this course will assiststudents in building up learning strategies, approaching and understanding clinicalcourses, and add to the student’s ability to clinically evaluate a patient, thus preparingthe student for the courses in clinical sciences.I. Topics to be coveredTopics No. of WeeksEmberiology 3Teeth Development&Formation 3Hard dental structure 6Pulp & Periodontal ligament 3

II. Course components (total contact hours per semester):Topics No. of Weeks Date Contacthours Emberiology Teeth development and formation Enamel,development,composition,properties, andstructure Dentine and Pulp ,development, propertiesstructure and function Cementum and root formation , histologicalstructure and function Periodontal ligament ,histological structureand function

333321

12,19,262-20115,12,193-201126,2,164-201123,30,74,5-201114,215-201128-5-2011

333321

15 15Lab.Practical NO. of. weeks Date Contacthours Emberiology Teeth development and formation

33 12,19,262-20115,12,19 99



Enamel, development, composition,properties, and structure Dentine and Pulp ,development, propertiesstructure and function Cementum and root formation , histologicalstructure and function Periodontal ligament ,histological structureand function Revision

33111

3-201126,2,164-201123,30,74,5-201114-5-201121-5-201128-5-2011

993333. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learninga. Knowledge(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquiredAt the end of the course the students should be able to:a.1. Describe different stages of tooth development and calcification.a.2. Depict development, structure and function of different mineralized oral tissues(dentin, enamel, cementum ).a.3. Name the factors which influence the organizational development of dental andpara-dental tissue.a.4.a.5. Describe biological features of oral and dental tissue formation which helps indiagnosis and treatment of oral diseases.a.6. Identify the intimate relationship between the tooth and its surrounding tissuewhich helps in clinical treatment of diseases.a.7. List structural changes and mechanisms involved in craniofacial developmentand growth.a.8. Describe different phases of prenatal development.

(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge3. Lectures /small group discussion to present main themes and concepts of theories.4. Brainstorming to illustrate the differences in core concepts(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired:3. Multiple choice question (MCQ).4. Matching.b. Cognitive Skills



(i) Cognitive skills to be developeda.1. Develop recognition of physiological process of deciduous tooth exfoliation.a.2. Demonstrate familiarity with theories and concepts of tooth eruption.a.3. Develop recognition of abnormalities of teeth behavior.a.4. Demonstrate the importance of the periodontium.a.5. Depict the affiliation of different parts of the masticatory system (TMJ, teeth andmuscles).a.6. Illustrate the structural functional relationship of different parts of oral mucosa.a.7. Realize the significant difference in structure and function of major and minorsalivary glands.a.8. Recognition of relationship between maxillary sinus and maxillary teeth.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills2. Case study approach to develop rationales for diagnosis of abnormal developmentalproblems.(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills3. MCQ4.c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be developedc.1. Summarize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant toOral Biology.c.2. Distinguish and evaluate normal dental and para-dental structure which helpsin diagnosis of diseasesc.3. Asses and interpret information from various Oral Biology sources.c.4. Specify appropriate judgment in selecting and presenting information usingnormal oral structure and function.c.5. Develop a reasoned argument to common and uncommon problems relevantto Oral Biology.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities2. Direct interactions with students to apply and critique interpersonal skills.d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills



(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.d.1. Recognize function related to structure of oral tissues.d.2. Demonstrate deviation in ordinary appearance of soft and hard oral tissues.d.3. Respond to environmental changes in dental and paradental tissue.d.4. Plan, design, record, execute and communicate an independent research usingOral Biology media and techniques.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skillsGroup tutorial to facilitate selection & utilization of appropriate web material(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skillsAssignments

5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the SemesterAssessment Assessment task(eg. essay, test, examination etc.) Weekdue Proportion of FinalAssessment1 Quiz 1 5th 10%2 Quiz 2 10th 20%3 Activities (Seminars, assignment …. etc) ------ 10%4 Written exam 14th 60%D. Student Support1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and academicadvice.Consultations: 2hrs/ weekacademic advice: 2hrs/ weekE Learning Resources1. Required Text:a. Oral Histology: Development, Structure, and Function by A. R. Ten Cate. 2008



Essential References:1. Orban's Oral Histology & Embryology by Bhaskar. 2006.2. Essentials of Oral Histology and Embryology: A Clinical Approach (Avery, Essentialsof Oral Histology and Embryology) by James K. Avery and Daniel J. Chiego. 2005.3. Essentials of Oral Biology: Oral Anatomy, Histology, Physiology and Embryology byM. Jose. 2008.4. Craniofacial Sutures: Development, Disease and Treatment (Frontiers of OralBiology) by David P. Rice. 2008.5. Comparative Dental Morphology: Selected Papers of the 14th InternationalSymposium on Dental Morphology. 2008.6. Greifswald, Germany (Frontiers of Oral Biology) by T. Koppe, G. Meyer, K. W. Alt, andA. Brook. 2009.7. Oral Anatomy, Histology and Embryology by Barry K B Berkovitz BDS MSc PhD FDS(ENG), G. R. Holland BSc BDS PhD CERT ENDO, and Bernard J Moxham. 2009.

4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc Medicare web Site. Pub med. Sciencedirect

F. Facilities Required1. Computing resources1. Internet.3. Other resources1. PowerPointG Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching1. Students/teacher focus groups.2. Students' personal written reflections.3. Students' teaching appraisal questionnaire.2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department1. Analysis of students' performance progress through factor analysis of written periodicalexams.2. Criteria analysis of students' performance progress for practice and interpersonal skillsby the department.3. Peer evaluation of the instructor.3. Processes for Improvement of Teaching1. Continuous education for new areas that will enhance present performance.



2. Visitors of teaching experts in the field for modelling performance.4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by anindependent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of asample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)1. Periodic exchange and remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member inanother institution.2. Departmental committee to revise sample of randomly selected exams3. Departmental revision of exam report (grade, maximum, min, average, mode andmedian)


Course Specifications | 4th Semester | Advanced Dental Biomaterials | Page - 43

ADVANCED DENTAL BIOMATERIALS1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Advanced DentalBiomaterials, 222 RDS.b. Credit hours 1c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcoursee. Year/Semester at which course offered 2nd Year | 4thSemesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 221 RDS.g. Co-requisites for the course --h. Location if not main campus

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Have a thorough knowledge of dental materials and the skill to manipulate thesematerials. Learn how to attain the best physical and mechanical properties of the materials. Be able to modify procedures and be able to diagnose and correct errors in materialhandling and manipulation. Be able to evaluate, be able to compare and select restorative dental materials forlaboratory and clinical use.C. Course descriptionThis will be the second of the two courses taken after the introductory course in Dentalmaterials. A thorough knowledge of dental materials and the skill to manipulate thesematerials will be taught through series of lectures and in lecture demonstrations.Restorative materials, miscellaneous dental materials, dental waxes, gypsum products,and impression materials are covered in this sub course. The course prepares thestudent to identify terms related to dental restorative materials, identify thecomposition and properties of dental amalgam, identify the preparation procedures fordental amalgam, identify mercury hygiene practices, identify the composition andproperties of zinc phosphate cement, identify the preparation procedures for zincphosphate cement, identify the characteristics and preparation procedures forpolycarboxylate cement, glass ionomer cement and identify the characteristics andclinical uses of zinc oxide and eugenol. The course thus deals with the basic preparationof the student in Dental biomaterials. The course will have one credit hour.



I. Topics to be coveredTopics No. of Weeks Contact hoursDenture base materials 2 8Dental waxes 1 4Dental cements 2 8Composite resin 2 8Bonding agents 1 4Dental Amalgam 2 8Investment materials 2 8Casting of metals 1 4Dental casting alloys 2 8wrought alloys 1 4Finishing and polishing materials 1 4Tarnish and corrosion 1 4Revision 1

II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others1. Denture base materials (idealrequirements , classification, heatand cold-curing acrylic denturebase and modified acrylic resins)Material identification andlaboratory stepsdemonstration.2. Denture base materials(manipulation of heat curedacrylic denture base, defects thatmay occurs during processing ,properties and artificial teeth)Material identification andlaboratory stepsdemonstration.

3. Dental waxes (generalcomposition, characteristicproperties, classification) Material identification.4. Dental cements (applications,requirements, classifications, zincoxide eugenol and zinc phosphatecements).

Material identification withmanual and videodemonstration of theirapplication. For each type5. Dental cements (zincpolycarboxylate, glass ionomercements, resin cements andcalcium hydroxide)Material identification withmanual and videodemonstration of theirapplication. For each type6. Composite resin (requirementsof filling materials, applications,composition and classification) Material identification withmanual on extracted toothand video demonstration1. Composite resin manipulation,properties and new trends ofdental composite) Material identification withmanual on extracted toothand video demonstration2. Bonding agents Introduction,components, generations and Material identification withmanual on extracted tooth



applications) and video demonstration3. Dental Amalgam (introduction,indications, contraindication,amalgam terminology,classifications, low copperamalgam, high copper amalgam,Material identification withmanual on extracted toothand video demonstration

4. Dental Amalgam (manipulationand proportion ) Material identification withvideo demonstration.5. Investment materials (idealrequirements, generalcomposition, low temperatureinvestment (GBI))Material identification withvideo demonstration.

6. Investment materials (hightemperature investmentscomposition and properties) Material identification withvideo demonstration.7. Casting of metals: lost waxtechnique, steps and castingdefects) Material identification withvideo demonstration.8. Dental casting alloys (generalrequirements, differentclassifications, gold casting alloys) Material identification withvideo demonstration.9. Dental casting alloys (basemetal alloys composition andtypes) Material identification withvideo demonstration.10. Wrought alloys: types, usesand properties. Material identification withvideo demonstration.11. Dental porcelain and allceramic restorations. (ceramicstructure, properties, applications ,classifications, composition andmanipulation).Material identification withvideo demonstration.

12. Finishing and polishingmaterials Material identification withvideo demonstration.13. RevisionI. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20hrs/semester

a- knowledge and understandingAt the completion of this course, the dental student should be able to:a.1. Understand deeply the chemical and physical basics essential for handling of the dentalbiomaterials.a.2. Situate the limitations and the durability of every material in an objective dental and socialperspectivea.3. Select the proper material for a specific dental treatment judiciously and in a well-



considered mannera.4. Select material from the commercial market independently and criticallyb- Intellectual skills

At the completion of this course, the dental student should be able to:b1 Analyze the problems systematically and solve them.b2 Distinguish the best innovative dental techniques, materials and tools.b3 Criticize the scientific studies.c- Professional and practical skills

At the completion of this course, the dental student should be able to:c1 Solve the problems that will aid in making appropriate selections of materials for eachpatient's unique needs.c2 Inform the patient correctly, objectively and sufficiently about possible side-effects of thematerials.d- General and transferable skills

Through group working in research, the dental student will:d1 Gain the skill of discussing and accepting different opinion.d2 Use and access a rang of learning resources.d3 Evaluate his own strength and weakness.e- AttitudeThrough the communication with the staff members, the student will:e1 Develop ethical characters for good communication generally with people and specificallywith patients.e2 Have self-confidence.e3 Have emotional maturity.e4 Demonstrate ethical relationship with staff.IV. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester

Assessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 15%



MCQ’s II 15%Midterm 10%Summative Assessment 60% Practical Exams 20%Written Exams 40%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2hrs|week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Phillips' Science of Dental Materials (Anusavice Phillip's Science of Dental Materials) byKenneth J. Anusavice. 2003.2. Delmar's Dental Materials Guide by Donna J. Phinney and Judy H. Halstead. 2008.3. Dental Materials: Properties and Manipulation (Dental Materials: Properties &Manipulation (Craig)) by John M. Powers PhD and John C. Wataha. 2007.4. Dental Materials and Their Selection by William J. O'Brien. 2009.5. Clinical Aspects of Dental Materials: Theory, Practice, and Cases by Marcia A. Gladwinand Michael Bagby. 2008.6. Craig's Restorative Dental Materials by John M. Powers PhD and Ronald L. Sakaguchi.2006.7. Applied Dental Materials by John F. McCabe and Angus Walls. 2008.8. Dental Materials: Clinical Applications for Dental Assistants and Dental Hygienists byCarol Dixon Hatrick, W. Stephen Eakle, and William F. Bird. 2010.9. Materials in Dentistry: Principles and Applications by Jack L. Ferracane. 2001.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation


G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment:



Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:

Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.

Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.


Course Specifications | 4th Semester | Dental Anatomy & Occlusion II | Page - 49

DENTAL ANATOMY & OCCLUSION IIInstitution Jazan UniversityCollege College of DentistryA Course Identification and General Information

1 Course title and code Dental Anatomy & OcclusionII, 224 RDS2 Credit hours 2 Credit hours (1+1+3)3 Contact hours 5 contact hours4 Program(s) in which the course is offered Dentistry5 Name of faculty member responsible for the course Prof.Amel Radwan el HakProf.Naglaa Nagy6 Level at which this course is offered 4th Level7 Year at which this course is offered Second Year8 Pre-requisites for this course 106 PRE, 162 PRE; 223 RDS9 Co-requisites for this course ------10 Location if not on main campus Al-Shawgra

B ObjectivesAfter the completion of the course, the student should have knowledge of the following: Descriptive terms in human masticatory system and dental anatomy. Macroscopic structure of the characteristics of the endodontic space of posteriorpermanent and deciduous teeth (pulp chamber and canal). Sequence of eruption of both permanent and deciduous teeth. Differentiate between permanent and deciduous teeth. Development of tooth occlusion and articulation Macroscopic structure of the features of the crown and the root of both permanent anddeciduous teeth2. Plans for developing and improving the course:a. Review and analyse collective summary of student performance of all teachingsection of the course every year.b. Acquire feedback regarding planning for improvement of transferable skills andlevel of retention of required knowledge from faculty teaching courses that demandthis course as prerequisite.



C. Course Description:Dental Anatomy & Occlusion II is a 2 credit hour course. It deals with the basics of dentaland orofacial structures (mainly, the anatomy, morphology and occlusion of human dentition;permanent and deciduous). It includes the dental arches relationship; teeth alignment andocclusion. The characteristics that maintain anatomical form which promotes health of thedental supporting structures. Laboratory involves imparting technical skills utilizing dental waxto carve human teeth.Upon completion of lectures, tutorials and laboratory, students will be able to carveposterior teeth with proper anatomy, occlusion and contour. Dental anatomy and occlusionprovides the student with the basic didactic information and technical skills prerequisite foradvanced preclinical courses in restorative dentistry.I. Topics to be coveredTopics No. of WeeksMorphology of mandibular premolars 2Morphology of permanent maxillary and mandibular molars 4Deciduous teeth characteristics and outlines 2Forensics and comparative anatomy 1Temporomandibular joint 1Relation and occlusion of teeth 2II. Course components (total contact hours per semester):Topics No. of Weeks Date ContacthoursMorphology of permanent teeth (crown androot) & pulp chambers and canals (endodonticspace): Mandibular first premolar. Mandibular second premolar 11 12-2-201119-2-2011 11 Maxillary molars. Mandibular molars. Deciduous teeth Forensics and comparative anatomy Temporomandibular joint

33211

26-2-20115-3-201112-3-201119-3-201126-3-20112-4-201116-4-201123-4-201130-4-2011

33211



Occlusion Revision Revision

2117-5-201114-5-201121-5-201128-5-2011

211Lab Practical No. of Weeks1. Revision on upper premolars2. Carving of mandibular first premolar3. Carving of mandibular second premolar4. Revision5. Carving of maxillary first molar6. Carving of maxillary second molar7. Revision8. Carving mandibular first molar9. Carving of mandibular second molar10. Revision

21111111111111

12-2-201119-2-201126-2-20115-3-201112-3-201119-3-201126-3-20112-4-201116-4-201123-4-201130-4-20117-5-201114-5-201121-5-201128-5-2011

63333333333333Lectures:14 15 Lab: 143. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learninga. Knowledge(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquiredb- Knowledge:

By the end of the course, the students will be able to:b.1. Differentiate between permanent and deciduous teeth.b.2. Comprehend the characteristics of deciduous teeth.b.3. Describe anatomical land marks of temporomandibular joint.b.4. Acknowledge the minutiae morphology of human permanent posterior teethwhich are relevant to dental practice.b.5. Describe the specific anatomical features of each tooth which helps in diagnosisand treatment of oral diseases.b.6. Identify an extracted tooth.b.7. Detect any deviation in anatomy of permanent teeth.b.8. Describe the anatomy of temporomandibular join.



b.9. Describe the relation of teeth in occlusion(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge1. Lectures /small group discussion to present main themes and concepts of theories.2. Brainstorming to illustrate the differences in core conceptsMethods of assessment of knowledge acquired:1. Multiple choice question (MCQ).2. Matching.b. Cognitive Skills

(i) By the end of the course, the students will be able to:b.1 Demonstrate the ability to recognize patient’s age from the chronology of his/herteeth.b.2 Develop recognition of tooth abnormalitiesb.3 Develop recognition of teeth relation in occlusion.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills1. Case study approach to develop rationales for diagnosis of metabolic problems.(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills1. MCQ (to assess and recognize the different metabolic abnormalities).2. Scenarios or real-life simulation (to interpret/ apply psychodynamic of dentist inclinic in presence of diabetic patient).c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility(i) By the end of the course, students will be able toa.1. Differentiate between the morphological characteristics of permanent teeth.a.2. Summarize the relation between the dental and para-dental tissues.a.3. Depict the common and the uncommon morphology of different root canals anddetect any deviation from usual.a.4. Illustrate tooth contour that affects the supporting dental and para-dentaltissues.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities1. Direct interactions with students to apply and critique interpersonal skills.d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills(i) By the end of the course students will be able toa.1. Be familiar with occlusion of permanent and deciduouse teeth .a.2. Recognize the morphology of permanent teeth.



a.3. Demonstrate the difference between the morphology of posterior permanentteeth.a.4. Recognize anatomy of temporomandibular joint.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills1.Group tutorial to facilitate selection & utilization of appropriate web material(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skills1.Assignments

5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the SemesterAssessment Assessment task(eg. essay, test, examination etc.) Weekdue Proportion of FinalAssessment1 Quiz 1 5th 10%2 Midterm exam 10th 20%3 Activities (Seminars, assignment …. etc) ------ 10%4 Written exam-Practical exam 14th 60%D. Student Support1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and academicadvice.Consultations: 2hrs/ weekacademic advice: 2hrs/ weekE Learning Resources1. Required Text:2. Wheeler's Dental Anatomy, Physiology and Occlusion by Major M. Ash. 2009.2.Essential References:1. Dental Anatomy Coloring Book by Margaret J. Fehrenbach. 2007.2. Woelfel's Dental Anatomy: Its Relevance to Dentistry (Point (Lippincott Williams& Wilkins) by Rickne C. Scheid. 2007.3. Kraus Dental Anat & Occlusions by Ronald E. Jordan, Leonard Abrams, andBertram S. Kraus. 1992 ( or last edition).



4. Netter's Head and Neck Anatomy for Dentistry (Netter Basic Science)by NeilScott Norton. 2006.5. Illustrated Anatomy of the Head and Neck (Fehrenbach, Illustrated Anatomy ofthe Head and Neck) by Margaret J. Fehrenbach and Susan W. Herring. 2006.6. Berkovitz, B. K. B. (2002). Oral Anatomy, Embryology and Histology. 3rd ed.Mosby, Edinburgh.7. Head, Neck and Dental Anatomy by Marjorie J. Short. 2002.8. Quick Reference Guide Dental Anatomy (Quick Study Academic) by Rich Marino.,20044-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc


F. Facilities Required1. Computing resources1. Internet.2. Other resources1. PowerPointG Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes1- Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching1. Students/teacher focus groups.2. Students' personal written reflections.3. Students' teaching appraisal questionnaire.i. Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by theDepartment1. Analysis of students' performance progress through factor analysis of writtenperiodical exams.2. Criteria analysis of students' performance progress for practice and interpersonalskills by the department.3. Peer evaluation of the instructor.3. Processes for Improvement of Teaching1. Continuous education for new areas that will enhance present performance.2. Visitors of teaching experts in the field for modelling performance.4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by anindependent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of asample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)1. Periodic exchange and remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty memberin another institution.2. Departmental committee to revise sample of randomly selected exams3. Departmental revision of exam report (grade, maximum, min, average, mode andmedian)


Course Specifications | 4th Semester | Physiology II | Page - 55

PHYSIOLOGY IIInstitution Jazan UniversityCollege College of DentistryA. Course Identification and General Information

1. Course title and code: physiology -2532. Credit hours: 3 Credit hours (2+1).3. Program(s) in which the course is offered: Dentistry4. Name of faculty member responsible for thecourse Dr. Mohamed Abdel Mohsen5. Level/year at which this course is offered: 4th Level , second Year6. Pre-requisites for this course : Biophysics and other physiologic branches.7. Co-requisites for this course: -----8. Location if not on main campus Al Shawajara CampusB. Objectives

At the end of the course the students should be able to:1. Understand the major theories of physiology.2. Understand different branches of physiology each individual.3. Describe the various mechanisms of actions in physiology.4. Describe the general physiological functions of different systems of the body.5. Integrate theoretical knowledge of physiology into clinical problem.2. Plans for developing and improving the course:1. Review and analyse collective students' performance in internship rotation eachsemester.2. Review and analyse collective summary of student performance of all teachingsection of the course every yearly.3. Acquire feedback regarding planning for improvement of transferable skills andlevel of retention of required knowledge from faculty teaching courses thatdemand this course as prerequisite.4. Benchmark student performance with other similar program teaching similarcourse.



C. Course Description:

The course is required for all undergraduate 2nd year dentist students. The course introducesthe student to various physiological functions and mechanisms of action of different parts of allbody systems. Students involved in this course are expected to, integrate knowledge base fromthe basic sciences theory courses; utilize them in understanding physiology. The focus of thetraining is on the practical skills in cardiovascular, nervous and blood systems. Learning ofstudents is enhanced through the direct interaction between them and with the teacher in theform of small group learning (seminars & tutorials) that will help the students to understandwell and taking self confidence.1 Topics to be Covered Topic No ofWeeks Contacthours

Cardiac muscles & their properties. ECG. Cardiac cycle & heart sounds. 1st Week 3 Cardiac output & its regulation. Blood flow & its regulation. Blood pressure & its regulation. 2ndWeek 3 Arterial pulse & capillary circulation. Blood brain barier & shock. Cardiovascular reserve 3rdWeek 3 Exercise physiology. Food intake & temperature regulation. 4th Week 3 Sensations & sensory receptors. Dorsal & anterolateral lemniscal system. Quiz-1 5th Week 3 Sensations from the head. Somatic sensory cortex. Motor functions of spinal cord. 6th Week 3 Motor functions of the brain stem. Motor functions of basal ganglia. Cerebellum, thalamus & limbic system. Sleep & memory 7th Week 3 Vision & hearing. Smell & taste. Male genital system. 8th Week 3 Female genital system. Pituitary & thyroid glands. 9th Week 3 Adrenal & pancreas. Calcium homeostasis. Quiz-2 10thWeek 3 Glomerular filteration. Tubular functions. 11th 3



Control of ECF & osmolarity. Week Acid base balance. Practical exam. 12thWeek 3 General Revision 13thWeek Final Exam. 14thWeek

2 Course components (total contact hours per semester):Lecture: 36 Tutorial: ---------- Practical Internship: Other: ---------


a. Knowledge1. Integrate theoretical knowledge related to physiology.

(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge1. Lectures /small group discussion to present main themes and concepts of theories andphysiological modalities2. Brainstorming to illustrate the differences in core concepts related to theories andphysiological modalities3. Reading assignment to integrate concepts of physiological theories with actual practicein pathophysiology of different diseases..(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired:1. Multiple choice question (MCQ) (to recognize main concept of physiology.2. Short essay (to provide the meaning of different physiological functions andmechanisms).b. Cognitive Skills(i)Cognitive skills to be developed1. Demonstrate ability to use self abilities on working with colleagues and teacher.2. Demonstrate knowledgeable skill performance in carrying out specific physiological lab.Tests.



(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills1. Role-plays to simulate different behaviours and interaction.2. Seminars to insure the appropriate application of different topics.3. Case study to develop rationales for pathophysiology and diagnosis.4. Attending skill lab. to acquire multidisciplinary professional approach.5. Scenarios to critique and propose physiological case study, as well as means ofevaluation of case.(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills1. MCQ (to assess and recognize the different physiological functions).c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be developed1. Develop awareness into one’s own attitude towards different topics of physiology.2. Value one’s own mental health practices as a professional physiologist.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities1. Conviction mirror to reflect behaviour during role plays assisting in self-awareness.2. Video taping of actual students interactions in groups or one-to-one student patientinteraction (or role plays) to teach dynamics of interaction.3. Direct usage of lab. tools (real-life simulation) to apply and critique interpersonal skills.(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility1. Oral semi structure interview (to demonstrate the ability of communications).2. Seminar (to present project outcome as a demonstration of ability to apply interviewingand interpersonal therapeutic communication skills between student and teacher).d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.Use of web based material related to anatomy and histology to apprise the advancedunderstanding of practical physiology.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skillsGroup tutorial to facilitate selection & utilization of these materials.(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skillsAssignments (to present recent different topic related to physiology).5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the Semester



Assessment Assessment task (eg. essay, test, group project,examination etc.) Week due Proportionof FinalAssessment1 Quiz 1 5th 10 %2 Quiz 2 10th 10 %3 Activities (Seminars, tutorials, survey, presentation,assignment …. etc) and regular attendance. ------ 10 %4 Practical exam 12th 10 %5 Final written exam 14th 60 %D. Student Support

1.Arrangements for visiting different will occupied laboratories2. Providing good environment for studying e.g. data shows, computers and airconditioned classes.

E Learning Resources1. Required Text(s):

2- Gyuton and hall physiology 2006.D. 2. Essential References1- Gannong physiology 2010.

2. Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc Medicare web Site. EBSCO web Site. Pub med. Medicare. Apta.org Wikipedia.



F. Facilities Required

1. Computing resources1. Internet.2. Membership in web based physiological data bases.3. Membership in evidence-based physiological sites.2. Other resources (specify --eg. If specific laboratory equipment is required, listrequirements or attach list)1. Video recording apparatus and facility.2. Conviction mirror.3. Magmatic teaching board.4. PowerPoint/ transparency projector

G Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes

1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching1. Students/teacher focus groups.2. Students' personal written reflections.3. Students' teaching appraisal questionnaire.4. Students' clinical training appraisal questionnaire2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department1. Analysis of students' performance progress through factor analysis of written periodicalexams.2. Criteria analysis of students' performance progress for practice and interpersonal skillsby the department.3. Peer evaluation of the instructor.4. Feedback to/from clinical preceptors3. Processes for Improvement of Teaching1. Staff development of areas which are not satisfactorily taught.2. Continuous education for new areas that will enhance present performance.3. Visitors of teaching experts in the field for modelling performance.4. Clinical preceptor training.



4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by anindependent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of asample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)1. Departmental committee to revise sample of randomly selected exams.2. Departmental revision of exam report (grade, maximum, min, average, mode andmedian).3. Periodic exchange and remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member inanother institution).4. Clinical examination of independent physical therapy faculty member.5. Co evaluation of students' performance including course teacher and lab. preceptor


Course Specifications | 4th Semester | Biochemistry II | Page - 62

BIOCHEMISTRY IIInstitution Jazan UniversityCollege/Department : College of DentistryA Course Identification and General Information1 Course title and code Biochemistry II (256 DMS)2 Credit hours 2 Credit hours (2+3+0)3 Contact hours 5 contact hours4 Program(s) in which the course is offered Dentistry5 Name of faculty member responsible for the course Dr. Ayman Darwish6 Level at which this course is offered 4th Level7 Year at which this course is offered Second Year8 Pre-requisites for this course 255 DMS9 Co-requisites for this course ------10 Location if not on main campus Al-shawgraB ObjectivesAt the end of the course the students should be able to:1. Describe the protein compounds found in humans.2. Describe the general structure of amino acid3. To define and identify protein structure, and types.4. To describe conversion of amino acids to specialized products.5. To describe nucleotide metabolism.6. To show DNA structure, replication, and repair7. To depict RNA structure, synthesis and processing8. To describe regulation of gene expression9. To outline the molecular basis of biotechnology and human disease10. To have a sound knowledge on both water soluble vitamins and fat soluble vitamins,with special emphasis on their role in metabolism and diseases caused by theirdeficiency.11. To describe the role played by minerals in dentistry and medicine.12. To describe the biochemistry of blood with special stress on blood diseases.2. Plans for developing and improving the course:1. Review and analyse collective summary of student performance of all teaching section ofthe course every year.2. Acquire feedback regarding planning for improvement of transferable skills and level ofretention of required knowledge from faculty teaching courses that demand this courseas prerequisite.C. Course Description:The course is required for all undergraduate 2nd year BDS students. This course isdesigned to equip the students with necessary knowledge of biochemistry that would enablethem to work with proficiency in a hospital environment.



III. Topics to be coveredTopics No. of WeeksProtein Structure and Function 2 WNitrogen Metabolism 2 WStorage and Expression of Genetic Information 4 WWater soluble vitamins 2 WFat soluble vitamins 1 WMinerals 1 WBlood 1 WIV. Topics to be covered

TopicsNo. of

Weeks DateContacthoursProtein Structure and Function1. Amino acids structure andclassifications2. Protein structure3. Globular protein4. Fibrous protein5. Enzymes

1 W½ W½ W½ W1 W

12/2/201119/2/201126/2/20125/3/2011

21112Nitrogen Metabolism2. Amino Acids: Disposal of Nitrogen3. Amino Acid Degradation andSynthesis4. Conversion of Amino Acids toSpecialized Products5. Nucleotide Metabolism½ W½ W½ W1 W

12/3/201119/3/2011

1112Storage and Expression of Genetic Information1) DNA Structure, Replication, and Repair2) RNA Structure, Synthesis and Processing3) Protein Synthesis4) Regulation of Gene Expression5) Biotechnology and Human Diseasea. Restriction Endonucleasesb. DNA Cloningc. Vectorsd. DNA libraries:a) Sequencing of cloned DNAfragmentsb) ProbesI) Hybridization of a probe toDNA fragmentsII) Synthetic oligonucleotideprobese. Southern Blottingf. Restriction Fragment Length

1 W½ W1 W½ W½ W½ W

26/3/20112/4/201116/4/2011

23/4/2011

212111



Polymorphisma) Tracing chromosomes from parentto offspringb) Prenatal diagnosisg. Polymerase Chain Reactionh. Analysis of Gene Expressioni. Gene Therapyj. Transgenic Animals ½ W 30/4/2011 1Water soluble vitamins1. Vitamin B12. Vitamin B23. Niacin4. Vitamin B65. Vitamin B126. Folic Acid7. Biotin8. Vitamin C

½ W½ W½ W½ W

7/5/201114/5/2011

1111

Fat soluble vitamins1. Vitamin A2. Vitamin D3. Vitamin K4. Vitamin E½ W½ W 21/5/2011 11

Minerals1. Calcium2. Phosphorus3. Sodium4. Potassium5. Fluorine½ W½ W 28/5/2011 11

Blood1. Haemoglobin structure2. Haem structure and synthesis3. Types of normal haemoglobin4. Types of abnormal haemoglobin5. Porphyrias6. Jaundice7. Sickle cell anaemia.8. Thalassemia

½ W½ W 4/6/2011

11

# Practical Topic Week1 Colorimetry 2nd W2 Serum Glucose 3rd W



3 Oral Glucose Tolerance Test 4th W4 Colorimetric Estimation of Cholesterol in the serum 5th W5 Colorimetric Estimation of Triglycerides in the serum 6th W6 Creatinine Clearance Test 7th W7 Colorimetric Estimation of urea in plasma 8th W8 Colorimetric estimation of uric acid in plasma 9th W9 Colorimetric estimation of serum proteins 10th W10 Colorimetric estimation of bilirubin in plasma 11th W11 Revision 12th W12 Exam 13th W3. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning

a. Knowledge1) Description of the knowledge to be acquireda. At the end of the course the students should be able to understand, recall,describe(read):a) The basic processes of life in molecular terms using the cell as a unit of study.b) The normal and abnormal biochemical processes in man.c) The impact of the inherited metabolic disorders in medicine.b. At the end of the course the students should be able to integrate theoreticalknowledge related to biochemistry into clinical practice2) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge1. Lectures /small group discussion to present main themes and concepts of theories.2. Brainstorming to illustrate the differences in core concepts3) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired:1. Multiple choice question (MCQ).2. Matching.

b. Cognitive Skills

(i)Cognitive skills to be developed1. Demonstrate ability to use biochemical markers of protein, nucleic acids, blood,vitamins, minerals on working with colleagues, family members, and teacher.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills1. Case study approach to develop rationales for diagnosis of blood and mineralsproblems.(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills : MCQ



c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility

(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be developed:Develop awareness into one’s own attitude towards medical disorders of the dentalpatients.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities: by Direct interactionswith students to apply and critique interpersonal skills.d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills

(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain: by Use of web based materialrelated to medical biochemistry of metabolism.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills: by Group tutorial to facilitateselection & utilization of appropriate web material5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the SemesterAssessment Assessment task(eg. essay, test, examination etc.) Weekdue Proportion of FinalAssessment1 Quiz 1 5th 15%2 Quiz 2 10th 15%3 Practical 14th 10%4 Written exam 14th 60%D. Student Support1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and academicadvice.Consultations: 2hrs/ weekacademic advice: 2hrs/ weekE Learning Resources1. Required Text:A Textbook of Biochemistry with Clinical Correlations. T. M. Devlin, 6thEdition, 2006, Wiley- Liss publisher. ISBN 978-0-470-28173-42. Essential References:1) Biochemistry: A Short Course [Deckle Edge]. John L. Tymoczko, Jeremy M.Berg, Lubert Stryer. 2010, W. H. Freeman and Company publisher. ISBN: 0-7167-5840-7.2) Biochemistry, Lippincott’s Illustrated Reviews. Richard Harvey & Denise Ferrier,5th Edition, 2010, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins Publisher.ISBN: 9781609139988.



3. Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc Medicare web Site. Pub med. Sciencedirect

F. Facilities Required1. Computing resources as internet.2. Other resources as PowerPointG Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching1) Students/teacher focus groups.2) Students' personal written reflections.3) Students' teaching appraisal questionnaire.2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department1) Analysis of students' performance progress through factor analysis of writtenperiodical exams.2) Criteria analysis of students' performance progress for practice and interpersonalskills by the department.3) Peer evaluation of the instructor.3. Processes for Improvement of Teaching1) Continuous education for new areas that will enhance present performance.2) Visitors of teaching experts in the field for modelling performance.4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by anindependent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange andremarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)1) Periodic exchange and remarking of a sample of assignments with a facultymember in another institution.2) Departmental committee to revise sample of randomly selected exams3) Departmental revision of exam report (grade, maximum, min, average, mode andmedian)


5TH SEMESTER

THIRD YEAR

FIFTH SEMESTERCODE COURSE TITLE TH PR CRH COH P-REQ311 MDS Oral Biology & Histology II 1 3 2 4 211 MDS313 MDS Oral Radiology I 1 3 2 4 162 PRE321 RDS Preclinical Operative

Dentistry I1 6 3 7 222 RDS331 PDS Community Dentistry 1 0 1 1 261 DEN341 SDS Pre-Clinical Removable

Prosthodontics I1 3 2 4 222 RDS351 DMS General & Systemic

Pathology I1 3 2 4 254 DMS

353 DMS Microbiology &Immunology

2 3 3 5 254 DMS104 ISLM Islamic Culture IV 2 0 2 2TOTAL 8 10 21 17 31

Course Specifications | 5th Semester | Oral Biology & Histology II | Page - 69

ORAL BIOLOGY & HISTOLOGY IIInstitution Jazan UniversityCollege College of DentistryA Course Identification and General Information1 Course title and code Oral Biology & Histology II311 MDS2 Credit hours 2 Credit hours (1+3)3 Contact hours 4 contact hours4 Program(s) in which the course is offered Dentistry5 Name of faculty member responsible for the course Prof.Naglaa NagyProf.Amel Radwan El Hak6 Level at which this course is offered 5th Level7 Year at which this course is offered Third Year8 Pre-requisites for this course 106 PRE, 109 PRE; 211 MDS9 Co-requisites for this course ------10 Location if not on main campus Al-Shawgra

B ObjectivesAt the end of the course the students should be able to:

Understand the biological principles and details of the development, structure, andfunction of the hard and soft tissues of the oral cavity. Understand the normal structures of the oral tissues in preparation for courses in oralpathology and oral medicine. Macroscopic and microscopic anatomy of the dentition, jaws, oral cavity, salivary glands,tongue and temporomandibular joint including the nerve and blood supply. Histological structures of the oral and para-oral tissues of the oral mucous membrane,salivary glands, TMJ and the maxillary sinus. Physiological events that occur in the oral cavity, such as; salivation, eruption andshedding and their clinical considerations.2. Plans for developing and improving the course: Review and analyse collective summary of student performance of all teaching section ofthe course every year.



Acquire feedback regarding planning for improvement of transferable skills and level ofretention of required knowledge from faculty teaching courses that demand this courseas prerequisite.C. Course Description:The Oral Biology & Histology course II in dentistry covers the development, microscopicand sub-microscopic structure and functional aspects of hard and soft oral tissues of theoral cavity. It also relationships between development, structure, and function in thehistology and ultrastructure of oral and paraoral tissues. The course thus serves as apreparatory course for Oral pathology, Oral medicine,Orthodontics and Periodontics inthe following years. The Oral Biology course will consolidate and augment informationfor the following year of study. The basic-bridging knowledge in this course will assiststudents in building up learning strategies, approaching and understanding clinicalcourses, and add to the student’s ability to clinically evaluate a patient, thus preparingthe student for the courses in clinical sciences.

I. Topics to be coveredTopics No. of WeeksOral Mucous Membrane 5Eruption and shedding of teeth 3Salivary Glands 2Temporomandibular joint 2Maxillary Sinus 1Lymph drain of oral cavity 1II. Course components (total contact hours per semester):Topics No. of Weeks Date Contacthours

Oral MucousMembrane,classification,structure andfunction Eruption and shedding of teeth, structureand Abnormal behaviour Salivary Glands, classification, structure andfunction. Temporomandibular joint

53211

53211



Maxillary Sinus Lymph drain of oral cavity

1 114 14Lab.Practical NO. of. weeks Date Contacthours

Oral MucousMembrane,classification,structure andfunction Eruption and shedding of teeth, structureand Abnormal behaviour Salivary Glands, classification, structure andfunction. Temporomandibular joint Maxillary Sinus Lymph drain of oral cavity Revision

4321111

4321111

3. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learninga. Knowledge(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquiredAt the end of the course the students should be able to:a.9. Describe stages of tooth eruptiona.10. Depict development, structure and function of bone.a.11. Grasp the imperative details of the timed physiological process ofdeciduous teeth exfoliation (shedding).a.12. Comprehend phases, factors and theories of eruption.



a.13. Name the factors which influence the organizational development ofdental and para-dental tissue.a.14. Describe biological features of oral and dental tissue formation whichhelps in diagnosis and treatment of oral diseases.a.15. Describe the macro-anatomy, micro-anatomy and ultrastructure ofvarious regions of oral mucosa and the significance of its regional variations.a.16. Comprehend the structure and function of different major and minorsalivary glands.a.17. Recognize the influence of saliva in oral tissues.a.18. Depict the macro-anatomy and micro-anatomy of the TMJ.a.19. Depict the macro-anatomy of the maxillary sinus and its relevant todental practice.a.20. List structural changes and mechanisms involved in craniofacialdevelopment and growth.

(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledge4. Lectures /small group discussion to present main themes and concepts of theories.5. Brainstorming to illustrate the differences in core concepts(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquired:5. Multiple choice question (MCQ).6. Matching.b. Cognitive Skills(i)Cognitive skills to be developeda.9. Illustrate the significance of different stages of tooth development.a.10. Develop recognition of physiological process of tooth formation.a.11. Demonstrate familiarity with theories and concepts of tooth function.a.12. Develop recognition of different stages of tooth developmenta.13. Demonstrate the importance of the tooth attachment apparatus.a.14. Depict the affiliation of different parts of the dental structure(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skills1. Case study approach to develop rationales for diagnosis of abnormal developmentalproblems.(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skills1. MCQ



c. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be developedc.1. Summarize and apply appropriate theories, principles and concepts relevant toOral Biology.c.2. Distinguish and evaluate normal dental and para-dental structure which helpsin diagnosis of diseasesc.3. Asses and interpret information from various Oral Biology sources.c.4. Specify appropriate judgment in selecting and presenting information usingnormal oral structure and function.c.5. Develop a reasoned argument to common and uncommon problems relevantto Oral Biology.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilities3. Direct interactions with students to apply and critique interpersonal skills.d. Communication, Information Technology and Numerical Skills(i) Description of the skills to be developed in this domain.e.1. Recognize function related to structure of oral tissues.e.2. Demonstrate deviation in ordinary appearance of soft and hard dental tissues.e.3. Respond to environmental changes inside and outside craniofacial region.e.4. Plan, design, record, execute and communicate an independent research using

Oral Biology media and techniques.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skillsGroup tutorial to facilitate selection & utilization of appropriate web material(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skillsAssignments

5. Schedule of Assessment Tasks for Students During the SemesterAssessment Assessment task Week Proportion of Final



(eg. essay, test, examination etc.) due Assessment1 Quiz 1 5th 10%2 Quiz 2 10th 20%3 Activities (Seminars, assignment …. etc) ------ 10%4 Written exam 14th 60%D. Student Support1. Arrangements for availability of faculty for individual student consultations and academicadvice.Consultations: 2hrs/ weekacademic advice: 2hrs/ weekE Learning Resources1. Required Text:2. Oral Histology: Development, Structure, and Function by A. R. Ten Cate. 2008

Essential References:1. Orban's Oral Histology & Embryology by Bhaskar. 2006.2. Essentials of Oral Histology and Embryology: A Clinical Approach (Avery, Essentials ofOral Histology and Embryology) by James K. Avery and Daniel J. Chiego. 2005.3. Essentials of Oral Biology: Oral Anatomy, Histology, Physiology and Embryology by M.Jose. 2008.4. Craniofacial Sutures: Development, Disease and Treatment (Frontiers of Oral Biology)by David P. Rice. 2008.5. Comparative Dental Morphology: Selected Papers of the 14th International Symposiumon Dental Morphology. 2008.6. Greifswald, Germany (Frontiers of Oral Biology) by T. Koppe, G. Meyer, K. W. Alt, and A.Brook. 2009.7. Oral Anatomy, Histology and Embryology by Barry K B Berkovitz BDS MSc PhD FDS(ENG), G. R. Holland BSc BDS PhD CERT ENDO, and Bernard J Moxham. 2009.

4-.Electronic Materials, Web Sites etc Medicare web Site. Pub med. Sciencedirect



F. Facilities Required1. Computing resources1. Internet.3. Other resources1. PowerPointG Course Evaluation and Improvement Processes1 Strategies for Obtaining Student Feedback on Effectiveness of Teaching1. Students/teacher focus groups.2. Students' personal written reflections.3. Students' teaching appraisal questionnaire.2 Other Strategies for Evaluation of Teaching by the Instructor or by the Department1. Analysis of students' performance progress through factor analysis of written periodicalexams.2. Criteria analysis of students' performance progress for practice and interpersonal skillsby the department.3. Peer evaluation of the instructor.3. Processes for Improvement of Teaching1. Continuous education for new areas that will enhance present performance.2. Visitors of teaching experts in the field for modelling performance.4. Processes for Verifying Standards of Student Achievement (e.g. check marking by anindependent faculty member of a sample of student work, periodic exchange and remarking of asample of assignments with a faculty member in another institution)1. Periodic exchange and remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member inanother institution.2. Departmental committee to revise sample of randomly selected exams3. Departmental revision of exam report (grade, maximum, min, average, mode andmedian)


Course Specifications | 5th Semester | Oral Radiology I | Page - 76

ORAL RADIOLOGY I1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Oral Radiology 1, 313 MDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Prof Ebtessam ElzefzafDr Sameena parveenDr Reda SabraDr Tenny Johne. Year/Semester at which course offered 3rd Year | 5thSemesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 162 PREg. Co-requisites for the course --h. Location if not main campus Shawajra campus

B. ObjectivesAt the end of the course the students should:1. Know the basic characteristics of ionizing radiation and production of X-rays.2. Identify the structure of the dental x-ray machine and the functions of each part.3. Understand the Biological effects of ionizing radiation on the molecular, cellular, tissueand organ levels with concentration on the hazardous effects of ionizing radiation on theoral and paraoral structures.4. Practice adequate measures for radiation protection of the patient, dental staff andpeople in the immediate environment.5. Understand the Principles of image production and characteristics ofradiographic images.6. Recognize the different types of radiographic films which are utilized in oral andmaxillofacial imaging including basic composition of the radiographic film as well asdifferent types of films according to their size and speed.7. Know the interaction between X-rays and matter, the effect of X-rays on theradiographic film and the factors affecting radiographic image qualities.8. Master the processing of the exposed films in order to produce good quality diagnosticradiographs by both manual as well as automatic film processing.9. Understand well the interaction between the film and the processing solutions.10. Identify common causes of faulty or unsatisfactory radiographs.11. Identify Normal radiological landmarks on the periapical and occlusal radiographs.12. Master the techniques for acquiring good quality intra oral radiographs, namelyPeriapical, bitewing and Occlusal.13. Understand the principles of radiographic interpretation.



C. Course descriptionThe use of x-rays is an essential part of clinical dentistry. As a result, radiographs are oftenreferred to as the clinician main diagnostic aid. Dental Radiology is a branch of dentistry dealingwith the complete examination of the oral cavity needs both clinical and radiographicinvestigations, therefore this course of dental radiology offers the way of examining the hiddenparts of teeth and their supporting structures. The range of knowledge of dental radiographyand radiology required can be divided conveniently into four main sections: Basic physics andequipment, Radiography techniques, Radiation protection, Radiological interpretation. Thiscourse is considered as an introductory course that includes lectures, demonstrations andpractical applications on the previously given lectures. It is consisted of a series of weeklylectures and practical covered in the fifth Semester of third year.I. Topics to be covered

TopicsLECTURES

No. ofWeeks

ContacthoursIntroduction & Radiation Physics

Nature and properties of X-ray Principles of X-ray production Types of radiation Components of X-ray machine Factors controlling the X-ray beam Interactions of X-Rays with Matter

2 2

Radiation biology Interaction between ionizing radiation and living mater- The direct effect The indirect effects Radiation effect on living tissues Radiation effects on oral and para oral structures

1 1

Radiation protection Exposure and Dose in Radiography Units of radiation measurements Maximum permissible dose Methods of exposure and dose reduction. Radiation protection of the patient. Radiation protection of the personnel. The ALARA concept of radiation protection

1 1

X-ray film, intensifying screens, grids Types of films

Intra-oral films Extra- oral films

Film composition Film speed and quality Intensifying screens Grids

1 1



Intra-oral Radiographic techniques-Technique, principles, indications, advantages and disadvantages of:Periapical radiography Paralleling technique Bisecting the angle techniqueBitewing radiographyOcclusal radiography

4 4

Processing techniques Formation of the image Composition and function of the developing solution Composition and function of the fixing solution Manual and automatic film processing.

1 1

Faulty RadiographsCauses of unsatisfactory radiographs How to avoid them. 1 1

Normal radiographic anatomy Maxillary Mandibular

1 1Principles of radiographic interpretation 1 1

Course Component - PracticalTopicsPRACTICAL

No. ofWeeks

ContacthoursRadiation Physics

Identification and labeling the parts of the dental x-raymachine. Factors controlling the X-ray beam

2 6Radiation Protection

Conduct of Examination Methods of radiation protection Use of leaded aprons and collars. Demonstration of Position –and- Distance rule

1 3

Imaging principles and technique Demonstration of X-ray film, intensifying screens & grids usedin radiography

1 3Intra-oral Radiographic techniques, principles, indications,advantages and disadvantages.

Practical application of imaging principles in intra oralradiography. Demonstration of size and shape distortion with change inprojection geometry. Practical exercises demonstrating the effect of X-rays on theradiographic film and factors affecting radiographic imagequality.

7 21



Training in various techniques for acquiring intra oralradiographs, - Periapical, bitewing and Occlusal. Practical application of object localization techniques.Processing of X-ray films Students will be made familiar dark room and the methods offilm processing. Processing of the exposed films in order to produceconsistently good quality diagnostic radiographs by bothmanual and automatic film processing.Demonstration of normal radiographic anatomy. 2 6

Course Component - PracticalLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/

InternshipOthers

13 3 hours/week

II. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20hrs/semesterIII. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning


Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge By the end of this course, thestudents will be able to:Comprehend the basic principlesof ionizing radiation as aform of energy.Understand the physics behindthe basic theories of ionizingradiation: the wave theoryand the quantum theory.Be familiar with the properties ofx-rays and its interactionwith matter.Discuss the mechanism of x raysproduction within the x raytube and those factorswhich affect the quality ofthe produced X ray beam.Identify the basic components ofthe dental X ray machine andthe functions of its parts aswell the operation of suchmachines.Understand the geometry ofimage production, the image

Lectures topresent themain areas anddemonstrations to emphasisethe concepts.Groupdiscussions

Demonstrations to integratethe physicsand concepts ofprojectiongeometry withthe actualradiographic

MCQs , andviva voce



characteristics and possiblefaults and artifacts whichmight occur while makingthose radiographic images.Master the two techniques ofperiapical radiography“paralleling and bisectingangle techniques" as well asbitewing and occlusalradiography of maxillaryand mandibular teeth withits different modifications.Identify the causes for faultyradiographsHave a thorough knowledge ofradiopaque and radiolucentnormal anatomicallandmarks of the maxilla andmandible.

procedure.

b. Cognitive The students should demonstratethe ability of professionaljudgment in patient selection forradiographic examination.They should also demonstrate theability to request appropriatechoice of technique, equipmentand operation of the equipment.Students should be aware of thehazards of radiation and be alertall the time so as not to put theirsor others health at risk.Sense of perception to assess theimage quality of the processedradiograph.

Practical andDemonstrations Closesupervisionof thestudentswhileperformingradiographicprocedures.

c. Interpersonal &Responsibilities

Work efficiently and effectively asa team.Building good spirit.Radiation safety proceduresshould be understood andfollowed by all.GroupAssignment One to onestudentteacherdirectinteraction.


Develop ExcellentCommunication skills with widerange of individuals.Utilize information andtechnology as means of learning,communication, data collection.Group tutorialsfor utilizationof appropriateweb basedradiologymaterial.

Assignments.



Make verbal and writtenpresentations using appropriateaudio visual aids.e. Psychomotorskills Illustrate the placement of thefilm, film holder, position-indicating device and central rayin paralleling and bisecting theangle technique.Illustrate the processing of theexposed films by both manual aswell as automatic film processer.

Audio visualdemonstrationof differentradiographictechniques.Step by stepevaluation toensure thatthe studenthas masteredeachprocedurebeforeproceedingto next step.

IV. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semesterAssessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 10%MCQ’s II 10%Midterm 20%Final term exam 60% Written Exam 30%Practical Exam 20%Oral Exam 10%

D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2hrs|week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Oral Radiology: Principles and Interpretation by Stuart C. White DDS PhD and Michael J.Pharoah. 2008.2. Exercises in Oral Radiology and Interpretation by Robert P. Langlais. 2003.3. Eric Whates: Essenetials of dental Radiography and Radiology, 3rd edition, Elsevierscience 2003.4. Haring and Jansen Howerton: Dental Radiography: principles and Techniques, 3rdEdition, saunders, 2006.5. Master Dentistry: Volume 1: Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery, Radiology, Pathology andOral Medicine by Paul Coulthard, Keith Horner, Philip Sloan, and Elizabeth D. Theaker.2008.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Phantom Head Labs for 40-60 studentsb. Computing resources



Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:



Course Specifications | 5th Semester | Preclinical operative dentistry I | Page - 84

PRECLINICAL OPERATIVE DENTISTRY I1. Institution: College of Dentistry

2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Preclinical operativeDentistry I, 321 RDSb. Credit hours 3(1+2)c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Dr Syed Nahid BasheerDr. Abbas Rizvie. Year/Semester at which course offered 3rd Year /5th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 222 RDSg. Co-requisites for the course --h. Location if not main campus shawajrah

B. ObjectivesAfter completion of the course the students should:1- Identify the factors that influence operative dentistry both today and in the future2- Identify and classify carious lesions3- Know the aims, objectives and terminologies of operative dentistry4- Classify and describe the tooth preparation5- Understand the principles of Tooth Preparation and the various steps involved in it6- Possess the appropriate theoretical and practical knowledge of Hand and rotary cuttingInstruments7- Apply the concepts of class I Amalgam cavity preparation8- Know the applied aspects of glass ionomer cement9- Know the applied aspects of composite resin material



C. Course descriptionThis course is provided by the department of Restorative dental sciences during the firstsemester of the third year. The course consists of two parts, theory and practicals, in which theformer includes lectures and seminar presentations and the later includes the application of thetheory knowledge gained in the theoretical sessionsThe course is given as one lecture and two lab sessions per week for the whole semester andwill have three credit hours, and seven contact hours.In this course the students will be trained to Identify and classify carious lesions , know how tomanipulate operative instruments, apply the concepts of class I & V Amalgam cavitypreparation on artificial teeth, manipulate restorative materials like composite and glassionomer cement. and apply rubber dam on the manikin.SI NUM

LECTURES

Topics No. ofcredithrs

Contacthours1 Introduction to Operative Dentistry 1 12 Cariology-1 1 13 Fundamentals of tooth preparation 3 34 Hand cutting instruments & instrumentation 2 25 Rotary Cutting Instruments & instrumentation 2 26 Class I Amalgam Cavity Preparation & restoration 2 27 Introduction to glass ionomer restorations 1 18 Introduction to composite restorations 1 1

SINUM

PRACTICALS No. ofcredit hrs

Contacthours1 Introduction & Orientation to the phantom lab andDemonstration of ergonomics. 1 3

2 Identification, and arrangement of hand cuttinginstruments.drawing and labelling of hand cutting instruments 1 33 Identification and description of hand pieces and burs 1 3



drawing and labelling of rotary cutting instruments4 Application of Rubber dam on maxillary & MandibularTeeth on manikin 2 66 Preparation of various Class I cavity designs for Amalgamrestoration in the artificial posterior teeth 7 217 Restoration of various Class I cavities with amalgamrestorative material in the artificial posterior teeth 5 158 preparation of Class V cavity designs for Amalgamrestoration in the artificial posterior teeth 3 99 Restoration of Class V cavities with Amalgam restorativematerial on artificial posterior teeth 2 610 Restoration of class v cavities with glass ionomer cement 2 611 Restoration of cavities with composite resin restorativematerial in posterior teeth 4 12

I. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical Others13 credit hrs ------ 28 credit hrs ------II. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20hrs/semester

III. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of LearningSkills Description Teaching

strategiesMethod ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Identify dentalcaries and itsclassificationRecognize thefundamentals ofcavity preparationin all toothsurfaces forAmalgam

Recognize and

Explanationutilising Microsoftpower pointincluding picturesExplanations bydrawing picturesInteractions withthe students toexplain theconcepts taught todevelop selfinterest andcompetitionamong the fellow

Continuousassessments anddiscussions whichincudes Quizzes &Midtermexamination(T/P)&Finalexamination(T/P)



describe differentinstrument usedin OperativeDentistrystudents

b. Cognitive Students willdevelop goodconcentration onthe topics whichwill result in goodconcentration,perception andneverthelessmemory all ofwhich leading tounderstanding,recollection,reproduction ofthe taughtconcepts (boththeoretical andpractical) at anygiven time.

Explanationutilising Microsoftpower pointExplanatorydrawing to clarifysome partsGuiding studentsfollowing up thework at regulartime intervalsPracticaldemonstrations ofwhat have beentaughttheoretically

Continuousassessment in theform of Quizzes &Midtermexamination2.Finalexamination-Theory/Practical


The students areencouraged tohave an attitudefor commitment tosucceed in thefield, work wellwith the fellowstudents andmaintain goodrelationship withstaff members,withresponsibilitytowards finishingall assignments ontime.

The students arealways encouragedto the best infriendly way, andassignments aregiven deadlines tobe submitted.practicalrequirement areset at a definitenumber

Assignments ontheoretical aspectsthat is delivered ata required timeAssessment by thestaff members ontheir behaviour andattendanceIssuing deadlineson a givenassignmentd. Communication

InformationTechnology &Numerical skills

Know the basicsof communicationand informationtechnology, utilisethese skills thebest way possiblein theirassignment

The students areguided to carry outweb based searchand encouraged tocollect material ofrelevancepertaining tooperative dentistryand activelyinvolve incirculating the

Evaluate theirmethod ofcollection ofe-based facts &Assessment of themethod andduration of timeinvolving the same.



electronicallycollected materialwith the fellowcolleagues andstaff members.e. Psychomotor skills use theinstrumentsrequired toperform cavitypreparationable to handleengine drivenrotaryinstrumentation ina proper and safewayproper use ofamalgam material

Livedemonstrationscritical evaluationof the work donein constructivemanneradjuncts in theform of lectures orillustrativediagrams,lab sessions onartificial teeth.

The students willhave continuousassessment on thepractical work andthe students areexpected to fulfilthe requirementsset.

Schedule of assessment task for students during the semesterAssessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 5%MCQ’s II 5%Requirements 10%Mid term practicalexam 10%Mid term written exam 10%Summative Assessment 60% Final Practical Exam 30%Final Written Exams 30%

1- Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2hrs|week Academic advice: 2hrs/weeka- Dr Syed Nahid Basheerb- Dr Abbas Rizvi2- Learning resources1. Fundamentals of Operative Dentistry: A Contemporary Approach by James B. Summitt, J.William Robbins, Thomas J. Hilton, and Richard S. Schwartz. 2006.2. Sturdevant's Art and Science of Operative Dentistry (Roberson, Sturdevant's Art andScience of Operative Dentistry) by Theodore Roberson, Harold O. Heymann, and EdwardJ. Swift. 2006.



3. Textbook of Operative Dentistry by Sharad Chandra and Sangita Chandra. 2008.4. Principles of Operative Dentistry by A. J. E. Qualtrough, Julian Satterthwaite, LeeanMorrow, and Paul Brunton. 2005.5. Pickard's Manual of Operative Dentistry (Oxford Medical Publications) by Edwina A. M.Kidd, Bernard G. N. Smith, and Timothy F. Watson. 2003.3- Facilities requireda. Accommodation


4- Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields.



Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.


Course Specifications | 5th Semester | Community Dentistry | Page - 91

COMMUNITY DENTISTRY1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Community Dentistry,331 PDSb. Credit hours 1c. Program in which the course is offered Dentistryd. Name(s) of the faculty member(s) responsible for thecourse Dr Aadil InamdarDr Kaushik SenguptaDr Santosh KumarTadakamandlae. Year/semester at which the course is offered 3rd Year/5th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 261 DENg. Co-requisites for the course –h. Location (if not main campus) Shawajara Campus

B. ObjectivesAfter completion of the course, the students should be able to: Define dental public health and describe the role of the dental professional in the healthcare community Identify the broad socio-environmental determinants of health Demonstrate an awareness of health and social inequalities Discuss the importance of the primary health care approach in promoting public health Describe the current dental care delivery system in Saudi Arabia as well as those in the US,UK, and Canada Describe the role of the government in public health service at the country, provincial, andlocal levels Discuss the strategies and approaches to oral health promotion and disease prevention Describe the principles of oral health needs assessment and identify the needs of a targetpopulation through appropriate assessment techniques Discuss the social, economic, and other factors that influence the utilization of dentalservices Describe the general principles of planning, management, and evaluation of health careprograms Identify the legal, professional, and ethical issues affecting dental care



C. Course descriptionWhile dentistry mostly deals with a patient’s individual requirements, community dentistryor dental public health targets the community as a whole. The Community Dentistry courseseeks to develop an understanding of the basic concepts of dental public health, includingthe broader social and environmental determinants of health; primary health care;organization of dental health services; oral health promotion and disease prevention; oralhealth needs assessment; and planning, implementation, and evaluation of community-based dental programs. A brief introduction to professional ethics is provided; further, thecurrently accepted standards of conduct and behavior for members of the dental professionand the legal system and its role and application to the practice of dentistry are discussed.The course material is presented from the perspective of the community with local andinternational examples. The goal is to equip dental health professionals with skills such thatthey can appropriately deal with the ever-changing trends in dentistry; analyze and solveenvironmental, social, and economic issues related to oral health; and practice and developoral health promotion and prevention strategies at the individual and community levels.The course consists of didactic lectures, case presentations, and discussion sessions.II. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of weeks Contact hoursIntroduction to public health and dental public healthDefinitions; determinants of health and oral health 1 1Primary health care 1 1Concepts of health, diseases & prevention 1 1Health promotion and oral health education 2 2Levels of Prevention of dental diseases 3 3Demand, need, access, and utilization of oral health services 1 1Ethics and jurisprudence 1 1Program planning and evaluation 1 1Overview of health care systemsOrganization of health and dental services in Saudi Arabiaand abroad (US, UK, and Canada) 2 2Nutrition and Oral Health 1 1Health Agencies of the world 1 1Financing of Dental care 1 1

III. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others14 – – –

IV. Additional learning hours expected for students: 20 per semester



V. Development of learning outcomes in different domains of learningSkills Description Teaching strategies Method of

assessmenta. Knowledge Comprehensiveunderstanding andknowledge ofcommunity dentalhealth Understanding ofthe integration ofthe principles ofpreventive dentistrywith other dentalspecialties Understanding ofthe areas of currentresearch anddevelopment indental public health

Provision ofextensive learningnotes andmaterials tostudents Seminars Guided reading

Examinations Continuous take-home assignments Quizzes

b. Cognitive Application of theconcepts andprinciples ofpreventive dentistryand dental publichealth

Class projects fromstudents Seminars fromstudents Writtenassignments fromstudents

Monthly assignmentreport Written assignmentreport

c. Interpersonalskills andresponsibilities

Takingresponsibilities Communicatingeffectively withpatients andcolleagues Continuousprofessionaldevelopment Presentation skills

Student teachingmaterials Problem-basedlearning exercises Group discussions Seminarpresentations

Group projects Continuousassessment Writtenexaminations Evaluation ofseminarpresentation

d. Communication,informationtechnology, andnumerical skills

Practicalimplementation ofevidence-baseddentistry Identification of thebest availableevidence foranswering clinical

Student-ledteaching materials Use of softwaresuch as EndNote Use of MicrosoftPower Point andother presentationplatforms and

Continuousassessment Assessment ofsoftwareproficiency Writtenexaminations



questions indentistry Appropriatecomputer skills forundertakingliterature searchesand for preparingscientific documents Effectivecommunication(both written andoral) Use of informationtechnology inacademics andresearch Presentation skills

methods Use of informationandcommunicationtechnology

e. Psychomotorskills

– – –VI. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester

Assessment Proportion Task Proportion

Continuous assessment 40% Quiz I 10%Quiz II 10%Midterm written exam 20%Summative assessment 60% Oral exam (viva voce) 20%Final written exam(open book) 40%

D. Student supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2 h per week Academic advice: 2 h per week



E. Learning resources1. Essential Dental Public Health by Blanaid Daly, Richard G. Watt, Paul Batchelor, andElizabeth T. Treasure. Oxford University Press, 2002.2. Dentistry, Dental Practice, and the Community (sixth edition) by Brian A. Burt and StevenA. Eklund. Saunders, 2005.3. Principles of Dental Public Health (fourth edition) by James M. Dunning. HarvardUniversity Press, 1986.4. Concepts in Dental Public Health (second edition) by Jill Mason. Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, 2010.5. Developing Practice for Public Health and Health Promotion (third edition) by JennieNaidoo and Jane Wills. Bailliere Tindall, 2010.6. Community Oral Health by Cynthia M. Pine and Rebecca Harris. Quintessence Publishing,2007.7. Dental Public Health: An Introduction to Community Dental Health (second edition) byGeoffrey L. Slack and Brian A. Burt. Butterworth-Heinemann, 1981.8. Jong’s Community Dental Health (fifth edition) by George M. Gluck and Warren M.Morganstein. Mosby, 2002.9. Primary Preventive Dentistry (seventh edition) by Norman O. Harris, Franklin Garcia-Godoy, and Christine N. Nathe. Prentice Hall, 2008.10. Textbook of Preventive Dentistry (second edition) by Richard E. Stallard. W.B. Saunders,1982.11. Outlines & Highlights for Dentistry, Dental Practice, and the Community by Burt, ISBN:0721673090 (Cram101 Textbook Outlines) (fifth edition) by Cram101 Textbook Reviews.Academic Internet PUBLISHERS Inc. (AIPI), 2006.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40 to 60 students Laboratories for 40 to 60 studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to the Internet Institutional membership-based access to medical literature databases (includingMedline) and reputed and relevant online journals Software: Microsoft Office and EndNotec. Other resources Overhead projectors



G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining student feedback on the effectiveness of teaching Teacher-student discussion, focus groups Student surveys on the effectiveness of teaching

b. Other strategies for evaluation of the effectiveness of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment Monitoring student performance and progress through periodic examinations andassessments Feedback, self-appraisal, and intra-departmental discussions on the effectiveness ofteaching Peer evaluations

c. Processes for the improvement of teaching Identifying and evaluating areas of weaknesses and working on their improvement Continuing dental education programs Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling

d. Processes for verifying standards of student achievement Random sampling and checking of examination papers by the ExaminationCommittee Evaluation and assessment of students’ examination reports Re-evaluating a sample assignment by internal and external faculty members Evaluation of student performance and examination reports as a whole

e. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the courseReview Semesterly and yearly reviews of student performance in all teaching areas Review of feedback for planning and improvement of transferable skills Review of feedback on the level of retention of required knowledge from facultyteaching courses that demand this course as a pre-requisite External benchmarking of student performance with that of other similar institutesPlanning Curriculum and syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements Review and feedback for teachers for planning improvement strategies Provision of additional training for staff as and when required Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvement strategies Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to fine-tune the course in line withinternational standards


6TH SEMESTER

THIRD YEARSIXTH SEMESTER

CODE COURSE TITLE TH PR CRH COH P-REQ312 MDS Oral Pathology I 1 3 2 4 311 MDS314 MDS Oral Radiology II 2 3 3 5 313 MDS315 MDS Anaesthesia & Exodontia 1 3 2 4 252 DMS322 RDS Preclinical OperativeDentistry II 1 6 3 7 321 RDS332 PDS Epidemiology &Biostatistics

1 0 1 1 331 PDS342 SDS Pre-Clinical RemovableProsthodontics II

1 3 2 4 341 SDS352 DMS General & SystemicPathology II 1 3 2 4 351 DMS354 DMS Pharmacology 2 0 2 2 256 DMS

TOTAL 8 10 21 17 31

Course Specifications | 6th Semester | Oral Pathology I | Page - 98

ORAL PATHOLOGY IInstitution Jazan UniversityCollege College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationCourse Title Oral Pathology ICode 312 MDSCredit Hours 2Year/Semester at which the course isoffered

3rd year/6th Semester

Pre-Requisites for the course Oral Biology& Histology II 311 MDS

Program in which the course is offered Dentistry

Name of faculty memberresponsible for the course

Dr. Sanaa Saleh

Location if not on main campus Al Shawajrah campus

B. Objectives

Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology is the dental speciality and discipline of pathology thatdeals with the nature, identification and management of wide variety of diseasesaffecting the Oral and Maxillofacial regions. The diagnosis and treatment of thesediseases comprise an essential part of the practice of dentistry. The objective of this course is to provide the comprehensive information needed toidentify and manage oral abnormalities, diseases/conditions in the clinical practice inwhich the students will be involved after graduation. The course provides a complete understanding of the pathologic causes, pathogenesis,processes, effects and prognosis of these diseases. The course enhances diagnostic skills through the use of clinical, radiographic,microscopic, biochemical or other examinations and the development of differentialdiagnosis for similar diseases.C. Course descriptionThis course is offered during the 6th semester of the third year and the 7th semester ofthe fourth year and has four credit hours. The course combines lecture presentations withpractical, including microscopic laboratory sessions and clinicopathologic conferences (CPC)arranged in such way that the practical and the CPC sessions are correlated with the subjecttopics covered in the didactic lectures. Students involved in this course are expected to integrateand correlate knowledge concerning clinical, radiographical and microscopic features; utilisingthem in obtaining the diagnosis of oral and maxillofacial diseases.

I. Topics to be covered in Oral Pathology I



II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship OthersLectures 14 100 minutes for microscopic 20 minutes will

Topics Number ofweeks

ContacthoursIntroduction, principles of investigation and diagnosis

Introduction Principles of investigation and diagnosis 1st w 2

Developmental defects of oral and maxillofacial region Developmental defects of the face Developmental defects of the tongue Developmental defects of the jaws

2nd w 2Developmental Defects of the teeth

Environmental alterations of teeth Developmental alterations in the number of teeth Developmental alterations in the size of teeth Developmental alterations in the shape of teeth Developmental alterations in the structure of teeth

3rd w 2

Dental caries Definition and epidemiology Radiographic features Classification Histopathological features Protective mechanisms (dentinal reactions) Etiology of dental caries

4th, 5th w 4

Pulp diseases Pulpitis Secondary dentin Pulp calcfications

6th w 2Periapical lesions

Periapical granuloma (chronic apical periodontitis) Acute apical periodontitis Periapical abscess Spread of dental infection Osteomyelitis

7th w 2

Periodontal diseases 8th w 2Cysts of the jaws and oral soft tissues Odontogenic Cysts Non-odontogenic developmental (fissural Cysts) Non epitheliated bone cysts Cysts of the soft tissues

9th, 10th w 4Bacterial, viral and mycotic diseases

Bacterial infections Viral Infections Fungal and Protozoal Infections

11th, 12th w 4Allergic and immunologic diseases 13th w 2Physical and chemical injuriesRevision 14th w 11



lab per week be used for CPC&/or assignmentpresentation.III. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20hrs/semester


a. Knowledge

(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquireda) To know the common clinical features and signs and symptoms of lesions originatingfrom soft and hard tissues of oral and paraoral region.b) To recognize the pathologic changes of oral and maxillofacial lesions at bothmacroscopic and microscopic levels.c) To know the current concepts of oral and maxillofacial pathology.d) To understand the contemporary theories on disease etiology, pathogenesis, processes,prognosis and current therapeutic regimens.e) To know the use of special diagnostic laboratory investigations and staining methodssuch as immunohistochemistry.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledgea) Data show lectures are given.b) Written assignment will be requested from students.c) Referral to different textbooks for specific items for private study/learning hours.(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquireda) Assignment evaluation, discussion and scoringb) Short quizzesc) Written examinations including Short Answers, Essay, Definitions,

b. Cognitive Skills

(i) Cognitive skills to be developeda) This course forms a bridge between the didactic histopathological aspects of oralpathology and the practical clinical radiographic and analytical considerations.b) The student should develop the ability to correlate clinical and radiographic features tothe concomitant histopathological changes and analyse data in a comprehensive way.c) Students should acquire the capability for differentiating similar oral diseases.d) Students should be able to interpret the microscopic features and to makehistopathological diagnosis.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skillsa) Clinico-pathologic conference (CPC) including case histories, clinical and microscopicslides using data show is given.



b) Students interpret, compare, contrast, discuss and correlate clinical and radiographicdata to the histopathologic features, differentiate and delineate similar lesions andreach final diagnosis.c) Students will be exposed during the practical sessions to the histopathological changesassociated with almost all the oral lesions(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skillsa) Continuous laboratory assessmentb) CPC- discussion, and evaluationc) Written examination will include multiple choice questions.d) Practical examination will include spot diagnosis for histopathological features usingglass slides in addition to case histories, using clinical and microscopic slides presentedby data showc. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility

(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be developeda) Students respect academic clinical staff and peersb) Students describe the importance of different points of view and team workc) Each group will be responsible to present and discuss the selected topic.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilitiesa) Students are divided into groups; each group is requested to make power pointpresentation about selected topic related to the didactic ones.Student works with others and interacts with team.b) Students will be guided, supervised by an advisor staff memberc) Students should make comprehensive presentation for the topic.(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibilitya) Staff members will discuss and evaluate the presentation for each groupd. Numerical and Communication Skillsa) Use of web based material related to oral pathology to appraise the advanced or up todate concept of oral diseasesb) Students will be requested to find out the prevalence of the lesion in their writtenassignment (hospital-based)(i) Description of the numerical and communication skills to be developed

Communicate with responsible people, and search to find out the prevalence of thelesion of interest in their written assignment



(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skillsa) Recommend students to contact person in charge in University hospital, and/or Ministryof health central pathology labb) Revise the national cancer registry for any useful information(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skillsa) Evaluate their assignment by staff memberse. Psychomotor Skills (if applicable)(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance requireda) Familiarize students with microscope adjustments(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skillsb) Instructions and continuous supervision during student usage of microscope(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skillsa) Microscopic laboratory exam

V. Scheduling of Assessment Tasks for Students during the semesterAssessment Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,examination etc.) Week due ProportionContinuous Assessment 40%1 Written assignment & presentation 5%2 Quizzes 3, 5,9 and 11 10%3 Mid term 7th 20%4 Attendance andEvaluation of the practical note 1-15 5%Summative Assessment 60%1 Final practical ExaminationSpot diagnosis of glass slidesCPC Examination 1515 10%10%2 Final written Examination 40%Total 100%

D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2hrs|week Academic advice: 2hrs/week



E. Learning resources

Essential Text Book and Atlas- Oral & Maxillofacial PathologyNeville BW, Damn DD, Allen CM & Bouquot JE3rd ed, 2008WB Saunders Co.- Oral Pathology – Clinical Pathologic CorrelationRegezi JA, Sciubba JJ & Jordan RCK5th ed, 2008WB Saunders Co.- Cawson’s Essentials of Oral Pathology and Oral MedicineCawson RA and Odell EW8th ed, 2008Churchill Livingstone, Elsevier,London, New York, Oxford, Philadelphia.- Color Atlas of Oral Diseases, Clinical and Pathologic CorrelationsCawson, Bennie, Barrett & WrightLatest Edition Recommended Text Book and Atlas- Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology: A rational for diagnosis and treatmentRobert E Marx, Diane Stern1st ed, 2002Quintessence Publishing Co.- Contemporary Oral & Maxillofacial PathologySapp JP, Eversole LR, Wysock GP2nd ed, 2003Mosby Co. St Louis- Oral PathologySoames JV and Southam JC4th ed, 2005Oxford- Text book of Oral PathologyShaferLatest EditionWB Saunders Co.- Color Atlas of clinical Oral PathologyNeville, Damm, White, Waldron2nd ed, 1999William and Wilkins, Baltimore.- A Color Atlas of Orofacial DiseasesW.R.Tyldesley



Latest EditionWolfe- A color Atlas of Oral PathologyLeeLatest editionWolfe- Color Atlas of Common Oral DiseasesRobert P. Langlais, Craig S Miller, Jill S Nield-Gehrig, 2009. Electronic Materials, Web Sites etchttp://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.govhttp://www.sciencedirect.com/http://www.ada.org Other learning material such as computer-based programs/CD, professionalstandards/regulationsInteractive Atlas of Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology (CD-ROM)F. Facilities required1. Accommodation

Lecture rooms with a seating capacity for 40-60 students 2 hours/week forlectures. Labs with 40-60 light binocular microscopes (each one has 4 augmentation x4,x10, x20, and x40) 2 hours/week for practical scissions.2. Computing resources A laptop with a projector for power point presentations Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with online access to data bases ( internet and related scientificpublications) Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journals.3. Other resources Oral Histopathology adequately equipped laboratory Overhead projectors

G. Course evaluation and improvement processes1. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Confidential student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaire2. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by the department: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodic examinationsand assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.3. Processes for improvement of teaching:



By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on its improvement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling. Regular feedback to staff members4. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking exam papers by examination committee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Periodic exchange for advisory staff member Remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in anotherinstitution Quizzes conducted as a part of continuous assessment Small group student’s presentation and discussion in the lab under facultysupervision Evaluation of collective students’ performance, tutors and examination reportsas a whole5. Arrangements for periodical review and effective planning for the course improvement:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teaching fields. Reviewing feedbacks from colleagues and students for planning andimprovement of transferable skills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledge fromfaculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark with other similar institutesteaching similar course and working on its improvement.Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs and requirements. Periodic feedback from colleagues and students for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as where and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvement strategies Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.


Course Specifications | 6th Semester | Oral Radiology II | Page - 106

ORAL RADIOLOGY II1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Oral Radiology II, 314 MDSb. Credit hours 3c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Prof Ebtessam ElzefzafDr Sameena parveenDr Reda SabraDr Tenny Johne. Year/Semester at which course offered 3rd Year | 6thSemesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 313 MDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus - Shawajra campus

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Be thorough with the Radiographic interpretation of dental caries, periodontal andperiapical-pathosis. Know the Radiographic appearance of various dental anomalies and trauma to the teeth. Know the principles and applications of digital radiography and its uses in the field ofOral and Maxillofacial Radiology. Understand the Principles, indications, advantages and disadvantages of panoramicradiography and steps in taking a panoramic radiograph. Describe the advanced imaging modalities, their uses in the head and neck including CT,MRI, Ultrasound and nuclear medicine. Differentiate between various types of inflammatory lesions of jaws and their clinicaland radiographic features, Differentiate between odontogenic and non odontogenic cysts, common benignodontogenic and non odontogenic tumors, and malignant lesions. Students should know radiological interpretation of different types of bone diseases thathave jaw manifestations, soft tissue calcifications. Should have knowledge on radiological interpretation of fractures of the jaws and facialbones, their systemic disease and syndromes manifested in the jaws. Demonstrate sound knowledge on different radiographic technique used to examineTMJ, disorders affecting the TMJ, maxillary sinus anatomy, technique used to examinesinus. Have sound knowledge of imaging of salivary glands, and the radiographic appearanceof the most common diseases affecting them.C. Course description



This course is in continuation of the introductory course which is Oral Radiology I andincludes radiographic interpretation of various pathological lesions that aid in diagnosistreatment planning and management of patients. It also includes extraoral radiographicprojections and advanced imaging modalities. This course also provides a basic introductionto implant radiology.This course includes lectures, demonstrations and practical applications on the previouslygiven lectures. It consists of a series of weekly lectures and practical covered in the sixthSemester of third year.The course is taught over one semester and carries three credit hours. In addition to all thisthe student should write a detailed report about all the abnormalities identified on theradiograph prescribed.I. Topics to be covered

LECTURE - Topics No. of Weeks Contact hoursRadiographic appearance of dental caries, periodontal diseaseand Periapical Disease 1 2Panoramic radiography Principles of Panoramic Image Formation, panoramic machine, patient positioning,radiographic appearance of normal anatomy

1 2Extra oral radiographic techniques

Skull projections : Posterioanterior projection, lateralskull projection, lateral cephalometric projection,Waters' projection, reverse-towne's projection,submentovertex projection, Mandibular ObliqueLateral Projections1 2

Dental Anomalies and Developmental disturbances of faceand jaws 1 2Trauma to the teeth and facial structure 1/2 1Inflammatory Diseases 1/2 1Cyst of the jaws 1/2 1Tumors of the jaws 1/2 1Disease of Bone manifesting in Jaw bones 1/2 1Systemic diseases manifesting in jaw bones 1/2 1Salivary gland radiology 1 2Advanced imaging modalities Digital imaging, Computed tomography, magneticresonance imaging, Nuclear medicine,Ultrasonography

2 4Temperomandibular joint imaging 1 2Orofacial Implant Radiology

Radiographic Assessment of Dental implants, imagingtechniques, Intraoperative and postoperativeassessment1 2

Paranasal sinuses 1/2 1



Soft tissue calcifications 1/2 1PRACTICAL - Topics No. of Weeks Contact hoursRadiographic appearance of dental caries, periodontal diseaseand Periapical Disease

Exercises in various techniques for acquiring intraoral radiographs, - Periapical and bitewing. Processing of the exposed films by both manual andautomatic film processing. Radiographic interpretation.

5 15

Panoramic radiography Demonstration of the panoramic machine, Patient positioning and the technique. Identifying the normal radiographic landmarks. Radiographic interpretation.

2 6

Extra oral radiographic techniques Demonstration of the machine, Patient positioning for the various extra oralradiographic techniques. Identifying the normal radiographic landmarks

3 9Advanced imaging modalities

Demonstrations and practical exercises in Digitalradiography-Periapical and Bitewing Radiography 2 6Temperomandibular joint imaging

Demonstration of temperomandibular jointradiography. 1 3II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical Others

26 13

III. Addition learning hours expected for students– 20/SemesterIV. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning


Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Know the Radiographicinterpretation of dental caries,periodontal andperiapicalpathosis.Identify and describe theradiographical appearance of

Studentsshould takeradiographs forthe patientsunder closesupervision.MCQs andviva vocegroupdiscussion.



various dental anomalies.To learn the basic principles ofpanoramic radiographyincluding the concept ofpanoramic imaging, itsapplications in oral andmaxillofacial radiology, andthe structure of thepanoramic machine.Be familiar with the basicconcept of computedtomography and its mainapplications in the field oforal and maxillofacialimaging.Comprehend the basic conceptsof magnetic resonanceimaging ‘MRI' and its use inoral and maxillofacial region.Comprehend the theory behindthe use of ultrasounds in thediagnostic fields includingthe physics behind it and itsapplication in the oral andmaxillofacial region as a nonradiation imaging modality.Be familiar with the mostcommonly used radioactiveisotopes in the field ofnuclear medicine and theiruse in diagnosis of certainconditions.Radiographic differentialdiagnosis of lesions and

They will betrained tointerpret theradiographsthat they havetakenPresentation ofvariousradiographicimages to thestudents.



diseases affecting themaxillofacial region will bediscussed.b. Cognitive The students shoulddemonstrate the ability ofprofessional judgment inpatient selection forradiographic examination.They should be able todifferentiate betweenradiolucent and radiopaquelesions.They should be able to assessthe image quality and applydifferential diagnosis toabnormal appearances.Students should be able tounderstand the modificationsrequired in the variousradiographic techniques thatare used for a patient withshallow palate and bonyprominences.

Practical anddemonstrations. Closesupervisionof thestudentswhileperformingradiographicprocedures.


Work efficiently and effectivelyas a team.Building good spirit.Radiation safety proceduresshould be understood andfollowed by all.Groupassignment One to onestudentteacherdirectinteraction.


Deliver care to patients withprofessionalism and selfconfidence.Earn the respect and confidenceof patients through sincereservice and hard work.Develop ExcellentCommunication skills with widerange of individuals.Utilize information andtechnology as means oflearning, communication, datacollection.Make verbal and writtenpresentations using appropriateaudio visual aids.

Group tutorialsfor utilizationof appropriateweb basedradiologymaterialAssignments.




Illustrate the placement of the Xray films/Digital sensor,position-indicating device andcentral ray in paralleling andbisecting the angle technique.Audio visualdemonstrationof differentradiographictechniques

Step by stepevaluationto ensurethat thestudent hasmasteredeachprocedurebeforeproceedingto next step.I. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester

Assessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 10%MCQ’s II 10%Midterm 20%Summative Assessment 60% Written Exam 30%Practical Exams 20%Oral Exams 10%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Oral Radiology: Principles and Interpretation by Stuart C. White DDS PhD and Michael J.Pharoah. 2008.2. Exercises in Oral Radiology and Interpretation by Robert P. Langlais. 2003.3. Eric Whaites: Essentials of dental Radiography and Radiology, 3rd edition, Elsevierscience 2003.4. Haring and Jansen Howerton: Dental Radiography: principles and Techniques, 3rdEdition, saunders, 2006.5. Master Dentistry: Volume 1: Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery, Radiology, Pathology andOral Medicine by Paul Coulthard, Keith Horner, Philip Sloan, and Elizabeth D. Theaker.2008.6. Panoramic Radiology: Seminars on Maxillofacial Imaging and Interpretation by Allan G.Farman. 2007.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Labs for 40-60 studentsb. Computing resources



Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors



Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements.



Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.


Course Specifications | 6th Semester | Anaesthesia & Exodontia | Page - 114

ANAESTHESIA & EXODONTIA1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Anaesthesia & Exodontia,315 MDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Ashwin. J.e. Year/Semester at which course offered 3rd Year | 6th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 252 DMSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Shawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesAt the end of the course the students should: Be able to assess patients for minor surgical procedures, properly take physicalexaminations, advice investigations and plan treatment. Thoroughly understand the applied neuro-anatomy of the head and neck region. Understand the mechanism of pain conduction and the action of local anaestheticagents. Techniques involved in infection control, sterilization, asepsis and disinfection. Armamentarium Anatomical considerations for injection techniques Basic and supplementary injection techniques Techniques of maxillary anaesthesia Techniques of mandibular anaesthesia Complications of LA Have knowledge about the indications and contraindications for extraction of teeth,different techniques of teeth removal and the principles of forceps and elevators use. Know potential complications of exodontia, their aetiology, signs and symptoms,prevention and their management. Demonstrate knowledge on the designing of flaps, the methods employed for boneremoval and the different types of suture materials, post-operative instructions andmedications. Demonstrate knowledge on the different complications encountered during extractionof teeth or immediately following the extraction.



C. Course descriptionThis course will be taught as an introduction of oral surgery course in the coming years.The course is a series of lecture covered in the second semester of the third year. Thecourse is intended to cover two main topics, local anaesthesia and exodontia. Topics onlocal anaesthesia will include how to assess patients on suitability for local anaesthesia.They will also cover theories of pain, pain control, neuro-anatomy, neuro-physiology,pharmacokinetics of local anaesthesia, Clinical actions of specific agents,Armamentarium, Anatomical considerations for injection techniques, Basic andsupplementary injection techniques, Techniques of maxillary anaesthesia, Techniques ofmandibular anaesthesia, Complications of LA, Exodontia, Instrumentations in oralSurgery, Extraction Techniques and its complications. Theoretical and practicalknowledge of sterilization, control of infection, the different methods for extraction[intra-alveolar and trans-alveolar], the use of instruments [forceps and elevators],suture types and materials will be covered. Also, it covers indications and contra-indications for teeth extraction, post-operative instructions and follow-up. Lastly, thecourse deals with the complications which may occur during or after extraction andsurgery and how to reduce and manage them.I. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of Weeks Contact hours1-Neurophysiology 1 42-Pharmacology of LA 1 43-Clinical actions of specific agents 1 44-Armanterium 1 45-Anatomical considerations 1 46-Basic and supplementary injectionTechniques 1 47-Techniques of maxillary anaesthesia 1 48- Techniques of mandibular anaesthesia 1 49-Complications of LA 1 410-Exdontia 1 411-Instrumentations 1 412-Extraction Techniques 1 413-Complications of exodontia 1 4II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others

13 13



III. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20hrs/semesterIV. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning


Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Should knowneurophysiologyassociated with LATechniques andMechanism ofactions of LAExtractiontechniquesComplications ofLA and exodontia

Demonstration onpatients

Continuous clinicalevaluation by staff.2 MCQ quiz examsMid-term MCQexamFinal theory examFinal clinical examOrals/viva-voce

b. Cognitive Identify tooth forextractionTechnique of LA tobe administeredIdentify possiblecomplication

Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Case presentationsby students



Should followproper protocol forregular clinicalattendance.Demonstrateethical relationshipwith staff.Should developgood workingrelations with hisprofessionalcolleagues.Should wear a neatapron/lab coat withname tag.Ensure properhandling ofpatients

Continuousevaluation duringthe course




Students will betaught to regularlyupdate theirknowledge on Oralsurgery byincreased use ofinternet/web basedinformation

List of web sitesprovidingknowledge on OralSurgery.Registration ofonline journalsContinuous clinicalevaluation/monitoring by thestaff.Interactive sessionswith students

e. Psychomotor skills Should developskills foradministrating LAand performextraction for allthe teethAudio-visual/livedemonstration ofdifferent clinicaltechniquesExclusive trainingon clinicalprocedures

Step-by-stepevaluation of eachprocedure by theconcerned staff.Practical & OralexamsV. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester

Assessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 15%MCQ’s II 15%Midterm 10%Summative Assessment 60% Practical Exams 20%Written Exams 40%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2hrs|week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Handbook of Local Anaesthesia- Malamed- 6th edition2. Local Anaesthesia and Pain Control in Dental Practice- Monheim’s- 8th edition3. Local Anaesthesia in Dentistry by Paul D. Robinson PhD BDS MBBS FDS, Thomas R. PittFord PhD BDS FDS, and Fraser McDonald PhD MSc BDS FDS MOrth. 2000.4. Local Anaesthesia in Dentistry by J. A. Baart and H. S. Brand. 2008.5. Manual of Local Anaesthesia in Dentistry by A.P. Chitre. 2006.6. Local anaesthesia in dentistry: Illustrated handbook on dental local anaesthesia by JHaglund. 1978.7. An Introduction to Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery (Oxford MedicalPublications) by David A. Mitchell. 2006.8. Contemporary Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery by James R. Hupp, Edward Ellis III, andMyron R. Tucker. 2008.



9. Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Secrets by A. Omar Abubaker DMD PhD and Kenneth J.Benson. 2007.10. Clinical Review of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery by Shahrokh C. Bagheri DMD MD andChris Jo. 2007.11. Manual of Minor Oral Surgery for the General Dentist by Karl R. Koerner. 2006.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Clinics with 40 dental chairs Recovery Room Minor Operation Theatre with 10 dental chairs Scrub Area Sterilisation Room Changing room with lockers for staff and studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors Computer systems

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaire Vivab. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement.



Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:




Course Specifications | 6th Semester | Preclinical Operative Dentistry II | Page - 120

PRECLINICAL OPERATIVE DENTISTRY II1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Preclinical OperativeDentistry II, 322 RDSb. Credit hours 3c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Dr Syed Nahid BasheerDr. Abbas Rizvie. Year/Semester at which course offered 3rd Year , 6th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 321 RDSg. Co-requisites for the course --h. Location if not main campus shawajrah

B. ObjectivesAfter completion of the course the students should: Understand the pathophysiology & histopathology of caries Design cavities , Manipulate and place light-cured composite restorative resin onartificial teeth Know the clinical significance of contacts and contours of the teeth Design cavities for amalgam restoration on artificial teeth Correctly use matrices and wedges on artificial teeth Know the rationale & application of liners and bases to protect the pulp Perform amalgam restoration to acceptable levels on artificial teeth Do proper finishing and polishing of amalgam restorations. on artificial teethC. Course descriptionThis course is provided by the department of Restorative dental sciences during thesecond semester of the third year. The course consists of two parts, theory andpracticals, in which the former includes lectures and seminar presentations and the laterincludes the application of the theory knowledge gained in the theoretical sessionsThe course is given as one lecture and two lab sessions per week for the whole semesterand will have 3 credit hours and seven contact hours.In this course the students will be trained in differentiating affected and infected dentin,design cavities, manipulate and place light-cured composite restorative resin onartificial teeth, Design cavities, manipulate and place amalgam restorative material onartificial teeth, create artificial wall for condensation of amalgam in class II cavities with



the help of matrices and wedges on artificial teeth, apply liners and bases, finish andpolish amalgam & composite restorations on artificial teeth.I. LECTURES

Topics No. of Credithours

Contact hours1 Cariology- II 2 22 Composite cavity preparation & restoration 2 23 Finishing and polishing of composite restoration 1 14 Contacts & Contours 1 15 Class II Amalgam Cavity Preparation & restoration 1 16 Class V Amalgam Cavity Preparation & restoration 1 17 Tooth Separation 2 28 Pulp Protection 2 29 Finishing & Polishing Of Amalgam Restoration 2 2

II. PRACTICALS No. OfCredithours

Contacthours1 Class II (M0) Amalgam Cavity preparation in mandibularmolars 2 6

2 Class II (DO) Amalgam Cavity preparation in mandibularmolars 2 63 Class II (MOD) Amalgam Cavity preparation in mandibularmolars 2 64 Application of matrix band and retainer followed by baseapplication 1 3



5 Class II (MO) Amalgam restoration in mandibular molars 1 36 Class II (DO) Amalgam restoration in mandibular molars 1 37 Class II (MOD) Amalgam Restoration in mandibular molars 1 38 Class II (MO) Amalgam Cavity preparation in maxillarymolars 2 69 Class II (DO) Amalgam Cavity preparation in maxillarymolars 2 610 Class II (MOD) Amalgam Cavity preparation in maxillarymolars Without involving oblique ridge 2 611 Class II (MOD) Amalgam Cavity preparation in maxillarymolars involving oblique ridge 2 612 Class II (MO) Amalgam restoration in maxillary molars 1 313 Class II (DO) Amalgam restoration in maxillary molars 1 314 Class II (MOD) Amalgam restoration in maxillary molarsWithout involving oblique ridge 1 315 Class II (MOD) Amalgam restoration in maxillary molarsinvolving oblique ridge 1 316 Class III composite Cavity preparation and restoration inmaxillary incisors 1 317 Class IV composite Cavity preparation and restoration inmaxillary incisors 2 618 Demonstration of complex amalgam restorations 1 319 Demonstration of class II cast gold inlay cavity preparationfollowed by impression making 1 320 Demonstration of class II cast gold onlay cavity preparationfollowed by impression making 1 3III. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical Others14 credit hrs --- 28 credit hrs ---



IV. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20hrs/semesterV. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning


Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Recognize the variousmethods of Patienteducation andmotivation in theprevention andtreatment of dentalcariesJudiciously use linersand bases to protect thepulpRecognize the variousindications, advantages,techniques, andlimitations of amalgamrestorations.

ExplanationutilisingMicrosoft powerpointIllustration bydrawing picturesRapidquestionnairesimmediatelyfollowing theexplanationsAsking one ofthe students toexplain theconcepts taughtto develop selfinterest andcompetitionamong thefellow students

Continuousassessmentswhich includesQuizzes, mcq’s &Midtermexamination(T/P)And Finalexamination(T/P)

b. Cognitive Students will developgood concentration onthe topics which willresult in goodconcentration,perceptionand neverthelessmemory all of whichleading to understandingrecollection,reproduction of thetaught concepts boththeoretical and practicalat any given time.

ExplanationutilisingMicrosoft powerpointExplanatorydrawing toclarify somepartsguiding studentsfollowing up thework at regulartime intervalsPracticaldemonstrationsof what havebeen taughttheoretically

Continuousassessmentswhich includesQuizzes, mcq’s &Midtermexamination(T/P)And Finalexamination(T/P)


The students areencouraged to have anattitude for commitment The students arealwaysencouraged to Assignments ontheoreticalaspects that is



to succeed in the field,work well with thefellow students andmaintain goodrelationship with thestaff members, withresponsibility towardsfinishing all assignmentson time.

the best infriendly way,and assignmentsare givendeadlines to besubmitted.practicalrequirement areset at a definitenumber

delivered at arequired timeAssessment bythe staff memberson theirbehaviour andattendanceIssuing deadlineson a givenassignmentd. CommunicationInformationTechnology &Numerical skills

Know the basics ofcommunication andinformation technology,utilise these skills thebest way possible intheir assignmentThe students areguided to carryout web basedsearch andencouraged tocollect materialof relevancepertaining tooperativedentistry andactively involvein circulating theelectronicallycollectedmaterial withthe fellowcolleagues andstaff members.

Evaluate theirmethod ofcollection of e-based facts ,assessment of themethod andduration of timeinvolving thesame.

e. Psychomotor skills Use the instrumentsrequired to performcavity preparationAble to handle enginedriven rotaryinstrumentation in aproper and safe wayProperly use ofamalgam material

LivedemonstrationsCriticalevaluation of thework done inconstructivemannerAdjuncts in theform of lecturesor illustrativediagrams,Lab sessions onartificial teeth.

The students willhave continuousassessment onthe practicalwork and thestudents areexpected to fulfilthe requirementsset.




D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2hrs|week Academic advice: 2hrs/weeka- Dr Syed Nahid Basheerb- Dr Abbas Rizvi

E. Learning resources1. Fundamentals of Operative Dentistry: A Contemporary Approach by James B. Summitt, J.William Robbins, Thomas J. Hilton, and Richard S. Schwartz. 2006.2. Sturdevant's Art and Science of Operative Dentistry (Roberson, Sturdevant's Art andScience of Operative Dentistry) by Theodore Roberson, Harold O. Heymann, and EdwardJ. Swift. 2006.3. Textbook of Operative Dentistry by Sharad Chandra and Sangita Chandra. 2008.4. Principles of Operative Dentistry by A. J. E. Qualtrough, Julian Satterthwaite, LeeanMorrow, and Paul Brunton. 2005.5. Pickard's Manual of Operative Dentistry (Oxford Medical Publications) by Edwina A. M.Kidd, Bernard G. N. Smith, and Timothy F. Watson. 2003.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Labs for 40-60 studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility



Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.


Course Specifications | 6th Semester | Epidemiology & Biostatistics | Page - 128

EPIDEMIOLOGY & BIOSTATISTICS1. Institution Jazan University2. College College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Epidemiology & Biostatistics,332 PDSb. Credit hours 1c. Program in which the course is offered Dentistryd. Name(s) of faculty member(s) responsible for thecourse Dr Kaushik SenguptaDr Aadil InamdarDr Santosh Tadakamandlae. Year/Semester at which the course is offered 3rd Year/6th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 331 PDSg. Co-requisites for the course –h. Location (if not main campus) Shawajara Campus

B. ObjectivesAfter completion of the course, the students should be able to: Explain the relevance and application of statistics in biomedical research Develop graphical and/or tabular displays of statistical data Identify the different descriptive and exploratory data analysis techniques Demonstrate knowledge of hypothesis testing and estimation Explain the difference between statistical and clinical significance Discuss the basic principles of epidemiology used for investigating health and disease inpopulations Interpret relevant population health measures, including clinical and patient-basedmeasures of oral health Describe the epidemiology of oral diseases such as dental caries, periodontal disease, andoral cancer Locate credible Internet sources for information on the epidemiology, diagnosis,prevention, and treatment of different oral conditions Explain the benefits of screening and early disease detection Enumerate the salient properties of a diagnostic test Describe the different design strategies used in clinical epidemiologic research, includingdescriptive studies, interventional and observational analytic studies, and meta-analysisand systematic reviews



C. Course description

As part of the lecture series in community dentistry, this course introduces students to thebasic principles and methods of biostatistics and epidemiology. The first part of the coursedeals with core applied statistical concepts and methods. It introduces students to thefundamental paradigms underlying statistical methodology; the display and communicationof statistical data; the basics of frequentist methods such as hypothesis testing andconfidence intervals; and analysis and interpretation for single group summaries, such asmeans, medians, variances, and rates. The second part of the course introduces the studentsto the key methods utilized in classical and clinical epidemiology, including risk estimationand causal inferences, and the various design strategies used in clinical epidemiologicresearch, for instance, case-control and cohort studies, ecological studies and population-based surveys, randomized controlled trials, and meta-analysis techniques used in thedevelopment of clinical practice guidelines. It covers the broad determinants of health;measures of disease frequency and association; epidemiology of oral diseases (e.g., dentalcaries, periodontal diseases, oral cancer); screening of oral conditions; properties ofdiagnostic tests, including sensitivity, specificity, likelihood ratios, predictive values, andreceiver operator characteristic curves; and measurement of patient-reported outcomes.The course consists of didactic lectures, case presentations, and discussion sessions.I. Topics to be Covered

Topics No. of Weeks ContactHoursPrinciples of biostatistics

General overview of biostatistics Descriptive and inferential statistics Types of data Graphical data displays and data transformations Univariate analysis

– Frequencies and distribution– Measures of central tendency– Measures of dispersion

Elements of statistical inference– Samples and populations– Null and alternate hypotheses– Types I and II errors; power and sample size– Hypothesis testing (P values) and estimation(confidence intervals)

Statistical vs. clinical significance

4 4

Principles of epidemiology Epidemiology past and present Assessing causality

– Risk; risk factors, markers, and determinants– Evaluation of the presence of association: roles of

4 4



chance, bias, and confounding– Validity, reliability, and generalizability– Strength of association

Measures of disease frequency and association– Ratio, proportion, percentage, and rate– Prevalence (point, period) and incidence(cumulative incidence, incidence density)– Morbidity and mortality rates– Relative risk and odds ratio– Attributable risk

Screening and diagnostic tests Assessing the effectiveness of disease and injuryprevention

– Efficacy, effectiveness, safety– Prevented fraction, number needed to treat,number needed to harmEpidemiology of oral diseases

Measures of oral health– Clinical indicators– Patient-based measures (quality of life)

Epidemiology of dental caries Epidemiology of periodontal diseases Epidemiology of oral cancer Epidemiology of other dental conditions

3 3

Design strategies in epidemiologic research Descriptive studies

– Correlational studies– Case report and case series– Surveys (cross-sectional, repeated cross-sectional)

Analytic studies– Observational studies

o Case-control studieso Cohort studies

– Interventional studieso Clinical trials

Research synthesis: systematic reviews and meta-analyses

3 3

II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others14 – – –



III. Additional learning hours expected for students: 20 per semesterIV. Development of Learning Outcomes in Different Domains of Learning

Skills Description TeachingStrategies

Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Comprehensiveunderstanding andknowledge ofbiostatistics andepidemiology

Comprehensiveunderstanding of theintegration of theprinciples ofbiostatistics andepidemiology with otherspecialties Understanding of areasof current research anddevelopment

Provision ofextensivelearning notesand materials tostudents Seminars Guided reading

Examinations Continuous take-home assignments Research projects Quizzes

b. Cognitive Application of theconcepts, principles, andtheories of biostatisticsand epidemiology indifferent areas ofbiomedical research Class projectsfrom students Seminars fromstudents Writtenassignmentsfrom students

Monthlyassignment report Project report Written assignmentreport

c. InterpersonalSkills &Responsibilities

Taking responsibilities Communicatingeffectively with patientsand colleagues Continuous professionaldevelopment Presentation skills

Student teachingmaterials Problem-basedlearningexercises Groupdiscussions Seminarpresentations

Group projects Continuousassessment Writtenexaminations Evaluation ofseminarpresentationd. Communication,

InformationTechnology, andNumerical Skills

Practicalimplementation ofbiostatistics andepidemiology Identification ofappropriate statisticaltechniques for solvingproblems in oral healthresearch Appropriate computer

Student-ledteachingmaterials Use of softwaresuch as SSPS andEndNote Use of powerpoint and otherpresentationplatforms and




skills for undertakingstatistical calculations Effectivecommunication (bothwritten and oral) Use of informationtechnology in academicsand research Presentation skills

methods Use ofinformation andcommunicationtechnology

e. Psychomotorskills – – –

V. Schedule of Assessment Task for Students During the SemesterAssessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 30% Quiz I 10%Quiz II 10%Midterm Written Exam 10%Summative Assessment 70% Research Project 15%Oral Exam (Viva Voce) 15%Final Written Exam 40%

D. Student supportFaculty members are available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2 h per week Academic advice: 2 h per weekE. Learning resources1. Fundamentals of Biostatistics (seventh edition) by Bernard Rosner. Harvard University,Duxbury Press, 2010.2. Biostatistics: The Bare Essentials (third edition) by Geoffrey R. Norman and David L.Streiner. BC Decker Inc., 2008.3. PDQ Statistics (third edition) by Geoffrey R. Norman and David L. Streiner. BC DeckerInc., 2003.4. Biostatistics, Student Solutions Manual: A Foundation for Analysis in the Health Sciences(Wiley Series in Probability and Statistics) (ninth edition) by Wayne W. Daniel. Wiley,2009.5. Epidemiology in Medicine by Charles H. Hennekens and Julie E. Buring. LippincottWilliams & Wilkins, 1987.6. Introduction to Epidemiology (fifth edition) by Ray M. Merrill. Jones & BartlettPublishers, 2009.7. Essentials of Epidemiology in Public Health (second edition) by Ann Aschengrau andGeorge R. Seage. Jones & Bartlett Publishers, 2007.8. Clinical Epidemiology: How to Do Clinical Practice Research (third edition) by R. BrianHaynes, David L. Sackett, Gordon H. Guyatt, and Peter Tugwell. Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, 2005.



9. Clinical Epidemiology: The Essentials (fourth edition) by Robert H. Fletcher and SuzanneW. Fletcher. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005.10. PDQ Epidemiology (third edition) by David L. Streiner and Geoffrey R. Norman. People'sMedical Publishing House, 2009.11. Prevention of Oral Disease (fourth edition) by John J. Murray, June H. Nunn, and James G.Steele. Oxford University Press, 2003.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40 to 60 students Laboratories for 40 to 60 studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD ROM facility Computers with access to the Internet Institutional membership-based access to medical literature databases (includingMedline) and reputed and relevant online journals Software: Microsoft Office, SPSS, and Endnotec. Other resources Overhead projectors

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining student feedback on the effectiveness of teaching Teacher-student discussion, focus groups Student surveys on the effectiveness of teachingb. Other strategies for evaluation of the effectiveness of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment Monitoring student performance and progress through periodic examinations andassessments Feedback, self-appraisal, and intra-departmental discussions on the effectiveness ofteaching Peer evaluationsc. Processes for the improvement of teaching Identifying and evaluating areas of weaknesses and working on their improvement Continuing dental education programs Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modellingd. Processes for verifying standards of student achievement Random sampling and checking of examination papers by the ExaminationCommittee Evaluation and assessment of students’ examination reports Re-evaluating a sample assignment by internal and external faculty members Evaluation of student performance and examination reports as a wholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the courseReview Semesterly and yearly reviews of student performance in all teaching areas Review of feedback for planning and improvement of transferable skills



Review of feedback on the level of retention of required knowledge from facultyteaching courses that demand this course as a pre-requisite External benchmarking of student performance with that of other similar institutesPlanning Curriculum and syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements Review and feedback for teachers for planning improvement strategies Provision of additional training for staff as and when required Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvement strategies Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to fine-tune the course in line withinternational standards


7TH SEMESTER

FOURTH YEAR

SEVENTH SEMESTERCODE COURSE TITLE TH PR CRH COH P-REQ411 MDS Oral Pathology II 1 3 2 4 312 MDS412 MDS Oral Medicine & Diagnostic

Sciences I 2 3 3 5 314 MDS421 RDS Operative Dentistry I 1 3 2 4 322 RDS423 RDS Preclinical Endodontics I 1 3 2 4 322 RDS431 PDS Periodontics I 1 3 2 4 312 MDS441 SDS Clinical RemovableProsthodontics I

1 3 2 4 342 SDS443 SDS Preclinical FixedProsthodontics I

1 6 3 7 322 RDS451 DMS General Medicine 2 0 2 2 352 DMS452 DMS General Surgery & EarNose Throat 1 0 1 1 352 DMS

TOTAL 9 11 24 19 35

Course Specifications | 7th Semester | Oral Pathology II | Page - 136

ORAL PATHOLOGY IIInstitution Jazan UniversityCollege College of Dentistry

I. Course identification and general informationCourse Title Oral Pathology IICode 411 MDSCredit Hours 2Year/Semester at which the course isoffered

4th year/7th Semester

Pre-Requisites for the course Oral Pathology I - 312 MDS

Program in which the course is offered Dentistry

Name of faculty memberresponsible for the course

Dr. Ali Idris

Location if not on main campus Al Shawajrah campus

II. Objectives

Oral and Maxillofacial Pathology is the dental speciality and discipline of pathology thatdeals with the nature, identification and management of wide variety of diseasesaffecting the Oral and Maxillofacial regions. The diagnosis and treatment of thesediseases comprise an essential part of the practice of dentistry. The objective of this course is to provide the comprehensive information needed toidentify and manage oral diseases/conditions in the clinical practice in which thestudents will be involved after graduation. The course provides a complete understanding of the pathologic causes, pathogenesis,processes, effects and prognosis of these diseases. The course enhances diagnostic skills through the use of clinical, radiographic,microscopic, biochemical or other examinations and the development of differentialdiagnosis for similar diseases.

III. Course descriptionThis course is offered during the 6th semester of the third year and the 7th semester of thefourth year and has four credit hours. The course combines lecture presentations with practical,including microscopic laboratory sessions and clinicopathologic conferences (CPC) arranged insuch way that the practical and the CPC sessions are correlated with the subject topics coveredin the didactic lectures. Students involved in this course are expected to integrate and correlateknowledge concerning clinical, radiographical and microscopic features; utilising them inobtaining the diagnosis of oral and maxillofacial diseases.



I. Topics to be covered in Oral Pathology II

II. Course Component

Lectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others14 100 minutes for microscopic labper week 20 minutes willbe used for CPC&/or assignmentpresentation.III. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20hrs/semesterIV. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning

a. Knowledge

Topics Number ofweeks

ContacthoursOdontogenic tumors

Epithelial tumors: Mesenchymal tumors: Mixed (epithelial and mesenchymal ) tumors

1st , 2nd w 4Epithelial pathology 3rd , 4th w 4Mesenchymal reactive lesions and soft tissue tumors

Benign tumors Malignant tumors 5th, 6th w 4

Salivary gland diseases Developmental anomalies Variation in the amount of salivary flow Obstructive Sialadenitis Autoimmune conditions Necrotizing sialometaplasia Sialadenosis (Sialosis)

7th, 8th w 4

Salivary gland tumors Salivary gland adenomas Carcinomas 9th,10th w 4

Bone pathology 11th , 12th w 4Dermatologic diseases Immune-related diseases Other diseases 13th w 2

Forensic DentistryRevision 14th w 11



(i) Description of the knowledge to be acquireda) To know the common clinical and microscopic features of oral lesions.b) To know the current concepts of oral and maxillofacial pathology.c) To understand the contemporary theories on disease etiology, pathogenesis, processes,prognosis and current therapeutic regimens.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop that knowledgea) Data show lectures are given.b) Written assignment will be requested from students.c) Referral to different textbooks for specific items for private study/learning hours.(iii) Methods of assessment of knowledge acquireda) Assignment evaluation, discussion and scoringb) Short quizzesc) Written examinations including Short Answers, Essay, Definitions,b. Cognitive Skills

(i) Cognitive skills to be developeda) This course forms a bridge between the didactic histopathological aspects of oralpathology and the practical clinical radiographic and analytical considerations.b) The student should develop the ability to correlate clinical and radiographic features tothe concomitant histopathological changes and analyse data in a comprehensive way.c) Students should acquire the capability for differentiating similar oral diseases.d) Students should be able to interpret the microscopic features and to makehistopathological diagnosis.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these cognitive skillsa) Clinico-pathologic conference (CPC) including case histories, clinical and microscopicslides using data show is given.b) Students interpret, compare, contrast, discuss and correlate clinical and radiographicdata to the histopathologic features, differentiate and delineate similar lesions andreach final diagnosis.c) Students will be exposed during the practical sessions to the histopathological changesassociated with almost all the oral lesions(iii) Methods of assessment of students cognitive skillsa) Continuous laboratory assessmentb) CPC- discussion, and evaluationc) Written examination will include multiple choice questions.d) Practical examination will include spot diagnosis for histopathological features usingglass slides in addition to case histories, using clinical and microscopic slides presentedby data showc. Interpersonal Skills and Responsibility



a) Students are divided into groups; each group is requested to make power pointpresentation about selected topic related to the didactic ones.b) Student works with others and interacts with team.(i) Description of the interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibility to be developedd) Each group will be responsible to present and discuss the selected topic.(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skills and abilitiesa) Students will be guided, supervised by an advisor staff memberb) Students should make comprehensive presentation for the topic.(iii) Methods of assessment of students interpersonal skills and capacity to carry responsibilityb) Staff members will discuss and evaluate the presentation for each groupd. Numerical and Communication Skillsa) Use of web based material related to oral pathology to appraise the advanced or up todate concept of oral diseasesb) Students will be requested to find out the prevalence of the lesion in their writtenassignment (hospital-based)(i) Description of the numerical and communication skills to be developed

Communicate with responsible people, and search to find out the prevalence of thelesion of interest in their written assignment(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skillsa) Recommend students to contact person in charge in University hospital, and/or Ministryof health central pathology labb) Revise the national cancer registry for any useful information(iii) Methods of assessment of students numerical and communication skillsa) Evaluate their assignment by staff memberse. Psychomotor Skills

(i) Description of the psychomotor skills to be developed and the level of performance requireda) Familiarize students with microscope adjustments(ii) Teaching strategies to be used to develop these skillsa) Instructions and continuous supervision during student usage of microscope(iii) Methods of assessment of students psychomotor skills



a) Microscopic laboratory examV. Scheduling of Assessment Tasks for Students during the semesterAssessment Assessment task (e.g. essay, test, group project,examination etc.) Week due Proportion

Continuous Assessment 40%1 Written assignment & presentation 5%2 Quizzes 3, 5,9 and 11 10%3 Mid term 7 20%4 Attendance andEvaluation of the practical note 1-15 5%Summative Assessment 60%1 Final practical ExaminationSpot diagnosis of glass slidesCPC Examination 1515 10%10%2 Final written Examination 40%Total 100%

IV. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2hrs|week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekV. Learning resources

Essential Text Book and Atlas- Oral & Maxillofacial PathologyNeville BW, Damn DD, Allen CM & Bouquot JELatest EditionWB Saunders Co.- Oral Pathology – Clinical Pathologic CorrelationRegezi JA, Sciubba JJ & Jordan RCKLatest EditionWB Saunders Co.- Cowson’s Essentials of Oral Pathology and Oral MedicineCawson RA and Odell EWLatest edition,Churchill Livingstone, Elsevier,London, New York, Oxford, Philadelphia.- Color Atlas of Oral Diseases, Clinical and Pathologic CorrelationsCawson, Bennie, Barrett & WrightLatest Edition Recommended Text Book and Atlas



- Oral & Maxillofacial Pathology: A rational for diagnosis and treatmentRobert E Marx, Diane SternLatest EditionQuintnessence Publishing Co.- Contemporary Oral & Maxillofacial PathologySapp JP, Eversole LR, Wysock GPLatest EditionMosby Co. St Louis- Oral PathologySoames JV and Southam JCLatest EditionOxford- Text book of Oral PathologyShaferLatest EditionWB Saunders Co.- Color Atlas of clinical Oral PathologyNeville, Damm, White, WaldronLatest EditionWilliam and Wilkins, Baltimore.- A Color Atlas of Orofacial DiseasesW.R.TyldesleyLatest EditionWolfe- A color Atlas of Oral PathologyLeeLatest editionWolfe- Color Atlas of Common Oral DiseasesRobert P. Langlais, Craig S Miller, Jill S Nield-Gehrig, 2009.

VI. Facilities required1. Accommodation Lecture rooms with a seating capacity for 40-60 students 2 hours/week forlectures. Labs with 40-60 light binocular microscopes (each one has 4 augmentation x4,x10, x20, and x40) 2 hours/week for practical scissions.3. Computing resources A laptop with a projector for power point presentations Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with online access to data bases ( internet and related scientificpublications) Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journals.4. Other resources Oral Histopathology adequately equipped laboratory Overhead projectors



VII. Course evaluation and improvement processes1. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Confidential student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaire

2. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by the department: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodic examinationsand assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.

3. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on its improvement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling. Regular feedback to staff members

4. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking exam papers by examination committee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Periodic exchange for advisory staff member Remarking of a sample of assignments with a faculty member in anotherinstitution Quizzes conducted as a part of continuous assessment Small group student’s presentation and discussion in the lab under facultysupervision Evaluation of collective students’ performance, tutors and examination reportsas a whole

5. Arrangements for periodical review and effective planning for the course improvement:Review:

Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teaching fields. Reviewing feedbacks from colleagues and students for planning andimprovement of transferable skills.



Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledge fromfaculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark with other similar institutesteaching similar course and working on its improvement.

Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs and requirements. Periodic feedback from colleagues and students for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as where and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvement strategies Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.


Course Specifications | 7th Semester | Oral Medicine & Diagnostic Sciences I | Page - 144

ORAL MEDICINE & DIAGNOSTIC SCIENCES IInstitution Jazan UniversityCollege College of Dentistry

B- ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should be able to: Properly communicate with the patient, establish appropriate patient dentistrelationship. Obtain and record comprehensive history (dental and medical). Perform an appropriate physical examination including lymph nodes, extra and intraoral examinations Interpret the findings and recognize proper further investigations. Pending their referral to the appropriate department. Formulate and rationalized preliminary treatment plane for their patient Establish diagnosis and management for common oral diseases, including theimmunologic diseases, red and white lesions, vesicular and bullous lesions andPigmented lesions of oral mucosa. Differentiate between different oral diseases and conditions based on clinical andlaboratory findings

C- Course descriptionThe course is intended for the dental student to gain basic knowledge and skills that areinvolved in the diagnostic process and treatment planning. The course will allow students toeffectively communicate with patients and establish sound patient dentist relationships,carrying out a general and detailed examination of the extra-oral and intra-oral structures. Thecourse is offered through lectures, clinical practice and tutorials . Lectures will cover varioustopics on the interviewing process, clinical methods and on relevant aspects of the diagnostictools employed in treatment planning, each lecture will be followed by practical section wherethe students will be exposed to clinics, and closely monitored, in addition to tutorials for

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Oral Medicine & DiagnosticSciences I, 412 MDS.b. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Prof. Ebtessam ElzefzafDr. Reda SabraDr.Sameena ParveenDr. Tenny Johne. Year/Semester at which course offered 4th Year | 7th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 314 MDSg. Co-requisites for the course --h. Location if not main campus - Shawajra campus



discussion and allow students for asking. The course is taken over one semester and shall havetwo credit hours.I. Topics to be covered

Topic No of weeks Practical hours Contact hoursIntroduction to oralmedicine and oral diagnosis 1 3 6Clinical examination 1 3 6Dental charting, referraland consultationsprocedures. 1 3 6Treatment plan 1 3 6Laboratory aids fordiagnosis 1 3 6Immunologic diseases(I.Ds.). 2 3 6Red and white lesions oforal mucosa 3 3 6ulcerative, vesicular andbullous lesions 3 3 6Pigmented lesions of oralmucosa 1 3 6Total 14 42 84

DateII. Course Component

Lectures TutorialsPractical/Fieldwork/

InternshipOthers

Two hours/week One hour/week Three hours/week -

1stweek∙ Introduction tooral medicine andoral diagnosis, ∙Infection control indental clinic.∙ Patient history∙ Examinationtechniques

∙ Theoreticalillustration ofinfection control indental clinic∙Discuss theimportance ofinfection control indental clinic andthe significance ofcross infections.

∙ students practice theinfection controlprocedures∙Oral andMaxillofacialMedicine: TheBasis ofDiagnosis andTreatment byCrispian Scully.2008.

2ndweek Extra oralexaminationIntra oralexamination∙ Establishing thediagnosis∙ Medical referraland

Student will trainedpractically dentalcharting including :Personal dataOral andMaxillofacialMedicine: TheBasis of



Lymph nodeexamination Consultationprocedures∙Dental /medicalrecords:organization,confidentiality andinformed consent

Vital signs(pulse andblood pressure)Dental historyMedical historyDiagnosis andTreatment byCrispian Scully.2008.

3rdweekLaboratory aidsfor diagnosis, bloodchemistryoral biopsyprocedures.

Formulating aplane of treatmentand assessingmedical risksDental charting:Extra oral examinationIntra oral examination(teeth and soft tissues)

Oral andMaxillofacialMedicine: TheBasis ofDiagnosis andTreatment byCrispian Scully.2008.

4thweek

∙ Immunologicdiseases:- General principlesof immunologicdiseases-Immunodeficiency-Primaryimmunologicdiseases(phagocytedeficiencies,deficiencies inadaptive immunity,T-cell and B-celldeficiencies)

∙ Illustrate colouratlas of oralmedicine casesregardingImmunodeficiencyandPrimaryimmunologicdiseases.Examination of patientswith oral diseases

Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and Jonathan A.Ship. 2008.Ch.18.page435.

5thweek

∙ Immunologicdiseases:-Secondaryimmunologicdiseases(innateimmune system).-Allergy andhypersensitivityreactions(hypersensitivityreactions, latexallergy, oral allergysyndrome, serum

∙ Illustrate colouratlas of oralmedicine casesregardingSecondaryimmunologicdiseases Allergy aandhypersensitivityExamination of patientswith oral diseases




sickness)

6thweek

Immunologicdiseases:-Auto immunediseases(systemic lupuserythematosus,scleroderma,Idiopathicinflammatorymyopathies,rheumatoidarthritis, mixedconnective tissuediseases)D.D and treatmentplane ofimmunologicdiseases

Illustrate colouratlas of oralmedicine casesregarding -Autoimmune diseasesIdentification of oralulcers in patients withauto immune diseases,skin manifestationsand clinicaldifferentiation betweendiseases.


7thweek

Red and whitelesions of oralmucosa-Red and whitetissue reactions-Infectiousdiseases(oralcandidiasis , hairyleukoplakia)-Premalignantlesions(oral hairyleukoplakia, anderythroplakia oralsub –mucous fibrosis)

Illustrate colouratlas of oralmedicine casesregardingcandidiasis ,oralhairy leukoplakia,and erythroplakiaoral sub –mucousfibrosis)Examination of patientswith oral diseases

Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and Jonathan A.Ship. 2008. Ch4 page 77 .

8thweek

Red and whitelesions of oralmucosa-Immunopatholgicdiseases:(Oral lichen planus,Drug inducedlichenoid reactionsof graft versus hostdiseasesLupus

Illustrate colouratlas of oralmedicine casesregarding Orallichen planus,Drug inducedlichenoid reactionsof graft versus hostdiseasesLupuserythematosis

Clinical Examination ofpatients with orallichen planusSkin manifestations inimmunopathologicdiseases




erythematosisreaction tomechanical trumatoxic reactionsreaction tomechanical truma-toxic reactions

9thweek

Red and whitelesions of oralmucosa-Allergicreactions(licheniodcontact reactions,reactions todentifrices andchlorhexidin)-Other red andwhite lesionslesions(benignmigratory glossitisleukodema whitesponge nevus hairtongue)∙D.D of red andwhite lesion

∙ Illustrate colouratlas of oralmedicine casesregardinglicheniod contactreactions,reactions todentifrices andchlorhexidin)(benign migratoryglossitisleukodema whitesponge nevus hairtongue

Clinical examination ofpatients with oraldiseasesrole of medical anddental history indiagnosis


10thweek

Ulcerative,vesicular andbullous lesions-Acute multiplelesions (herpessimplex virusinfection, varecellazoster, virusinfection, coxsackievirus infectionsnecrotizingulcerative gingivitisand periodontitiserythemamultiform, stevensjohnson syndromeand toxicepidermalnecrolysis)-Oralhypersensitivityreaction

Illustrate colouratlas of oralmedicine casesregarding Acutemultiple ulcers,vesicles andbullous lesions

Clinical examination ofpatients with oralulcers differentiationbetween oral ulcer andassociated skinmanifestations ,laboratory aids ofdiagnosis for thesediseases

Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and Jonathan A.Ship. 2008. ch 3page 41

11th ∙ ulcerative, Illustrate colour Student will take Burket's Oral



week vesicular andbullous lesions-Chronic multiplelesions(pemphigusvalgaris,paraneoplasticpemphigus,pemphigusvegitans, sub-epithelial bullousdermatosis, buloluspemphigoid,mucous membranepemphegoid linearIg A diseases,epidermolysisbullosa, andchronic bullousdisease of childhood)

atlas of oralmedicine casesregarding Chronicmultiple vesicularand bullous lesionscharting for patientswith oral and skinulcers ,record medicalhistory and examineulcers

Medicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and Jonathan A.Ship. 2008. ch 3page 41

12thweek

Ulcerative,vesicular andbullous lesions-Recurring oralulcers (recurrentaphthus stomatitis,Behcet´s disease)-Singleulcers(traumaticinjuries, esinophiliculcers of thetongue.,histoplasmosisblastomoycosis,and phycomycosis)D.D of oral ulcers

∙ Illustrate colouratlas of oralmedicine casesregardingRecurring oralulcers-SingleulcersExamination of patientswith oral diseases

Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and Jonathan A.Ship. 2008. ch 3page 41

13thweekPigmented lesionsof oralmucosa(endogenous pigmentation ,focal melanoticpigmentation

colour atlas of oralmedicine casesregardingendogenouspigmentation ,focal melanoticpigmentationClinical charting ofpatients with oralpigmented lesions

Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and Jonathan A.Ship. 2008. Ch



Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of LearningSkills Description Teaching

strategiesMethod of

Assessmenta. Knowledge Integratetheoreticalknowledge relatedto Oral medicineand diagnosticscience into clinicalpractice.

Each lecture willelaborate onseveral ofimportant pointsassociated withassigned readings.The purposes of thelectures are toincrease theunderstanding andto complement theassigned readings.The lectures are nota replacement ofthe assignedreadings and otherresources.

1-Multiple choicequestions (MCQ)based on materialsfrom the lecturesand assignedreadings from thetext book.2-Short answertype questions3-True/False typequestions4-Patient’s clinicalexamination andtreatment planning5-oral exam

5 page 107

14thweekPigmented lesionsof oral mucosamultifocalmelanoticpigmentations ,melanosisassociated withsystemic or geneticdiseases,)

colour atlas of oralmedicine casesregardingmultifocalmelanoticpigmentations ,melanosisassociated withsystemic or geneticdiseases,)

Examination andrecording the medicalhistory, clinicalmanifestations andtreatment plan ofpatients with oraldiseases

Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and Jonathan A.Ship. 2008. Ch5 page 107III. Assessment Schedule and weighting

Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 10%MCQ’s II 10%Mid term 20%Final term exam 60% Written 30%practical 20%Oral exams 10%



b. Cognitive 1-Demonstrateability to use selfknowledge anddecision onworking withcolleagues, patients,and teacher.2-Develop a dentist-patient relationshipwith patients.3-Demonstrateknowledgeable skillperformance incarrying out oralmedicine anddiagnosticprocedures

1-Lectures, oralmedicine anddiagnostic scienceexam on patients ,treatment planningon partner,Small groupactivity rotation(Prophylaxis-student pair switch,Communicationwith Patients )2-Seminars toinsure theappropriateapplication ofdifferent clinicalconcepts.3-Case study todevelop rationalesfor oral medicineand diagnosticscienceassessments,diagnosis, andtreatmentplanning.

Student’s cognitiveskill will beevaluated on thebasis ofparticipation,professionalism andattendance.


1-Developawareness intoone’s own attitudetowards oral andperiodontaldiseases2-Value one’s ownmental healthpractices as aprofessionalgeneral dentalpractitioner.

1-Video taping ofactual studentsinteractions ingroups or one-to-one student patientinteraction (or roleplays) to teachdynamics ofinteraction.2- Directinteraction withpatients (real-lifesimulation) toapply and critiqueinterpersonal skills.

1-Atlas for oraldiseases interview(to demonstrate theability ofcommunicationwith patients)2- Seminar (topresent projectoutcome as ademonstration ofability to applyinterviewing andinterpersonaltherapeuticcommunicationskills betweenstudents andpatients.d. Communication Use of web based Group tutorial to Assignments (to




material related tooral medicine anddiagnostic science . facilitate selection& utilization ofappropriate webbased oralmedicine anddiagnostic sciencesubjects.

present recentdifferent topicrelated to oralmedicine therapy.e. Psychomotor skills

-Learning resourcesEssential textbooks:1. Burket's Oral Medicine 11/e by Greenberg, Martin Greenberg, Michael Glick, andJonathan A. Ship. 2008.2. Oral and Maxillofacial Medicine: The Basis of Diagnosis and Treatment by CrispianScully. 2008.3. A guide to common oral lesions Dr. Charles. Dunlap and Dr. Bruce. F, Barker Departmentof Oral Maxillofacial pathology. UMCK School of dentistry.Recommended books:1- Pockets Atlas of Oral Diseases, 2nd ed. edition Laskaris G. Thieme Inc., 2006.2- Oral Medicine Secrets by Stephen T. Sonis, Leslie Shu-Tung Fang, and Robert C. Fazio.2002.3- Oral Diagnosis, Oral Medicine and treatment planing by Bricker S., Langlais R & Miller C.Lea & Febiger 1994.3. Tyldesley's Oral Medicine, Anne; Longman, Lesley 5th Edition Copyright Â©2003Oxford University Press > Front of Book >.Periodical, web sites, etc:

1- Oral Diseaseshttp://www.blackwell-syngergy.com/loi/jop2- Journals of oral pathology & medicine http//www.blackwell- syngergy.com/loi/jop3- Oral diagnosis: The Clinician Guide by birnbaum W & Dunne S. Butterworth-Heinemam:1st edition.Other facilities:a-Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Labs for 40-60 studentsb- Computing resources



Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc-Other resources Overhead projectors

Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course

Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills.



Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.



Course Specifications | 7th Semester | Operative Dentistry I | Page - 155

OPERATIVE DENTISTRY I1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Operative Dentistry I, 421RDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Dr Syed Nahid BasheerDr. Abbas Rizvie. Year/Semester at which course offered 4th Year | 7th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 322 RDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus shawajrah

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Understand and apply the sound principles of infection control in keeping with currentregulation Know the routine chair side pre-operative procedures Know how to asses , examine and plan the treatment for the patient Be able to achieve moisture control, without harming the patient Know the various diagnostic tests, methods of prevention & management of caries Be able to control the pain while doing operative procedures Know the applied aspects of composite resin material Be able to prepare & restore simple class I cavities with amalgam restorative materialon patientsC. Course description

This course is provided by the Restorative department during the first semester of thefourth year. The course consists of two parts, theory and cinical training, in which theformer includes lectures and seminar presentations and the later includes working on thepatients in the clinicsThe course is given as one lecture and one lab session per week for the whole semester andwill have 2 credit hours and 4 contact hours.In this course the students will be trained to control the infection in the dental operatory,perform the routine chair side pre-operative procedures, diagnose the disease and plan the



treatment for the patient, control the pain and moisture while treating the patient, prepare& restore simple class I cavities with amalgam restorative material on patients.I. LECTURES

Topics No. ofWeeks

Contacthours1 Infection control 1 12 Sterilization 2 23 Patient Assessment, Examination, Diagnosis & TreatmentPlanning 4 4

8 Isolation of the Operating Field 2 210 Caries diagnosis, prevention & control 2 212 Pain Control 1 113 Clinical aspects of Composite Resin material 2 2SI

NUMCLINICS

1 Orientation to the dental clinic, dental unit, its accessories, and high speed rotaryinstruments.2 Introduction to Operative clinic system, patient – dentist relationship , patient recordsand filing system3 Patient preparation , position, assessment and diagnosis4 Rubber dam application5 Simple Amalgam restorations6 Conventional Glass ionomer restorations

II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practicals Others14 --- 14 ---III. Addition learning hours expected for students– 20/Semester



IV. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of LearningSkills Description Teaching

strategiesMethod of

Assessmenta. Knowledge Should be wellversed with all theconcepts ofsterilization anddisinfection inOperative dentistryStudents should beable to obtain adetailed casehistory of thepatient, diagnosethe disease andplan the treatmentaccordinglyShould be able tocarry out isolationof the operatoryfield.Realize andconsider the pain ,its causes,mechanism and itscontrol techniquesDescribe and applydifferent operatorand chair positionsThe clinicaltreatment ofcavitated, cariousteeth must beaccomplishedexpeditiously,judiciously andappropriately.

Explanationutilising Microsoftpower pointincluding picturesExplanations bydrawing picturesInteractions withthe students toexplain theconcepts taught todevelop selfinterest andcompetition amongthe fellow studentsCompletesupervision andinstruction on eachclinical case

Continuousassessments whichincludesQuizzes, mcq’s &Midtermexamination(T/P)And Finalexamination(T/P)

b. Cognitive Students willdevelop goodconcentration onthe topics whichwill result in goodExplanationutilising Microsoftpower pointExplanatorydrawing to clarify

Continuousassessments whichincludesQuizzes, mcq’s &Midterm



concentration,perception andneverthelessmemory all ofwhich leading tounderstanding,recollection,reproduction of thetaught concepts(both theoreticaland practical) atany given time.

some partsGuiding studentsfollowing up thework at regulartime intervalsClinicaldemonstrations ,case presentationand supervision

examination(T/P)And Finalexamination(T/P)


The students areencouraged to havean attitude forcommitment tosucceed in the field,work well with thefellow students andmaintain goodrelationship withstaff members/patients , withresponsibilitytowards finishingall cases on time.

The student arealways encouragedto the best infriendly way, andcases are given andcompletedaccordingly. Clinicalrequirement are setat a definitenumber

Assessment ofclinical cases andtheir completionand follow up at agiven period of timeAssignments ontheoretical aspectsthat is delivered at arequired timeAssesment by thestaff members ontheir behaviour /rapport with thepatients andattendanceIssuing deadlineson a givenassignment/Clinical casesrequiredd. Communication


Develop the abilityto do a casepresentation to theclass utilisingMicrosoftPowerPointKnow the basics ofcommunication andinformationtechnology & utilise

The students areguided to carry outweb based searchand encouraged tocollect material ofrelevancepertaining tooperative dentistryand actively involvein circulating the

Evaluate theirmethod ofcollection of e-based facts &assessment of themethod andduration of timeinvolving the same.



these skills the bestway possible intheir assignmentsAbility to utiliseelectronic library/e-journals.

electronicallycollected materialwith the fellowcolleagues and staffmembers.e. Psychomotor skills Use the instrumentsrequired to performcavity preparationAble to handleengine drivenrotaryinstrumentation ina proper and safeway in the patientsmouthProperly use ofamalgam materialAble to provide thetreatment details topatient /build upgood dentist-patient relationshipand provide thetreatment in a bestpossible waykeeping thepsychological statusof patients in mind.

ClinicaldemonstrationsCritical evaluationon the clinical workdone in aconstructivemanner.





D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weeka- Dr Syed Nahid Basheerb- Dr Abbas Rizvi

E. Learning resources1. Sturdevant's Art and Science of Operative Dentistry (Roberson, Sturdevant's Art andScience of Operative Dentistry) by Theodore Roberson, Harold O. Heymann, and EdwardJ. Swift. 2006.2. Textbook of Operative Dentistry by Sharad Chandra and Sangita Chandra. 2008.3. Principles of Operative Dentistry by A. J. E. Qualtrough, Julian Satterthwaite, LeeanMorrow, and Paul Brunton. 2005.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation


G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement.

Course Specifications | 7th Semester | Preclinical Endodontics I | Page - 162

PRECLINICAL ENDODONTICS I1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Preclinical Endodontics I423 RDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Prof. Hosham Khalifa KamalyDr. Abbas Rizvie. Year/Semester at which course offered 4th Year | 7th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 322 RDS.g. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus -

B. ObjectivesOn completion of the course the students should be able to: Have an understanding of the anatomy and morphology of the pulp spaces. Possess the knowledge of the fundamental operative procedures like access cavitypreparation, cleaning and shaping of the root canal system and to successfully obturatethe prepared root canal space. Possess the complete knowledge of the various endodontic instruments, theirapplications and the ability to identify them and differentiate them from one another. Have the ability to perform endodontic procedures on the extracted maxillary incisor,maxillary canine and maxillary 1st premolar.

C. Course descriptionThe course is given to 4th year (7th semester) students as one lecture and one pre-clinicalpractical session. The theoretical part covers topics which include an introduction to thesubject, anatomy and morphology of the root canal system, access cavity preparation,cleaning and shaping of the root canal systems and obturation of the root canal and itlays emphasis on possessing thorough knowledge of the various endodonticinstruments. The pre-clinical practical component focuses on the treatment of anteriorand premolar teeth. The course is given as one lecture and one pre-clinical session perweek, equivalent to 2 credit hours and 4 contact hours.



S.No. TOPICS NO. OF WEEKS CREDIT HOURS1. Introduction To Endodontics And ItsScope, Indications AndContraindications

1 12. Pulp Space, Morphology And Anatomy

Pulp chamber, Root canal, Accessorycanals, Apical foramen Anatomy and morphology of maxillaryteeth

2 2

Anatomy and morphology ofmandibular teeth3. Coronal Cavity Preparation

Principles of endodontic cavitypreparation Coronal cavity preparation for anteriorteeth

2 2

Coronal cavity preparation forposterior teeth4. Radicular Cavity Preparation

Pulpectomy procedure Working length determination

3 3

Irrigation Intracanal medicaments Techniques for cleaning and shaping5. Instruments and Instrumentation

Root canal instruments 2 2 Mechanical instrumentation6. Obturation Of Radicular Space

Techniques of obturation 3 3



Materials used for obturation Endodontic sealers

S.No. Practical exercise NO. OF WEEKS CREDIT HOURS1. Identification of basic endodonticinstruments and materials. 1 12. Mounting of extracted teeth in wax blocksand demonstration of application ofrubber dam. 2 23. Coronal access cavity preparation andworking length determination onextracted maxillary central incisorsmounted on wax blocks.

1 14. Cleaning and shaping of root canal spacewith irrigation of extracted maxillarycentral incisors mounted on wax blocks. 1 15. Obturation of the root canal spacefollowed by closure of the access cavity(with temporary filling material) of theextracted maxillary central incisorsmounted on wax blocks.

1 1

6. Coronal access cavity preparation andworking length determination onextracted maxillary canine mounted onwax blocks. 1 17. Cleaning and shaping of root canal spacewith irrigation of extracted maxillarycanine mounted on wax blocks. 1 18. Obturation of the root canal spacefollowed by closure of the access cavity(with temporary filling material) of theextracted maxillary canine mounted onwax blocks.

1 19. Coronal access cavity preparation andworking length determination onextracted maxillary 1st premolar mountedon wax blocks. 2 210. Cleaning and shaping of root canal spacewith irrigation of extracted maxillary 1stpremolar mounted on wax blocks. 1 1



11. Obturation of the root canal spacefollowed by closure of the access cavity(with temporary filling material) of theextracted maxillary 1st premolar mountedon wax blocks.1 1

II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others13 - 13 -III. Additional learning hours expected for students: 20 per semester


strategiesMethod of

Assessmenta. Knowledge Recognize thefundamentals ofcavity preparationfor endodontictreatment (bothcoronal & radicular)as well asunderstanding theprinciplesgoverning it.Recognize anddescribe differentinstrument used inendodontics.Recognize anddescribe thedifferent techniques& materials forobturation of theroot canal.

Explanationutilising Microsoftpower pointincluding picturesExplanations bydrawing picture.Interactions withthe students toexplain theconcepts taught todevelop selfinterest andcompetition amongthe fellow studentsPreclinicalpractical sessionson mountedextracted teethpreceded by handson demonstration .

Continuousassessments anddiscussions whichincudes Quizzes &Midtermexamination(T/P),clinicalrequirements &Finalexamination(T/P)

b. Cognitive Students willdevelop goodconcentration onthe topics whichwill result in goodperception andmemory all of

Explanationutilising Microsoftpower pointExplanatorydrawing to clarifythe taught partsGuiding studentsfollowing up the

Continuousassessment in theform of Quizzes &Midtermexamination,clinicalrequirements andFinal examination-



which leading tounderstanding,recollection,reproduction of thetaught concepts(both theoreticaland practical)

work at regulartime intervalsPracticaldemonstrations ofwhat have beentaught theoretically

Theory/Practical


The students areencouraged to havean attitude forcommitment tosucceed in the field,work well with thefellow students andmaintain goodrelationship withstaff members, withresponsibilitytowards finishingall assignments ontime

The students arealways encouragedto the best andassignments aregiven deadlines tobe submitted.Practicalrequirement are setat a definitenumber.Team work isencouraged byallowing thestudents to makepresentations in agroup.

Assignments ontheoretical aspectsthat is delivered at arequired timeAssessment by thestaff members ontheir behaviour andattendanceIssuing deadlineson a givenassignment


Know the basics ofcommunication andinformationtechnology, utilisethese skills in thebest way possible intheir assignment.

The students areguided to carry outweb based searchand encouraged tocollect material ofrelevancepertaining tooperative dentistryand activelyinvolved incirculating theelectronicallycollected materialwith the fellowcolleagues and staffmembers

Evaluate theirmethod ofcollection ofe-based facts &Assessment of themethod andduration of timeinvolving the same.

e. Psychomotor skills Use the instrumentsrequired to performcavity preparationboth coronal as wellas radicular.Livedemonstrationscritical evaluationof the work done in

The students willhave continuousassessment on thepractical work(accuracy and



Able to handleengine drivenrotaryinstrumentation ina proper and safewayProper use of thematerials used forobturation.

constructivemanneradjuncts in theform of lectures orillustrativediagrams,lab sessions onartificial andextracted teeth.

control in use ofhand and rotaryinstruments as wellas proper handlingof obturatingmaterials) and thestudents areexpected to fulfilthe requirementsset.V. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester

Assessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 5%MCQ’s II 5%Requirements 10%Midterm 20%Summative Assessment 60% Practical Exams 20%Oral exam 10%Written Examss 30%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Endodontics: Principles and Practice by Mahmoud Torabinejad DMD MSD PhD andRichard E. Walton. 2008.2. Ingle's Endodontics 6/e by John I. Ingle, Leif K. Bakland, J. Craig, and Ph.D. Baumgartner.2007.3. Problem Solving in Endodontics: Prevention, Identification, and Management by JamesL. Gutmann, Thom Dumsha, and Paul Lovdahl. 2005.4. PDQ Endodontics, 2nd edition by John Ide Ingle. 2009.5. Clinical Endodontics: A Textbook by Leif Tronstad. 2008.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Labs for 40-60 studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journals



c. Other resources Overhead projectors



Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements.



Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.


Course Specifications | 7th Semester | Periodontics I | Page - 170

PERIODONTICS I1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Periodontics I, 431 PDSb. Credit hours 4c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Prof. Ebtessam ElzefzafDr. Mohammad SabirDr. Sameena SultanaDr. Reda Sabere. Year/Semester at which course offered 4th Year | 7th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 312 MDSg. Co-requisites for the courseh. Location if not main campus Shwajrah

B. ObjectivesUpon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize, analyze and applyinformation presented relevant to the:1. Recognition of normal macro/microanatomy of the periodontal tissues.2. Classification of the gingival and periodontal diseases and its relevancy to clinicalpractice.3. Epidemiology of the periodontal diseases and its relevancy to clinical practice.4. Tobacco use and nicotine dependence in the clinical management of periodontalpatient.5. The role of microbiology and immunology in the initiation and progression ofperiodontal diseases.6. Risk assessment and genetic factors for individual patients and the population atlarge.C. Course descriptionPeriodontology I is a didactic course for seventh semester dental students. This coursewill provide an introduction to the science and art of Periodontics, emphasizingclassification and epidemiology of periodontal diseases; macro/microanatomy of thenormal periodontium and a clinical overview of the etiology of periodontal diseases ispresented and discussed. Dental plaque and calculus, host defense and immune-pathological mechanisms are also presented. Clinical, histo-pathological andpathogenesis of gingivitis and periodontitis, risk assessment, tobacco use and systemicdiseases are explored and presented.



I. Topics to be coveredTopics- Lectures No. Of

WeeksContact hours

Introduction to Periodontology 1 1 Classification of Gingival and Periodontal Diseases 1 1 The Normal Periodontium

Gingiva Periodontal ligament 2 2

Aging and the Periodontium 1 1 Epidemiology of Gingival and Periodontal Diseases 1 1 Microbiology of Periodontal Diseases - Part I Microbiology of Periodontal Diseases - Part II 2 2 Immunity Interactions and Periodontal Diseases -Part I Immunity Interactions and Periodontal Diseases - Part II 2 2 Tobacco Use and Periodontal Diseases 1 1 Periodontal Pathology-Gingival Diseases - Part I Periodontal Pathology-Gingival Diseases - Part II 2 2

Total 13 13Topics-Practical

Infection control procedures – dental operatory 1 3 Recording patient’s medical history - student partner 1 3 Soft tissue examination on student partner. 1 3 Hard tissue exams will be done on student partner 1 3 Recording plaque index on student partner 1 3 Provide oral hygiene instruction 1 3 Periodontal examination on model 1 3 Periodontal probing on typhodont, periodontalassessment and periodontal charting 1 3 Periodontal charting on models and on student partner 1 3 Instrumentation principles and patient/clinicianpositioning 1 3 Hand Scaling practice on models 1 3 Oral prophylaxis (student pair switch) andcommunicate with patient and will learn aboutperiodontal radiology 1 3 Treatment planning 1 3 Management of medical emergencies in dental office 1 3

Total 14 42

II. COURSE COMPONENTLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Clinical13 -- 14



II. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of LearningSkills Description Teaching

strategiesMethod of

Assessmenta. Knowledge Integratetheoreticalknowledge relatedto Periodontics intoclinical practice.Each lecture willelaborate onseveral importantpoints associatedwith assignedreadings. Thepurposes of thelectures are toincrease theunderstanding andto complement theassigned readings.The lectures are nota replacement ofthe assignedreadings and otherresources.

1-Multiple choicequestions (MCQ)based on materialsfrom the lecturesand assignedreadings from thetext book.2-Short answer typequestions3-True/False typequestions4-Patient’s clinicalexamination andtreatment planning5-oral examb. Cognitive 1-Demonstrateability to use selfknowledge anddecision onworking withcolleagues, patients,and teacher.2-Develop a dentist-patient relationshipwith patients.3-Demonstrateknowledgeable skillperformance incarrying outspecific periodontalclinical procedures.

1-Lectures,periodontal examon models,treatment planningon partner,Small groupactivity rotation(Prophylaxis-student pair switch,Communicationwith Patients andRadiology)2-Seminars toinsure theappropriateapplication ofdifferent clinicalconcepts.3-Case study todevelop rationalesfor periodontalassessments,diagnosis, andtreatment planning.

Student’s cognitiveskill will beevaluated on thebasis ofparticipation,professionalism andattendance.


1-Developawareness intoone’s own attitudetowards1-Video taping ofactual studentsinteractions ingroups or one-to-

1-Oral semi-structure interview(to demonstrate theability of



periodontaldiseases2-Value one’s ownmental healthpractices as aprofessionalgeneral dentalpractitioner.

one student patientinteraction (or roleplays) to teachdynamics ofinteraction.2- Directinteraction withpatients (real-lifesimulation) toapply and critiqueinterpersonal skills.

communicationwith patients)2- Seminar (topresent projectoutcome as ademonstration ofability to applyinterviewing andinterpersonaltherapeuticcommunicationskills betweenstudents andpatients.d. CommunicationInformationTechnology &Numerical skills

Use of web basedmaterial related toPeriodontology. Group tutorial tofacilitate selection& utilization ofappropriate webbased periodontalmaterial.Assignments (topresent recentdifferent topicrelated toperiodontaltherapy).e. Psychomotor skills 1. Hand-eye co-ordination (to aid inproper harmlessand uneventfultreatment to thepatient and also thesupporting staff)

a) skillful scalingprocedures onpatientsb) improvingtactile sensationwhile probingsubgingival areasc) Probing andhandling hard andsoft tissuesd) Administer localanesthesiainjections withminimal pain anddiscomfort

a) Evaluation of thecase/patient by thestaffb) Assessment ofwork done bygrading.

2. Manual dexterity a) Carrying outscaling procedureswith skill anddexterityb) Appropriate andeffective selectionof armamentariumfor clinicalproceduresc) Ability to beambidextrous asand when requiredd) Develop highlevels of tactilesensations for finer



clinical procedures3.High visual acuity a) Developing highlevel of imaginationin relation to threedimensions to thinkandoperate in differentclinical conditionsb) Ability to carryout differentclinical proceduresusing indirectvision (mirrorimages)

III. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semesterAssessment Proportion Task Proportion

Continuous Assessment 40%Quiz I 10%Midterm

Quiz Viva voce 10%

10%Quiz II 10%Summative Assessment 60% Practical Exams 20%Written Exams

Quiz Viva voce 30%

10%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Carranza’s Clinical Periodontology: Newman, Takei, Klokkevold and Carranza, 10thedition, W. B. Saunders Co., 20062. Manual of Clinical Periodontics: A Reference Manual for Diagnosis & Treatment (Lexi-Comp's Dental Reference Library) by Francis G. Serio and Charles E., Ph.D. Hawley. 2009.Neild-Gehrig, Jill S.3. Fundamentals of Periodontal Instrumentation and Advanced Root Instrumentation, 6thed. Lippincott, Williams and Wilkins, 20074. Practical Periodontal Plastic Surgery by Serge Dibart and MamdouhKarima. 2006.



5. Periodontics by Barry M. Eley BDS FDSRCS PhD, Mena Soory FDSRCS PhD FHEA, and J.D. Manson. 2009.6. Practical Advanced Periodontal Surgery by Serge Dibart. 2007.7. Periodontics & Restorative Maintenance: A Clinical Atlas by Naoshi Sato. 2009.8. Comprehensive Periodontics for the Dental Hygienist (3rd Edition) by Mea A. Weinberg,Cheryl Westphal, Stuart J. Froum, and Milton Palat. 2009.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation


G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awhole



e. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:





8TH SEMESTER

FOURTH YEAR

EIGHT SEMESTER

CODE COURSE TITLE TH PR CRH COH P-REQ

413 MDS Oral Medicine & DiagnosticSciences II

1 3 2 4 412 MDS414 MDS Clinical Oral &Maxillofacial Surgery I 1 3 2 4 315 MDS422 RDS Operative Dentistry II 1 3 2 4 421 RDS424 RDS Preclinical Endodontics II 1 3 2 4 423 RDS432 PDS Periodontics II 1 3 2 4 431 PDS433 PDS Preclinical Pedodontics 1 3 2 4 421 RDS442 SDS Clinical RemovableProsthodontics II

1 3 2 4 441 SDS444 SDS Preclinical FixedProsthodontics II

1 6 3 7 443 SDSTOTAL 8 8 27 17 35


Course Specifications | 8th Semester | Oral Medicine & Diagnostic Sciences II | Page - 178

ORAL MEDICINE & DIAGNOSTIC SCIENCES IIInstitution Jazan UniversityCollege College of Dentistry

B- Objectives

By the end of the course the students should:

Offer an appropriate dental management of the patient suffered from infectious diseasesincluding viral hepatitis and acquired immune deficiency disease (ADS) Be able to identify the diabetic patients, based on oral clinical finding, order the properlaboratory investigations. Perform proper dental management to diabetic patients and other endocrinal disorders. be well versed with the steps of Basic Life Support, and drugs and equipment ofemergencies Know about the handling the patient in an emergency situations. Be knowledgeable about patho-physiology, differential diagnosis, and treatment plan ofthe diseases affecting the salivary glands. Be able to identify the need to referral to specialist in situations demanding the same.C-Course descriptions

This course allow dental students to establish the clinical and systemic manifestations,diagnosis and treatment planning for diseases affect oral structures including salivarygland diseases, infectious diseases. The course helps the students to identify andmanagement of oral complications of diabetes and other endocrinal disorders, to controlpatient in emergency situations. The course is offered through lectures and clinicalpractice in the eighth Semester and shall have two credit hours.

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Oral Medicine & DiagnosticSciences II, 413 MDSb. Credit hours 3c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Prof. Ebtessam ElzefzafDr. Reda SabraDr.Sameena ParveenDr. Tenny Johne. Year/Semester at which course offered 4th Year | 8th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 412 MDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus -



I. Topics to be coveredTopic No of weeks Practical hours Contact hoursInfectious diseases 3 3 6Basic life support 1 3 6Emergency kit 1 3 6Salivary gland diseases 3 3 6Diabetes mellitus 2 3 6Endocrine disorders. 2 3 6Total 12 36 72

DateII. Course Component

Lectures TutorialsPractical/Fieldwork/

InternshipOthers

one hour/week One hour/week Three hours/week -

1stweekInfectious diseases:Bacterial infectionsChlamydial infectionsRichetsial infectionsxxxxxx?Fungal infectionsMucormycosis

Diagnosis of oralinfectious diseases(clinical andlaboratoryprocedure).Examination anddiagnosis of patientswith oral diseases

∙ Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and JonathanA. Ship. 2008.Ch.20.page481.

2ndweek Viral infectionsViral hepatitisDentalmanagement ofpatients with viralhepatitis andmethods requiredto prevent crossinfection

Examination ofpatients with oraldiseases

Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and JonathanA Ship. 2008.Ch.20.page481.3rdweek Viral infectionsHuman immunedeficiency virus(HIV)

Dentalmanagement ofpatients with HIVinfections andmethods requiredto prevent crossinfectionInfection control andexamination ofpatients with oral viralmanifestations.

Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and Jonathan AShip. 2008.



Ch.20.page481.4thweek

Definition ofunconsciousness stepsof Management (basiclife support)Application onsimulatorManagement(basic lifesupport)

Discussion about timefactor in basic lifesupport and differentsteps5thweek

Emergency drugs andequipmentsInjectable drugsNon injectable drugsEmergency drugsand equipmentsInjectable drugsNoninjectabledrugs

Identification ofinjectable and noninjectable drugsamples

6thweek

Salivary gland diseasesDiagnosis of patientswith salivary glanddiseasesSpecific diseases anddisorders of the salivarygland:DevelopmentalabnormalitiesSialolithasis andMucoceal

Inflammatory andreactive lesionsallergicsialadenitisViral diseasesBacterial diseasesinvolvmentExamination ofpatients with oral andsalivar gland diseases

Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and JonathanA. Ship. 2008.Ch.8.page191.

7thweekSystemic conditionswith salivary glanddiseases.Salivary gland tumers.

Illustrate colouratlas of salivarygland diseases Examination ofpatients with oral andsalivary gland diseasesBurket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and JonathanA. Ship. 2008.Ch.8.page191

8thweek

Management ofxerostomiaPreventive therapySymptomatic treatmentSalivary stimulation,treatment of underlyingsystemic disorderssialorrheadescription andaetiologyclinical presentation

Illustrate colouratlas of oralmedicine casesregarding salivarygland diseasesExamination ofpatients with oraldiseases

Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and JonathanA. Ship. 2008.Ch.8.page191



diagnosis and treatment

9thweekDiabetes mellitus:EpidemiologyPatho-physiologyClinical presentationsDiagnosis andmonitoringcomplications

Illustrate colouratlas of oralmedicine casesregarding oralpresentations ofDiabetes mellitusExamination ofpatients with oraldiseases. Assessdiabetic periodontitisand other relatedsymptoms

Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and JonathanA. Ship. 2008.Ch 21 page509 .

10thweek ManagementOral manifestations ofDMDental managementIllustrate colouratlas of oralmedicine casesregarding oralpresentations ofDiabetes mellitus

Examination ofpatients with oraldiseases

Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and JonathanA. Ship. 2008.Ch 21 page509 .

11thweekEndocrine diseasesPituitary glandAdrenal glandThyroid gland

∙ Illustrate colouratlas of oralmedicine casesregardingendocrinaldisordersExamination ofpatients with oraldiseases

Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and JonathanA. Ship. 2008.Ch 21 page509

12thweekGonads and gonadaldysfunctionParathyroid gland andmetabolic disorders

∙ Illustrate colouratlas of oralmedicine casesregardingendocrinaldisordersExamination ofpatients with oraldiseases

Burket's OralMedicine 11/eby Greenberg,MartinGreenberg,Michael Glick,and JonathanA. Ship. 2008.Ch 21 page




strategiesMethod of

Assessmenta- Knowledge Integratetheoreticalknowledgerelated to oralmedicine anddiagnosticscience intoclinical practice.

Each lecture willelaborate onseveral ofimportantpointsassociated withassignedreadings. Thepurposes of thelectures are toincrease theunderstandingand tocomplement theassignedreadings. Thelectures are nota replacement ofthe assignedreadings andother resources.

1-Multiple choicequestions (MCQ)based onmaterials from thelectures andassigned readingsfrom the textbook.2-Short answertype questions3-True/False typequestions4-Patient’s clinicalexamination andtreatmentplanning5-oral examb- Cognitive 1-Demonstrateability to use selfknowledge anddecision onworking withcolleagues,patients, andteacher.2-Develop adentist-patient

1-Lectures, oralmedicine anddiagnosticscience examand clinicalpractice onpatients,treatmentplanning on

1-Student need tocomplete theassigned clinicalexperiences.3-Select, obtainand interpretpatient data,information andradiographs to be

509I I I- Assessment Schedule and weighting

Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 10%MCQ’s II 10%Mid term 20%Final term exam 60% Written 30%practical 20%Oral exams 10%



relationshipwith patients.3-Demonstrateknowledgeableskillperformance incarrying out oralmedicine anddiagnosticscience clinicalprocedures.

partner,2-Small groupactivity rotation(Prophylaxis-student pairswitch,Communicationwith Patients).3-Seminars toinsure theappropriateapplication ofdifferent clinicalconcepts.4-Case study todeveloprationales fororal diseasesassessments,diagnosis, andtreatmentplanning.5-Clinicalpractice onpatients.

able to use thesefindings toaccuratelydiagnose andtreat patients.3-Formulate acomprehensivediagnosis andtreatment/referralplan for themanagement ofpatients.4-Prevent, assesand manage ofmedical anddentalemergencies.5- Diagnose andmanage oraldiseases.

c- Interpersonal &Responsibilities

1-Developawareness intoone’s ownattitude towardsoral diseses.2-Value one’sown mentalhealth practicesas a professionalgeneral dentalpractitioner.

1-Video tapingof actualstudent’sinteractions ingroups or one-to-one studentpatientinteraction (orrole plays) toteach dynamicsof interaction.2- Directinteraction withpatients (real-life simulation)to apply andcritiqueinterpersonalskills.

1-Atlas for oraldiseasesinterview (todemonstrate theability ofdifferentialdiagnosis of oraldiseases inpatients)2- Seminar (topresent projectoutcome as ademonstration ofability to applyinterviewing andinterpersonaltherapeuticcommunicationskills betweenstudents andpatients.d- Communication

InformationUse of webbased material Group tutorial tofacilitate Assignments (topresent recent



Technology &Numerical skills

related to oralmedicine anddiagnosticscience.selection &utilization ofappropriate webbased oralmedicine anddiagnosticscience.

different topicrelated to thetreatment of oraldiseasese- Psychomotor skills

Learning resourcesEssential textbooks:1. Burket's Oral Medicine 11/e by Greenberg, Martin Greenberg, Michael Glick, andJonathan A. Ship. 2008.2. Oral and Maxillofacial Medicine: The Basis of Diagnosis and Treatment by CrispianScully. 2008.3. Tyldesley's Oral Medicine, Anne; Longman, Lesley 5th Edition Copyright Â©2003Oxford University Press > Front of Book >.Recommended books:1- Pockets Atlas of Oral Diseases, 2nd ed. edition Laskaris G. Thieme Inc., 2006.2- Oral Medicine Secrets by Stephen T. Sonis, Leslie Shu-Tung Fang, and Robert C. Fazio.2002.3- Oral Diagnosis, Oral Medicine and treatment planing by Bricker S., Langlais R & Miller C.Lea & Febiger 1994.4- A guide to common oral lesions Dr. Charles. Dunlap and Dr. Bruce. F, BarkerDepartment of Oral Maxillofacial pathologyUMCK School of dentistry.Periodical, web sites, etc:

1- Oral Diseaseshttp://www.blackwell-syngergy.com/loi/jop2- Journals of oral pathology &medicin http//www.blackwell- syngergy.com/loi/jop3- Oral diagnosis: The Clinician Guide by birnbaum W & Dunne S. Butterworth-Heinemam:1st edition.Other facilities:a. Digital camera for documentation of clinical cases. a-Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Labs for 40-60 studentsb. Computing resources



Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc-Other resources Overhead projectors Oral medicine conference room

Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:

Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills.



Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.



Course Specifications | 8th Semester | Clinical Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery I | Page - 187

CLINICAL ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY I1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Clinical Oral & MaxillofacialSurgery I414 MDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Ashwin. J.e. Year/Semester at which course offered 4th Year | 8th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 315MDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Shawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesAt the end of the course the students should: Be able to assess patients for minor surgical procedures, properly take physicalexaminations, advice investigations and plan treatment.Manage medical problems in dentistry like management of Cardiovascular patients management of endocrine disorder patients management of gastrointestinal and renal disease patients management of haematological disorder patients management of liver and musculoskeletal disorder patients management of immunodeficiency patients management of women patients medical emergency of unconscious patients cardiopulmonary resuscitation Should be able to identify instruments in OMFSC. Course description

This course will be taught in oral surgery in 4th Year | 8th Semester. The course is intended tocover one main topic that is managing medical problems in dentistry. Topics on medicalproblems in dentistry will include how to assess patients on suitability for local anaesthesia.They will also cover dental management of cardiovascular patients, endocrine disorder patients,gastrointestinal and renal disease patients, haematological disorder patients, liver and



musculoskeletal disorder patients, immunodeficiency patients, and management of womenpatients. Lastly, the course deals with the medical emergencies and diagnostic tools in Oral andMaxillofacial Surgery. In the clinics the student will learn to perform CPR and, manage medicalemergencies such as syncope, adrenal insufficiency, and control bleeding.I. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of Weeks Contact hours1. Management of Cardiovascular patients 1 42. Management of endocrine disorder patients 1 43. Management of gastrointestinal and renal diseasepatients 1 44. Management of haematological disorder patients 1 45. Management of liver and musculoskeletal disorderpatients 1 46. Management of immunodeficiency patients 1 47. Management of women patients 1 48. Medical emergency I 1 49. Medical emergency II 1 410. Medical emergency III 1 411. Diagnostic tools in OMFS 1 4II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others

11 11



Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Manage medicallycompromisedpatients Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Case presentations




by students.Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Case presentationsby students.b. Cognitive Identify Medicallycompromisedpatients Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Case presentationsby students.






Students will betaught to regularlyupdate theirknowledge on Oralsurgery byList of web sitesprovidingknowledge on OralSurgery.Registration of

Continuous clinicalevaluation/monitoring by thestaff.Interactive sessions



increased use ofinternet/web basedinformation online journals with studentse. Psychomotor skills Should developskills foridentifying andmanaging medicallycompromisedpatients

Exclusive trainingon clinicalprocedures Step-by-stepevaluation of eachprocedure by theconcerned staff.Practical & OralexamsV. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester

Assessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 15%MCQ’s II 15%Midterm 10%Summative Assessment 60% Practical Exams 20%Written Exams 40%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Medical Problems in Dentistry- Scully, Cawson- 5th edition2. An Introduction to Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery (Oxford MedicalPublications) by David A. Mitchell. 2006.3. Contemporary Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery by James R. Hupp, Edward Ellis III, andMyron R. Tucker. 2008.4. Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Secrets by A. Omar Abubaker DMD PhD and Kenneth J.Benson. 2007.5. Clinical Review of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery by Shahrokh C. Bagheri DMD MD andChris Jo. 2007.6. Manual of Minor Oral Surgery for the General Dentist by Karl R. Koerner. 2006.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Clinics with 40 dental chairs Recovery Room Minor Operation Theatre with 10 dental chairs Scrub Area Sterilisation Room



Changing room with lockers for staff and studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors Computer systems

G. Course evaluation and improvement processes

Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaire Viva

Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.

Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.

Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awhole

Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:


Course Specifications | 8th Semester | Operative Dentistry II | Page - 193

OPERATIVE DENTISTRY II1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Operative Dentistry II,422RDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Dr Syed Nahid BasheerDr. Abbas Rizvie. Year/Semester at which course offered 4th Year | 8thSemesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 421 RDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus shawajrah

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Know the various bonding techniques Understand the concepts of cavity preparations for composite restorations onpatients Know how to finish and polish the composite restorations Know the adverse effects while preparing cavity preparation and recognizemechanisms through which these effects are produced and also efforts should bemade to minimize it. know the most likely side effects of materials and how to prevent the same Know in detail about the various Non-Carious Lesions Be able to perform glass ionomer restorations on the patients Be able to do compound class I amalgam restorations on the patients

C. Course descriptionThis course is provided by the Restorative department during the second semester ofthe fourth year. The course consists of two parts, theory and clinics, in which the formerincludes lectures and seminar presentations and the later includes the application of thetheory knowledge gained in the theoretical sessionsThe course is given as one lecture and one lab session per week for the whole semesterand will have 2 credit hours and four contact hours.In this course the students will be trained to minimize the adverse effects whilepreparing cavities with high speed equipments, minimize the side effects of restorativematerials, prepare cavities and restore with composite resin on patients, prepare



compound class I cavities and restore with amalgam restorative material on patients,recognize & manage non carious lesions.I. Topics to be covered

Topics No. ofcredithours

Contacthours1 Adhesive & Adhesion 2 22 Class I composite Cavity Preparation & restoration 1 13 Class V composite Cavity Preparation & restoration 1 14 Finishing & Polishing Of Composite restoration 1 15 Biological Considerations during Tooth Preparation 2 26 Selection of Restorative Materials 1 17 Biological Considerations of Restorative Materials 2 28 Non Carious Lesions 2 29 Glass Ionomer Restorations 2 2

SINUM

CLINICS

1 Simple Amalgam restorations2 Compound Amalgam restorations3 Conventional glass ionomer restorations4 modified glass ionomer restorations5 Simple composite restorations

II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical Others14 --- 14 ---III. Addition learning hours expected for students– 20/Semester




strategiesMethod of

Assessmenta. Knowledge Develop Properbonding techniqueTechniques for theuse of compositematerial forClasses III, and Vrestorations.Manage non cariouslesionsPerform restorationof teeth with glassionomer cement inpatientsUnderstand theconcept of selectionof properrestorative materialand its biologicaleffects


Continuousassessments anddiscussions whichincudes Quizzes &Midtermexamination(T/P) &Finalexamination(T/P)

b. Cognitive Students willdevelop goodconcentration onthe topics whichwill result in goodconcentration,perception andneverthelessmemory all ofwhich leading tounderstanding ,recollection,reproduction of thetaught concepts(both theoreticaland practical ) atany given time.

Explanationutilising Microsoftpower pointExplanatorydrawing to clarifysome partsGuiding studentsfollowing up thework at regulartime intervalsClinicaldemonstrations ,case presentationand supervision

Continuousassessments anddiscussions whichincudes QuizzesMidtermexamination(T/P) &Finalexamination(T/P)

c. Interpersonal &Responsibilities The students are The student are Assesment of



encouraged to havean attitude forcommitment tosucceed in the field,work well with thefellow students andmaintain goodrelationship withstaff members/patients, withresponsibilitytowards finishingall cases on time.

always encouragedto the best infriendly way, andcases are given andcompletedaccordingly. Clinicalrequirement are setat a definitenumber

clinical cases andtheir completionand follow up at agiven period of timeAssignments ontheoretical aspectsthat is delivered at arequired time.Assesment by thestaff members ontheir behaviour /rapport with thepatients andattendanceIssuing deadlineson a givenassignment/clinicalcases requiredd. CommunicationInformationTechnology &Numerical skills

Develop the abilityto discuss thedifferentialdiagnosis of thedisease with fellowcolleagues and staffmembers andpresent the caseorallyKnow the basics ofcommunication andinformationtechnology, utilisethese skills the bestway possible intheir assignmentsability to utiliseelectronic library-e,journals.

The studentsare guided tocarry out webbased searchand encouragedto collectmaterial ofrelevancepertaining tooperativedentistry andactively involvein circulatingtheelectronicallycollectedmaterial withthe fellowcolleagues andstaff members.

Evaluate theirmethod ofcollection of e-based facts ,assessment of themethod andduration of timeinvolving the same.

e. Psychomotor skills Be able to applyrubber dam withoutharming the patientDevelop dexterityClinicaldemonstrationscritical evaluationof the clinical work

The students willhave continuousassessment on thepractical work andthe students are



to manipulate &restore the teethwith glass ionomercementsAble to provide thetreatment details topatient /build upgood dentist-patient relationshipand provide thetreatment best waypossible andkeeping thepsychological statusof patients in mind.

in a constructivemanner. expected to fulfilthe requirementsset.


D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weeka- Dr Syed Nahid Basheerb- Dr Abbas Rizvi

E. Learning resources1. Sturdevant's Art and Science of Operative Dentistry (Roberson, Sturdevant's Art andScience of Operative Dentistry) by Theodore Roberson, Harold O. Heymann, and EdwardJ. Swift. 2006.2. Textbook of Operative Dentistry by Sharad Chandra and Sangita Chandra. 2008.



3. Principles of Operative Dentistry by A. J. E. Qualtrough, Julian Satterthwaite, LeeanMorrow, and Paul Brunton. 2005.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation



Review:



Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.



Course Specifications | 8th Semester | Preclinical Endodontics II | Page - 200

PRECLINICAL ENDODONTICS II1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Preclinical Endodontics I424 RDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Prof. Hosham Khalifa KamalyDr. Abbas Rizvie. Year/Semester at which course offered 4th Year | 8th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 423 RDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Shawajarah

B. ObjectivesOn completion of the course the students should be able to: Have complete understanding of the various pulp and peri-radicular disease conditionsand the ability to differentiate them from one another. Possess the knowledge of various micro-organisms causing the pulpal and per-radicularlesions. Adequately select proper cases for endodontic treatment and also be able to plan thenecessary treatment leading to a successful endodontic outcome. Have the knowledge of management of the vital pulp. Have an understanding of the diagnosis in endodontics along with the ability toaccurately diagnose the various conditions requiring endodontic intervention. Perform endodontic procedures on extracted maxillary and mandibular first andsecond molars and perform the retreatment procedure on the extracted maxillarycentral incisors.C. Course descriptionThe course is given to 4th year (8th semester) students as one lecture and one pre-clinicalpractical session. The theoretical part covers topics which include pulp pathology,endodontic microbiology, vital pulp therapy, case selection and treatment planning,diagnosis and diagnostic procedures. The pre-clinical lab/practical component focuseson performing endodontic procedures on molars and retreatment of the alreadyobturated maxillary central incisors. This prepares the students to perform basicendodontic procedures prior to entering the clinics in the fifth year. The course is givenas one lecture and one pre-clinical session per week, equivalent to 2 credit hours and 4contact hours.



S.No. TOPICS NO. OF WEEKS CREDIT HOURS1. Structure And Function Of Pulp 1 12. Pulp Pathology

Etiology Reversible & irreversible pulpitis Chronic hyperplastic pulpitis

3 3

Internal resorption Pulp degeneration Pulp necrosis Physical and chemical causes of pulpdisease Patho-physiology of pulp disorders Endodontic implications3. Endodontic Microbiology And Asepsis

Aerobic and anaerobic bacteria Bacterial pathways into the pulp Bacteriological examination

2 2

Sterilization Disinfection Barrier techniques4. Case Selection And Treatment Planning

Indications and local contraindicationsfor root canal treatment2 2

Systemic conditions contraindicated forroot canal treatment Pulp less teeth as abutments Pulp less teeth and orthodontictreatment5. VITAL PULP THERAPY

Direct and indirect pulp capping 2 2 Pulpotomy, apexification andapexogenesis



6. DIAGNOSIS

History taking

Chief complaint Medical and dental history History of present condition Maintaining recordsExamination

Visual examination Visual inspection Palpation and percussion Mobility and depressibility

3 3

Radiographs

IOPA Bite wing Occlusal Xeroradiography RVGVitality Testing

Thermal stimulation Electrical stimulation Direct dentin stimulationOTHER TESTS Anesthetic test Test cavity

S.No. Practical exercise NO. OF WEEKS CREDIT HOURS1. Coronal access cavity preparation andworking length determination onextracted maxillary 1st molar mounted onwax blocks.1 1

2. Cleaning and shaping of root canal spacewith irrigation of extracted maxillary 1stmolar mounted on wax blocks. 1 13. Obturation of the root canal spacefollowed by closure of the access cavity(with temporary filling material) of the 1 1



extracted maxillary 1st molar mounted onwax blocks.4. Coronal access cavity preparation andworking length determination onextracted mandibular 1st molar mountedon wax blocks. 1 15. Cleaning and shaping of root canal spacewith irrigation of extracted mandibular 1stmolar mounted on wax blocks. 1 16. Obturation of the root canal spacefollowed by closure of the access cavity(with temporary filling material) of theextracted mandibular 1st molar mountedon wax blocks.

1 17. Coronal access cavity preparation andworking length determination onextracted mandibular 2nd molar mountedon wax blocks. 1 18. Cleaning and shaping of root canal spacewith irrigation of extracted mandibular2nd molar mounted on wax blocks. 1 19. Obturation of the root canal spacefollowed by closure of the access cavity(with temporary filling material) of theextracted mandibular 2nd molar mountedon wax blocks.

1 110. Retrieval of gutta percha cones from theroot canal of maxillary central incisorsfollowed by cleaning and shaping andirrigation of the root canal. 2 211. Preparation of post space in the maxillarycentral incisors after removal of guttapercha from the coronal and middle onethirds. 2 2I. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others13 - 13 -

II. Additional learning hours expected for students – 20/ SemesterIII. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning


Method of Assessmenta. Knowledge Recognize the Explanation Continuous assessments



variouspathologiesrelated to thepulp and therelated micro-organismsinvolved.Recognize thevariousmethods ofPatienteducation andmotivation inthe preventionand treatmentof the pulpdiseases.Recognize thevariousindications,advantages,techniques, andlimitations ofroot canaltreatment.

utilising Microsoftpower pointincluding picturesExplanations bydrawing pictures.Interactions withthe students toexplain theconcepts taught todevelop selfinterest andcompetitionamong the fellowstudents.Preclinicalpractical sessionon mountedextracted teethpreceded byhands ondemonstration.

and discussions whichincudes Quizzes &Midtermexamination(T/P),Clinical requirements &Final examination(T/P)

b. Cognitive Students willdevelop goodconcentration onthe topics whichwill result ingoodconcentration,perception andmemory all ofwhich leading tounderstanding,recollection,reproduction ofthe taughtconcepts (boththeoretical andpractical) at anygiven time.

Explanationutilising Microsoftpower pointExplanatorydrawing to clarifythe taught partsGuiding studentsfollowing up thework at regulartime intervalsPracticaldemonstrations ofwhat have beentaughttheoretically

Continuous assessmentin the form of Quizzes &Midterm examination,Clinical requirementsandFinal examination-Theory/Practical


The studentsare encouragedto have anattitude forcommitment toThe students arealwaysencouraged to thebest andassignments are

Assignments ontheoretical aspects thatis delivered at arequired time



succeed in thefield, work wellwith the fellowstudents andmaintain goodrelationshipwith staffmembers, withresponsibilitytowardsfinishing allassignments ontime.

given deadlines tobe submitted.practicalrequirement areset at a definitenumber.Team work isencouraged byallowing thestudents to makepresentations in agroup.

Assessment by the staffmembers on theirbehaviour andattendanceIssuing deadlines on agiven assignment


Know the basicsofcommunicationand informationtechnology,utilise theseskills the bestway possible intheirassignment

The students areguided to carryout web basedsearch andencouraged tocollect material ofrelevancepertaining tooperativedentistry andactively involvedin circulating theelectronicallycollected materialwith the fellowcolleagues andstaff members.

Evaluate their methodof collection ofe-based facts &Assessment of themethod and duration oftime involving the same.


Use theinstrumentsrequired toperform cavitypreparationboth coronal aswell asradicular.able to handleengine drivenrotaryinstrumentationin a proper andsafe wayProper use ofthe materialsused for

LivedemonstrationsCriticalevaluation of thework done inconstructivemannerAdjuncts in theform of lecturesor illustrativediagrams,Lab sessions onartificial teeth.

The students will havecontinuous assessmenton the practical work(accuracy and control inuse of hand and rotaryinstruments as well asproper handling ofobturating materials)and the students areexpected to fulfil therequirements set.



obturation.

IV. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semesterAssessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 5%MCQ’s II 5%Requirements 10%Midterm 20%Summative Assessment 60% Practical Exams 20%Oral Exam 10%Written Exams 30%

D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Endodontics: Principles and Practice by Mahmoud Torabinejad DMD MSD PhD andRichard E. Walton. 2008.2. Ingle's Endodontics 6/e by John I. Ingle, Leif K. Bakland, J. Craig, and Ph.D. Baumgartner.2007.3. Problem Solving in Endodontics: Prevention, Identification, and Management by JamesL. Gutmann, Thom Dumsha, and Paul Lovdahl. 2005.4. PDQ Endodontics, 2nd edition by John Ide Ingle. 2009.5. Clinical Endodontics: A Textbook by Leif Tronstad. 2008.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation


G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaire



b. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.


Course Specifications | 8th Semester | Periodontics II | Page - 209

PERIODONTICS II1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Periodontics II, 432 PDSb. Credit hours 4c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Dr. Ebtessam ELZefzafDr. Mohammad SabirDr. Sameena SultanaDr. Reda Sabere. Year/Semester at which course offered 4th Year | 8th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 431 PDSg. Co-requisites for the courseh. Location if not main campus Shwajrah

B. ObjectivesUpon completion of this course, students will be able to recognize, analyze and applyinformation presented relevant to the:1. Impact of periodontal inflammation on systemic health.2. Periodontal clinical and radiographic examinations, risk assessments, prognosis andtreatment planning.3. Principals of non-surgical periodontal therapy.4. Clinical recognition and clinical management of periodontal emergencies.5. Periodontal treatment for older and female patient and aggressive forms ofperiodontitis.6. Principals of clinical case presentation, patient education, motivation and oralhygiene products.C. Course descriptionPeriodontology II is a didactic course for eight semester dental students. Eight semesterclinical experience will be enhanced by student’s knowledge that has been gainedthrough their basic science courses as well as their pre-clinical didactic and laboratorycourses. This course will provide preventive and therapeutic clinical proceduresassociated with the diagnosis, prognosis, and treatment planning. Initial phase ofperiodontal therapy will be discussed. This course will discuss periodontal radiographs,periodontal treatment plan and its rationale with emphasis on patient education,motivation and treatment of periodontal emergencies.



I. Topics to be coveredTopics No. of Weeks Contact hours

Periodontal Pathology-Periodontal Diseases – part I Periodontal Pathology-Periodontal Diseases: Part II 2 2 Clinical diagnosis Advance diagnostic techniques 2 2 Radiographic aids in diagnosis of periodontal diseases 1 1 Risk assessment and prognosis Clinical significance in periodontal diseases 2 2 Periodontal treatment plan and rationale of treatment 1 1 Non-surgical periodontal therapy 1 1 Patient education and motivation 1 1 Oral hygiene aids and agents 1 1 Periodontal emergencies 1 1

Total 12 12

TOPICS : PRACTICAL Periodontal assessment Record keeping Treatment planning Ultrasonic instrumentation on typodont Application of desensitizing agents Establishment and maintenance of a healthy dentalpatient Scaling and polishing

13 39

Total 13 39

COURSE COMPONENTLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Clinical12 -- 13II. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning


Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Integratetheoreticalknowledge relatedto Periodontics intoclinical practice.

Each lecture willelaborate onseveral importantpoints associatedwith assignedreadings. Thepurposes of thelectures are to

1-Multiple choicequestions (MCQ)based on materialsfrom the lecturesand assignedreadings from thetext book.



increase theunderstanding andto complement theassigned readings.The lectures are nota replacement ofthe assignedreadings and otherresources.

2-Short answer typequestions3-True/False typequestions4-Patient’s clinicalexamination andtreatment planning5-Viva voceb. Cognitive 1-Demonstrateability to use self-knowledge anddecision onworking withcolleagues, patients,and teacher.2-Develop a dentist-patient relationshipwith patients.3-Demonstrateknowledgeable skillperformance incarrying outspecific periodontalclinical procedures.

1-Lectures,periodontal examand clinical practiceon models,treatment planningon partner,2-Small groupactivity rotation(Prophylaxis-student pair switch,Communicationwith Patients andRadiology). It willalso include a clinicorientation,radiologyorientation, and alocal anaesthesialaboratory.3-Seminars toinsure theappropriateapplication ofdifferent clinicalconcepts.4-Case study todevelop rationalesfor periodontalassessments,diagnosis, andtreatment planning.5-Clinical practiceon patients.

1-Student need tocomplete theassigned clinicalexperiences.2-Select, obtain andinterpret patientdata, informationand radiographs tobe able to use thesefindings toaccurately assessand treat patients.3-Formulate acomprehensivediagnosis andtreatment/referralplan for themanagement ofpatients.4-Prevent asses andmanage of medicaland dentalemergencies.5-Prevent, identifyand manageperiodontaldisorders.


1-Developawareness intoone’s own attitudetowardsperiodontal1-Video taping ofactual student’sinteractions ingroups or one-to-one student patient

1-Oral semi-structure interview(to demonstrate theability ofcommunication



diseases2-Value one’s ownmental healthpractices as aprofessionalgeneral dentalpractitioner.

interaction (or roleplays) to teachdynamics ofinteraction.2- Directinteraction withpatients (real-lifesimulation) toapply and critiqueinterpersonal skills.

with patients)2- Seminar (topresent projectoutcome as ademonstration ofability to applyinterviewing andinterpersonaltherapeuticcommunicationskills betweenstudents andpatients.d. CommunicationInformationTechnology &Numerical skills

Use of web basedmaterial related toPeriodontology. Group tutorial tofacilitate selection& utilization ofappropriate webbased periodontalmaterial.Assignments (topresent recentdifferent topicrelated toperiodontaltherapy.e. Psychomotor skills 1. Hand-eye co-ordination (to aid inproper harmlessand uneventfultreatment to thepatient and also thesupporting staff)

a) Skillful scalingprocedures onpatientsb) Improvingtactile sensationwhile probingsubgingival areasc) Probing andhandling hard andsoft tissuesd) Administer localanesthesiainjections withminimal pain anddiscomfort


2. Manual dexterity a) Carrying outscaling procedureswith skill anddexterityb) Appropriate andeffective selectionof armamentariumfor clinicalproceduresc) Ability to beambidextrous asand when requiredd) Develop highlevels of tactilesensations for finer



clinical procedures3.High visual acuity a) Developing highlevel of imaginationin relation to threedimensions to thinkandoperate in differentclinical conditionsb) Ability to carryout differentclinical proceduresusing indirectvision (mirrorimages)III. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester



Quiz Viva voce 10%


Quiz Viva voce 30%

10%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Carranza’s Clinical Periodontology: Newman, Takei, Klokkevold and Carranza, 10thedition, W. B. Saunders Co., 20062. Manual of Clinical Periodontics: A Reference Manual for Diagnosis & Treatment(Lexi-Comp's Dental Reference Library) by Francis G. Serio and Charles E., Ph.D.Hawley. 2009. Neild-Gehrig, Jill S.3. Fundamentals of Periodontal Instrumentation and Advanced Root Instrumentation,6th ed. Lippincott, Williams and Wilkins, 20074. Practical Periodontal Plastic Surgery by Serge Dibart and MamdouhKarima. 2006.



5. Periodontics by Barry M. Eley BDS FDSRCS PhD, Mena Soory FDSRCS PhD FHEA, andJ. D. Manson. 2009.6. Practical Advanced Periodontal Surgery by Serge Dibart. 2007.7. Periodontics & Restorative Maintenance: A Clinical Atlas by Naoshi Sato. 2009.8. Comprehensive Periodontics for the Dental Hygienist (3rd Edition) by Mea A.Weinberg, Cheryl Westphal, Stuart J. Froum, and Milton Palat. 2009.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation


G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college



Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review:




Course Specifications | 8th Semester | Preclinical Pedodontics | Page - 216

PRECLINICAL PEDODONTICS1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationCourse title and code Preclinical Pedodontics,433 PDSCredit hours 2 (1+1)Program in which course offered BDSName of faculty member responsible for course DR. GUNA SEKHAR MADIRAJUDR. ARUN RATHNAMDR. NIDHI MADANYear/Semester at which course offered 4th Year | 8th SemesterPre-requisites for the course 421 RDSCo-requisites for the course -Location if not main campus Al-Sawajrah campus

B. Objectives:By the end of the course the students should: Have knowledge of normal development and chronology of primary and permanentdentition. Be able to identify primary/permanent teeth and the differences between them. Have knowledge on dental caries and various pulpal diseases and their diagnosis inchildren. List materials suitable for the restoration of primary and young permanent teeth. Be able to perform simple restorations including ART in primary and permanent teeth. Have knowledge of basic Pediatric endodontic & preventive procedures in children. Have knowledge of the use of stainless steel crowns in primary teeth. Have knowledge of the indications and fabrication of space maintainers followingpremature loss of a primary tooth. Have knowledge of oral habits in children and fabrication of removable habit breakingappliances.C. Course descriptionThe preclinical Pedodontics course is the first course in Pedodontics taken in the 4thyear/ 8th semester. This course provides an outline of the Pedodontics and serves as abasis for preparing the students for the clinical Pedodontics in the forthcoming years. Ithas a Theory and a Practical component. The theory component has 1 credit hour perweek and provides knowledge on the aims and scope of Pedodontics; development &chronology of eruption of primary/permanent dentition; differences between



primary/permanent dentition and their clinical significance; dental caries (ECC) and itsdiagnosis/management in children; pulpal diseases in children with a special note onPediatric dental pharmacology; various basic restorative & preventivematerials/procedures used in children. The practical component includes sessions onidentification of primary/permanent teeth; manipulation of various restorativematerials used in Pedodontics; basic techniques in Pediatric operative dentistry likesimple cavity preparations on artificial primary teeth (Typhodont teeth simulatingnatural teeth) will be taught; basic endodontic procedures including caries excavationand ART; preventive procedures like application of topical fluorides and fissuresealants; tooth preparation and use of stainless steel crowns on artificial teeth;fabrication of removable space maintainers and habit breaking appliances will be taughton study models.I. Topics to be covered (Theory)

Topics No. of Weeks Contact hoursIntroduction , Aim, Scope of Pedodontics 1 1Development/Chronology of Primary & Permanent teetheruption 1 1Differences between primary & permanent teeth 1 1Dental caries in children 1 1Restorative materials in Pedodontics 1 1Restorative procedures in Pedodontics 1 1Pulpal diseases in children 1 1Basic endodontic procedures in children 1 1Pediatric dental pharmacology 1 1Fluorides in dentistry 2 2Stainless steel crowns in Pedodontics 1 1Removable appliances in Pedodontics 1 1TOTAL 13 13

Schedule for Practical sessions:

I. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of WeeksIntroduction to Pre-Clinical Pedodontics



Identification of Primary teeth 1Identification of Permanent teeth 1Differences between primary & permanent teethManipulation of dental materials 1Basic restorative procedures in Pedodontics (Typhodont teeth set) 3Basic endodontic procedures in children (caries excavation; Access cavitypreparation) 2Topical fluoride application 1Stainless steel crowns – Tooth preparation/adaptation/cementation 2Removable space maintainers/habit breaking appliances 2TOTAL 13

I. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical (Credit hours) Others13 - 13 -II. Addition learning hours expected for students– 20/Semester

III. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of LearningSkills Description Teaching

strategiesMethod of

AssessmentKnowledge Understand aims/scope ofPedodontics.Chronology & Differencesbetween Primary &Permanent teeth.Various Restorativematerials/techniques used inPedodontics.Importance of Preventiveprocedures and pulp therapyin children.

Lectures (Blackboard, A-V aids)Discussions withstudentsDemonstrations,audio-visual aids &study modelsPre-clinicalpractical sessionsunder regularsupervision by staff

2 MCQ quiz examsMid-term MCQexamFinal theory examFinal practicalexamSpotters



Cognitive Identification & Differencesbetween Primary &Permanent teeth.Selection of appropriaterestorativematerial/technique.Lectures.Discussions withstudents.Demonstrations -audio-visual aids &study modelsPre-clinicalpractical sessionsunder regularsupervision by staff.

2 MCQ quiz examsMid-term MCQexamFinal theory examFinal practicalexamContinuousevaluation duringthe course.Interpersonalskills &Responsibilities

Should follow properprotocol for regularattendance.Demonstrate ethicalrelationship with staff.Should develop goodworking relations with hisprofessional colleagues.Should wear a neat lab coatwith name tag.Ensure proper handling ofmaterials/equipment.

Pre-clinicalpractical sessionsunder regularsupervision by staff.Continuousevaluation duringthe course.

Communication,InformationTechnology &Numerical skills

Enhance good staff-studentcommunication.Use of library & web basedinformation to improveknowledge related toPedodontics.List of web sitesprovidingknowledge onPedodontics.Registration ofonline journals

Continuous clinicalevaluation/monitoring by thestaff.Interactivesessions withstudents.Psychomotorskills

Should develop skills forperformingrestorative/endodontic/preventive procedures, bothunder direct and indirectvision.Develop skills for fabricatingremovable appliancesrelated to Pedodontics.

Audio-visualdemonstration ofdifferent clinicaltechniquesAssignments givenwith a specific timelimitExclusive trainingon clinicalproceduresQuota requirementsfor pre-clinicalwork to improveclinical efficiency

Step-by-stepevaluation of eachprocedure byconcerned staffEvaluation ofassignmentsPractical & Oralexams



IV. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semesterAssessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 50% MCQ’s I 10%MCQ’s II 10%Midterm 20%Continuous clinical evaluation 10%

Summative Assessment 50% Practical ExamsSpotters 20%10%Written Exams 20%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:

DR. GUNA SHEKHAR MADIRAJUDR. ARUN RATHNAMDR. NIDHI MADANConsultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/week

E. Learning resources:

Essential Text books:1. Dentistry for the Child and Adolescent by Ralph E. McDonald DDS MS, David R. AveryDDS MSD, and Jeffrey A. Dean. 2004.2. Fundamentals of Pediatric Dentistry by Mathewson JR, Robert E Primosch. QuintPub Co. 19953. Pediatric Dentistry: Infancy through Adolescence by Pinkham JR, 3rd Edition, 1993.Referral Text books:1. A Manual of Pediatric Dentistry by Andlaw R.J, Rock W.P; Churchill Livingstone,2000.2. Handbook of Pediatric Dentistry by Angus C. Cameron and Richard P. Widmer. 2008.3. Pediatric Dentistry by Richard.R.Welbury. Oxford University Press4. Pedodontics: A clinical approach by Goran Koch, Mosby Co. 1994.Periodicals/Journals:1. International Journal of Pediatric Dentistry2. Journal of Clinical Pediatric Dentistry3. Journal of Dentistry for Children4. Journal of American Academy of Pediatric Dentistry5. Journal of Indian Society of Pedodontics & Preventive Dentistry



Miscellaneous:1. Pedodontics with Interactive DVD-ROM by Marwah. 2008.2. Mini Atlas of Pedodontics (Anshan Gold Standard Mini Atlas Series) by NikhilMarwah and Vijaya Prabha K. 2007.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation


G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor / Department: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:

Review:



9TH SEMESTER

FIFTH YEAR

NINTH SEMESTER

CODE COURSE TITLE TH PR CRH COH P-REQ

511 MDS Oral Medicine & DiagnosticScience III

1 3 2 4 413 MDS512 MDS Clinical Oral &Maxillofacial Surgery II

1 3 2 4 414 MDS521 RDS Operative Dentistry III 1 3 2 4 422 RDS523 RDS Clinical Endodontics I 1 3 2 4 424 RDS531 PDS Periodontics III 1 3 2 4 432 PDS533 PDS Pedodontics I 1 3 2 4 433 PDS541 SDS Clinical RemovableProsthodontics III

1 3 2 4 442 SDS543 SDS Clinical FixedProsthodontics I

1 6 3 7 444 SDSTOTAL 8 8 27 17 35


Course Specifications | 9th Semester | Oral Medicine & Diagnostic Science III | Page - 224

ORAL MEDICINE & DIAGNOSTIC SCIENCE IIIInstitution Jazan UniversityCollege College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Oral Medicine & DiagnosticSciences III, 511 MDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Prof. Ebtessam ElzefzafDr. Reda SabraDr.Sameena ParveenDr. Tenny Johne. Year/Semester at which course offered 5th Year | 9thSemesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 413 MDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus -

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should be able to: Be able to outline and manage patients with oral diseases related to different bleedingand clotting disorders, or hematologic diseases. Be able to identify the need to referral to specialist in situations demanding the same. Have thorough knowledge of the newly developed diagnostic techniques. Be knowledgeable about patho-physiology, differential diagnosis, and treatment plan ofdifferent lesions of the oral cavity. Be knowledgeable about patho-physiology, differential diagnosis, and treatment plan ofdifferent oral swellings, tumours and other lesions of the oral cavity.C. Course descriptionThis course will be offered through theory and practical sessions. The topics will cover,the newly developed methods of diagnosis, how to differentiate between differentcauses of pain, oral and dental management of patients with medical conditions. Theclinical sessions will be in support to the lectures taken on the topic, the course will betaken in the ninth semester and have2 credit hours.



I- Topics to be covered

Topic No of weeks Practicalhours

ContacthoursBleeding and clotting disorders 2 3 6Hematologic diseases 2 3 6Peripheral exophytic lesions 1 3 6Deferential diagnosis of cysts 1 3 6Dental management of medically compromisedpatients 2 3 6Advanced diagnostic techniques 1 3 6Oral manifestations of systemic diseases. 1 3 6Halitosis 1 3 6D.D of dental and non-dental pain 2 3 6Total 13 39 78

Date

I I- Course Component

Lectures TutorialsPractical/Fieldwork/Internship Others

one hour/weekOnehour/week

Three hours/week -

1stweek

Bleeding andclotting disorders:PathophysiologyClinical andlaboratoryfindingsGeneralclassificationVessel walldisorderPlatelets disorders

Illustratecolour atlas oforal medicinecases regardingbleeding andclottingdisordersExamination anddiagnosis of patientswith oral diseases

Burket's OralMedicine 11/e byGreenberg, MartinGreenberg, MichaelGlick, and JonathanA. Ship. 2008.Ch.17.page411.

2ndweekBleeding andclotting disordersCoagulationdisorder:CongenitalcoagulopathiesAnti coagulantrelatedcoagulopathiesDiseases related

Illustratecolour atlas oforal medicinecases regardingbleeding andclottingdisordersDentalmanagement of

Examination of patientswith oral diseases.Laboratory tests toreach to the correctdiagnosis

Burket's OralMedicine 11/e byGreenberg, MartinGreenberg, MichaelGlick, and JonathanA Ship. 2008.Ch.17.page411.



coagulopathies patients withbleeding andclottingdisorders

3rdweek

Hematologicdiseases :Red blood celldisordersErythrocytosisPolycythemiaverraAnemiahemoglbinopathies

Illustratecolour atlas oforal medicinecasesregardingHematologicdiseases∙ Examination ofpatients with oraldiseases

Burket's OralMedicine 11/e byGreenberg, MartinGreenberg, MichaelGlick, and JonathanA Ship. 2008.Ch.16.page385.

4thweek

Hematologicdiseases :White blood celldisordersQuantitativeleukocytedisordersQualitativeleukocytedisordersLeukaemiaLymphomaMultiple myeloma

Illustratecolour atlas oforal medicinecases regardingoral andmaxillofacialcystsIllustratecolour atlas oforal medicinecases regardingHematologicdiseases

Examination of patientswith oral diseasesBurket's OralMedicine 11/e byGreenberg, MartinGreenberg, MichaelGlick, and JonathanA Ship. 2008.Ch.16.page385.

5thweek Tumers of oralcavity:Benign tumers ∙ Illustratecolour atlas oforal medicinecases Examination of patientswith oral diseasesBurket's OralMedicine 11/e byGreenberg, MartinGreenberg, MichaelGlick, and JonathanA Ship. 2008

6thweek Malignant tumersof oral cavityDifferentiationbetweenbenign andmalignanttumersIllustratecolour atlas oforal medicinecases

Examination of patientswith oral diseasesBurket's OralMedicine 11/e byGreenberg, MartinGreenberg, MichaelGlick, and JonathanA Ship. 2008

7thweek Dentalmanagement of ∙ Illustratecolour atlas of Examination of patientswith oral diseases Carranza’s ClinicalPeriodontology:



medicallycompromisedpatients oral medicinecases regardingoral lesionassociated withsystemicdiseasesNewman, Takei,Klokkevold andCarranza, 10thedition, W. B.Saunders Co., 2006.

8thweekDentalmanagement ofmedicallycompromisedpatients

∙ Illustratecolour atlas oforal medicinecases regardingoral lesionassociated withsystemicdiseasesExamination of patientswith oral diseases

Carranza’s ClinicalPeriodontology:Newman, Takei,Klokkevold andCarranza, 10thedition, W. B.Saunders Co., 2006.9thweek Advanceddiagnostictechniques

Practice theadvanceddiagnostictechniques Examination of patientswith oral diseasesCarranza’s ClinicalPeriodontology:Newman, Takei,Klokkevold andCarranza, 10thedition, W. B.Saunders Co., 2006.

10thweek Describe oralmanifestations ofsystemic diseases.∙ Illustratecolour atlas oforal medicinecases regardingoralmanifestationsof systemicdiseases.


11thweek Halitosis∙ Illustratecolour atlas oforal medicinecases regardingoralpresentationsof Diabetesmellitus


12thweek D.D of dental andnon dental pain∙ Illustratecolour atlas oforal medicinecases regardingendocrinaldisorders

Examination of patientswith oral diseasesOral andMaxillofacial Medicine:The Basis ofDiagnosisandTreatmentby Crispian




strategiesMethod of

Assessmenta- Knowledge Integratetheoreticalknowledge relatedto oral medicineand diagnosticscience into clinicalpractice.

Each lecture willelaborate onseveral ofimportant pointsassociated withassigned readings.The purposes of thelectures are toincrease theunderstanding andto complement theassigned readings.The lectures are nota replacement ofthe assignedreadings and other

1-Multiple choicequestions (MCQ)based on materialsfrom the lecturesand assignedreadings from thetext book.2-Short answertype questions3-True/False typequestions4-Patient’s clinicalexamination andtreatment planning

Scully.2008.

13thweek D.D of dental andnon dental pain∙ Illustratecolour atlas oforal medicinecases regardingendocrinaldisorders

Examination of patientswith oral diseases

Oral andMaxillofacial Medicine:The Basis ofDiagnosisandTreatmentby CrispianScully.2008.

I I I- Assessment schedule and weightingProportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 10%MCQ’s II 10%Mid term 20%

Final term exam 60% Written 30%practical 20%Oral exams 10%



resources. 5-oral examb- Cognitive 1-Demonstrateability to use selfknowledge anddecision onworking withcolleagues, patients,and teacher.2-Develop a dentist-patient relationshipwith patients.3-Demonstrateknowledgeable skillperformance incarrying out oralmedicine anddiagnostic scienceclinical procedures.

1-Lectures, oralmedicine anddiagnostic scienceexam and clinicalpractice onpatients, treatmentplanning onpartner,2-Small groupactivity rotation(Prophylaxis-student pair switch,Communicationwith Patients).3-Seminars toinsure theappropriateapplication ofdifferent clinicalconcepts.4-Case study todevelop rationalesfor oral diseasesassessments,diagnosis, andtreatment planning.5-Clinical practiceon patients.

1-Student need tocomplete theassigned clinicalexperiences.3-Select, obtain andinterpret patientdata, informationand radiographs tobe able to use thesefindings toaccurately diagnoseand treat patients.3-Formulate acomprehensivediagnosis andtreatment/referralplan for themanagement ofpatients.4-Prevent, assesand manage ofmedical and dentalemergencies.5- Diagnose andmanage oraldiseases.c- Interpersonal &

Responsibilities1-Developawareness intoone’s own attitudetowards oraldiseses.2-Value one’s ownmental healthpractices as aprofessionalgeneral dentalpractitioner.

1-Video taping ofactual student’sinteractions ingroups or one-to-one student patientinteraction (or roleplays) to teachdynamics ofinteraction.2- Directinteraction withpatients (real-lifesimulation) toapply and critiqueinterpersonal skills.

1-Atlas for oraldiseases interview(to demonstrate theability ofdifferentialdiagnosis of oraldiseases inpatients)2- Seminar (topresent projectoutcome as ademonstration ofability to applyinterviewing andinterpersonaltherapeuticcommunicationskills between



students andpatients.d- Communication


Use of web basedmaterial related tooral medicine anddiagnostic science.Group tutorial tofacilitate selection& utilization ofappropriate webbased oralmedicine anddiagnostic science.

Assignments (topresent recentdifferent topicrelated to thetreatment of oraldiseasese- Psychomotor skills

Learning resourcesEssential textbooks:1. Burket's Oral Medicine 11/e by Greenberg, Martin Greenberg, Michael Glick, andJonathan A. Ship. 2008.2. Oral and Maxillofacial Medicine: The Basis of Diagnosis and Treatment by CrispianScully. 2008.3. A guide to common oral lesions Dr. Charles. Dunlap and Dr. Bruce. F, Barker Departmentof Oral Maxillofacial pathology. UMCK School of dentistry.Recommended books:1- Pockets Atlas of Oral Diseases, 2nd ed. edition Laskaris G. Thieme Inc., 2006.2- Oral Medicine Secrets by Stephen T. Sonis, Leslie Shu-Tung Fang, and Robert C. Fazio.2002.3- Oral Diagnosis, Oral Medicine and treatment planing by Bricker S., Langlais R & Miller C.Lea & Febiger 1994.4. Tyldesley's Oral Medicine, Anne; Longman, Lesley 5th Edition Copyright Â©2003Oxford University Press > Front of Book >.Periodical, web sites, etc:

1- Oral Diseases http://www.blackwell-syngergy.com/loi/odi2- Journals of Oral Pathology & Medicine http//www.blackwell- syngergy.com/loi/jop3- Oral diagnosis: The Clinician Guide by birnbaum W & Dunne S. Butterworth-Heinemam:1st edition.Other facilities required for teaching and learning to achieve the above ILOsOther facilities:a. Digital camera for documentation of clinical cases. a-Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Labs for 40-60 students



b. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors Oral medicine conference room

Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:

Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields.



Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.



Course Specifications | 9th Semester | Clinical Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery II | Page - 233

CLINICAL ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY II1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Clinical Oral & MaxillofacialSurgery II512 MDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Ashwin. J.e. Year/Semester at which course offered 5th Year | 9th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 414MDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Shawajara Campus

B. ObjectivesAt the end of the course the students should: Be able to assess patients for minor surgical procedures, properly take physicalexaminations, advice investigations and plan treatment under the supervision of staff. Should be able to perform minor oral surgical procedures such as diagnosis andtreatment plan of impaction, and manage complications of impactions under thesupervision of staff. Should be able to perform minor oral surgical procedures, diagnosis for pre-prostheticsurgeries, and manage complications under the supervision of staff. Should be able to perform minor oral surgical procedures such as diagnosis forendodontic surgeries, and manage complications under the supervision of staff. Should be able to perform minor oral surgical procedures for incision and drainage fororo-facial neck infections and manage complications under the supervision of staff. Should be able to perform minor oral surgical procedures for cyst and tumours, andmanage complications under the supervision of staff.C. Course descriptionThis will be a clinical course in oral surgery that is designed to get the dentalStudents trained to carry out more complicated minor oral surgical procedures under localanaesthesia.This course will be taught in oral surgery course in 5th Year | 9th Semester. The course isintended to cover one main topic that is minor oral surgical procedures. Topics on minor oralsurgical procedures will include how to assess diagnosis and treatment plan of impaction, pre-



prosthetic surgeries, endodontic surgeries, incision and drainage for oro-facial neck infectionsincluding osteomyelitis, osteoradionecrosis, marsupialisation and enucleation for cyst andtumours. In the clinics the student will learn to perform surgical removal of impacted teeth,uncomplicated pre-prosthetic surgeries, biopsy of soft tissues, management of infections ofdental origin, management of impacted teeth which include flap design and suturing techniquesunder faculty supervision. Students will also be introduced to hospital rules and protocol, whichinclude medical records, doctor’s orders, progress notes, laboratory and radiographical results,graphics, operation notes and discharge summary.I. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of Weeks Contact hours1. Impaction 1 42. Pre-prosthetic surgery I 1 43. Pre-prosthetic surgery II 1 44. Oro-facial neck infections I 1 45. Oro-facial neck infections II 1 46. Oro-facial neck infections III 1 47. Endodontic surgeries 1 48. Cyst and tumours I 1 49. Cyst and tumours II 1 410. Cyst and tumours III 1 411. Medico legal considerations and ethics 1 4II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others

11 11



Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Manage simpleimpacted tooth,pre-prostheticsurgeries ,endodonticsurgeries

Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervision

Continuous clinicalevaluation by staff.2 MCQ quiz examsMid-term MCQexamFinal theory examFinal clinical exam



by staff.Case presentationsby students.Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Case presentationsby students.

Orals/viva-voce

b. Cognitive Identify patients forsimple impactedtooth, pre-prosthetic surgeries, endodonticsurgeriesLectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Case presentationsby students.





d. CommunicationInformationTechnology &

Students will betaught to regularlyupdate their List of web sitesprovidingknowledge on Oral Continuous clinicalevaluation/monitoring by the



Numerical skills knowledge on Oralsurgery byincreased use ofinternet/web basedinformationSurgery.Registration ofonline journals staff.Interactive sessionswith students

e. Psychomotor skills Should developskills foridentifying andmanaging minororal surgicalprocedures patientsExclusive trainingon clinicalprocedures Step-by-stepevaluation of eachprocedure by theconcerned staff.Practical & Oralexams


D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2hrs|week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Textbook of General and Oral Surgery by Wray, Lee, Clark, and Stenhouse (2003).2. Contemporary Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery By Peterson, Ellis, Hupp, Tuc3. Principles of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery by U. J. Moore. 20014. An Introduction to Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery (Oxford Medical Publications) byDavid A. Mitchell. 2006.5. Contemporary Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery by James R. Hupp, Edward Ellis III, andMyron R. Tucker. 2008.6. Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Secrets by A. Omar Abubaker DMD PhD and Kenneth J.Benson. 2007.7. Clinical Review of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery by Shahrokh C. Bagheri DMD MD andChris Jo. 2007.8. Manual of Minor Oral Surgery for the General Dentist by Karl R. Koerner. 2006.9. Textbook of Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery – Neelima Anil Malik- 2nd edition



F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Clinics with 40 dental chairs Recovery Room Minor Operation Theatre with 10 dental chairs Scrub Area Sterilisation Room Changing room with lockers for staff and studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors Computer systems

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaire Vivab. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement:



Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:




Course Specifications | 9th Semester | Operative Dentistry III | Page - 239

OPERATIVE DENTISTRY III1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Operative Dentistry III521 RDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Dr Syed Nahid Basheere. Year/Semester at which course offered 5th Year | 9thSemesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 422 RDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus shawajrah

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Know the recent advances in glass ionomer restorations Be able to perform class IV and class VI composite restoration Know the various causes of hypersensitivity and how to manage the same Be able to manage the Deep Caries Lesions Understand the concept of minimal intervention dentistry Know how to manage the badly broken toothC. Course descriptionThis course is provided by the Restorative department during the first semester of thefifth year. The course consists of two parts, theory and clinics, in which the formerincludes lectures and seminar presentations and the later includes the application of thetheory knowledge gained in the theoretical sessionsThe course is given as one lecture and one lab sessions per week for the whole semesterand will have 2 credit hours and four contact hours.In this course the students will be trained to restore the teeth with advanced restorativematerials like resin modified glass ionomer cement, prepare cavities in fracturedanterior teeth and restore the form, function & esthetics with composite resin material,manage hypersensitive teeth, manage Deep Caries Lesions and badly broken teeth.



I. II. Topics to be coveredTopics No. of

credithours

Contacthours1 Recent advances in glass ionomer restorations 1 12 Class IV & V composite cavity preparation & restoration 2 23 Hypersensitivity 2 24 Management of Deep Carious Lesions 2 25 Minimal Invasive Operative Care 2 26 Pin retained Amalgam Restoration 2 17 Bonded amalgam restoration 2 1

SINUM

Clinics

1 Simple Amalgam restorations2 Compound Amalgam restorations3 modified glass ionomer restorations4 Complex amalgam restorations5 Modified composite restorations6 Composite, Glass ionomer combined restorationsI. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical Others13 --- 14 ---

II. Addition learning hours expected for students– 20/SemesterIII. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning


Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Utilise theperceivedadvantages of Explanationutilising Microsoftpower point Continuousassessments anddiscussions which



Recent advances inglass ionomerrestoarationsPerform cavitypreparations forcompositerestorations onpatientsControlhypersensitivityManage deepcarious lesionsUtilize minimalinterventiondentistry conceptsas and whenrequired in patientsPerform complexamalgamrestorations

including picturesExplanations bydrawing picturesInteractions withthe students toexplain theconcepts taught todevelop selfinterest andcompetition amongthe fellow studentsCompletesupervision andinstruction on eachclinical case

incudes Quizzes &Midtermexamination(T/P) &Finalexamination(T/P)

b. Cognitive Students willdevelop goodconcentration onthe topics whichwill result in goodconcentration,perception andneverthelessmemory all ofwhich leading tounderstanding ,recollection,reproduction of thetaught concepts(both theoreticaland practical ) atany given time.




The students areencouraged to havean attitude forcommitment toThe student arealways encouragedto the best infriendly way, and

Assesment ofclinical cases andtheir completionand follow up at a



succeed in the field,work well with thefellow students andmaintain goodrelationship withstaffmembers/patients,with responsibilitytowards finishingall cases on time.

cases are given andcompletedaccordingly. Clinicalrequirement are setat a definitenumbergiven period of timeAssignments ontheoretical aspectsthat is delivered at arequired timeAssesment by thestaff members onthe studentsbehaviour / rapportwith the patientsand attendanceIssuing deadlineson a givenassignment/clinicalcases requiredd. Communication


Know the basics ofcommunication andinformationtechnology, utilisethese skills the bestway possible intheir assignmentsability to utiliseelectronic library-e,journals.

The students areguided to carry outweb based searchand encouraged tocollect material ofrelevancepertaining tooperative dentistryand actively involvein circulating theelectronicallycollected materialwith the fellowcolleagues and staffmembers.


e. Psychomotor skills Use the tefloncoated instrumentsto manipulate ,finish & polishcompositerestorations.Able to provide thetreatment details topatient /build upgood dentist-patient relationshipand provide thetreatment best way

ClinicaldemonstrationsCritical evaluationof the clinical workin a constructivemanner.




possible andkeeping thepsychological statusof patients in mind.


H. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weeka- Dr Syed Nahid Basheerb- Dr Abbas Rizvi

D. Learning resources1. Sturdevant's Art and Science of Operative Dentistry (Roberson, Sturdevant's Art andScience of Operative Dentistry) by Theodore Roberson, Harold O. Heymann, and EdwardJ. Swift. 2006.2. Textbook of Operative Dentistry by Sharad Chandra and Sangita Chandra. 2008.3. Principles of Operative Dentistry by A. J. E. Qualtrough, Julian Satterthwaite, LeeanMorrow, and Paul Brunton. 2005.4. Conservative Dentistry Including Endodontics: Questions and Answers by Bansal. 2008.5. Pre-Clinical Conservative Dentistry by Vimal K Sikri. 2009.

E. Facilities requireda. Accommodation




F. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning:



Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.


Course Specifications | 9th Semester | Periodontics III | Page - 246

PERIODONTICS III1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Periodontics III , 531 PDSb. Credit hours 4c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Dr. Ebtesam EL ZefzafDr. Mohammad SabirDr. Sameena SultanaDr. Reda Sabere. Year/Semester at which course offered 5th Year | 9th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 432 PDSg. Co-requisites for the courseh. Location if not main campus Shwajrah

B. Objectives:Upon the completion of this course, students will be able to recognize, analyze and applyinformation presented relevant to the: Be able to diagnose and make treatment plans for common periodontal conditions. Periodontal therapy in older adults Periodontal therapy in female patients Periodontal surgical procedures Periodontal flap surgical procedures Periodontal plastic and esthetic procedures Be able to plan specific surgical approach to certain periodontal conditions. Understand and describe different surgical techniques used in periodontics. Understand the role of systemic and other conditions in the etiology of periodontaldiseases. Understand surgical follow-up and wound healing.C. Course description:The program in fifth year commences in-depth education in periodontics, building onthe conceptual foundations established in the fourth year programs. In fifth year theprincipal objective of the full program in periodontics is to educate and prepare generalpractitioners of dentistry to serve the universal public need of prevention, recognitionand comprehensive diagnosis and treatment of periodontal diseases. The programintegrates didactic, preclinical and clinical elements aiming to achieve detailed under-standing of the pathogenesis, diagnosis, and approaches to therapy for the morecommon types of periodontal conditions. The didactic element centres on periodontalsurgery, fundamentals of clinical decision-making, and treatment of inflammation. Theclinical element centres on the control of inflammatory periodontal conditions by



concentrating on examination, patient motivation, oral hygiene, and scaling and rootplanning skills. The clinical element is concerned with the application of knowledgegained in the didactic study of Periodontics, and it is directly related to the previousmaterial presented in the seventh and eight semester’s clinic. In the ninth semester thestudent will also be able to discuss the rationale behind surgical periodontal proceduresby assisting during surgeries. The knowledge that will be acquired in the surgical coursePeriodontics III will help the student with this endeavour.I. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of Weeks Contact hours Periodontal therapy: Older adults, Female patients Aggressive forms of periodontal diseases 2 2 Introduction to Periodontal Surgery : Part I Introduction to Periodontal Surgery: Part II 2 2 Periodontal Surgery: Gingival Surgical Procedures 1 1 Periodontal Surgery: Periodontal Flap Procedures 1 1 Periodontal Surgery Osseous Resection Reconstruction Procedures 3 3 Periodontal Surgery: Furcation Involvement andManagement 1 1 Periodontal Surgery: Periodontal Plastic and EstheticProcedures – part II Periodontal plastic and esthetic procedures: part II

2 2Total 12 12

TOPIC: PRACTICAL Detailed periodontal case history Determine diagnosis Prognosis of the patient Plan treatment Scaling, root planning, Local drug delivery SPT Re-evaluation after Root Planning Periodontal Recall/Prophylaxis Management of patients with different periodontaldiseases and conditions.

13 39

Total 13 39



II. COURSE COMPONENTLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship12 -- 13


strategiesMethod ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Integratetheoreticalknowledgerelated toPeriodontics intoclinical practice.

Each lecture willelaborate onseveral ofimportant pointsassociated withassigned readings.The purposes ofthe lectures are toincrease theunderstanding andto complement theassigned readings.The lectures arenot a replacementof the assignedreadings and otherresources.

1-Multiple choicequestions (MCQs)based on materialsfrom the lectures andassigned readingsfrom the text book.2-Short answer typequestions3-True/False typequestions4-Patient’s clinicalexamination andtreatment planning5-Viva voceb. Cognitive 1-Demonstrateability to use self-knowledge anddecision onworking withcolleagues,patients, andteacher.2-Develop adentist-patientrelationship withpatients.3-Demonstrateknowledgeableskill performancein carrying outspecificperiodontalclinicalprocedures

1-Lectures,periodontal examand clinicalpractice, treatmentplanning onstudent partnerand patients.2-Small groupactivity rotation(Prophylaxis,Communicationwith Patients andRadiology).3-Seminars toinsure theappropriateapplication ofdifferent clinicalconcepts.4-Case study todevelop rationales

1- Students need tocomplete the assignedclinical experiences.2-Daily Grading3-Clinical Practice(core values, infectioncontrol, recordkeeping)4-Assessment ofperiodontalassessment, diagnosisand treatmentplanning, calculusdetection andinstrumentationtechnique, periodontalre-evaluation/referraland diagnosis andtreatment planning.5-Select, obtain andinterpret patient data,



for periodontalassessments,diagnosis, andtreatmentplanning.information andradiographs to be ableto use these findings toaccurately assess andtreat patients.6-Formulate acomprehensivediagnosis andtreatment/referralplan for themanagement ofpatients.7-Prevent asses andmanage of medical anddental emergencies.c. Interpersonal &

Responsibilities1-Developawareness intoone’s ownattitude towardsperiodontaldiseases2-Value one’sown mentalhealth practicesas a professionalgeneral dentalpractitioner.

1-Video taping ofactual student’sinteractions ingroups or one-to-one student patientinteraction (or roleplays) to teachdynamics ofinteraction.2- Directinteraction withpatients (real-lifesimulation) toapply and critiqueinterpersonalskills.

1-Oral semi-structureinterview (todemonstrate theability ofcommunication withpatients)2- Seminar (to presentproject outcome as ademonstration ofability to applyinterviewing andinterpersonaltherapeuticcommunication skillsbetween students andpatients.d. CommunicationInformationTechnology &Numerical skills

Use of web basedmaterial relatedtoPeriodontology.Group tutorial tofacilitate selection& utilization ofappropriate webbased periodonticmaterial.

Assignments (topresent recentdifferent topic relatedto periodontal therapy.e. Psychomotor skills 1. Hand-eye co-ordination (to aidin properharmless anduneventfultreatment to thepatient and alsothe supportingstaff)

a) skillful scalingprocedures onpatientsb) improvingtactile sensationwhile probingsubgingival areasc) Probing andhandling hard andsoft tissuesd) Administer local

a) Evaluation of thecase/patient by thestaffb) Assessment of workdone by grading.



anesthesiainjections withminimal pain anddiscomfort2. Manualdexterity a) Carrying outscaling procedureswith skill anddexterityb) Appropriate andeffective selectionof armamentariumfor clinicalproceduresc) Ability to beambidextrous asand when requiredd) Develop highlevels of tactilesensations for finerclinical procedures3.High visualacuity a) Developing highlevel of imaginationin relation to threedimensions tothink andoperate in differentclinical conditionsb) Ability to carryout differentclinical proceduresusing indirectvision (mirrorimages)V. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester



Quiz Viva voce 10%


Quiz Viva voce 30%

10%



D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Carranza’s Clinical Periodontology: Newman, Takei, Klokkevold and Carranza, 10thedition, W. B. Saunders Co., 20062. Manual of Clinical Periodontics: A Reference Manual for Diagnosis & Treatment(Lexi-Comp's Dental Reference Library) by Francis G. Serio and Charles E., Ph.D.Hawley. 2009. Neild-Gehrig, Jill S.3. Fundamentals of Periodontal Instrumentation and Advanced Root Instrumentation,6th ed. Lippincott, Williams and Wilkins, 20074. Practical Periodontal Plastic Surgery by Serge Dibart and MamdouhKarima. 2006.5. Periodontics by Barry M. Eley BDS FDSRCS PhD, Mena Soory FDSRCS PhD FHEA, andJ. D. Manson. 2009.6. Practical Advanced Periodontal Surgery by Serge Dibart. 2007.7. Periodontics & Restorative Maintenance: A Clinical Atlas by Naoshi Sato. 2009.8. Comprehensive Periodontics for the Dental Hygienist (3rd Edition) by Mea A.Weinberg, Cheryl Westphal, Stuart J. Froum, and Milton Palat. 2009.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation


G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching.



Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:




Course Specifications | 9th Semester | Clinical Endodontics I | Page - 253

CLINICAL ENDODONTICS I1. Institution: Faculty of Dentistry2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Clinical Endodontics I523 RDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Prof. Hosham Khalifa kamalyDr. Abbas Rizvie. Year/Semester at which course offered 5th Year | 9th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 424 RDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Shawajarah

B. ObjectivesOn completion of the course the students should be able to: Have the knowledge of the various endodontic emergencies and their management. Understand the various traumatic injuries along with their diagnosis, classification andmanagement. Possess the knowledge of the fundamentals of the restoration of endodontically treatedteeth. Plan endodontic surgeries and determine its prognosis. Understand the various tooth discoloration and the techniques for vital and non-vitalbleaching. To perform endodontic procedures on the patient’s anterior teeth in the clinics.C. Course descriptionThe course is given to 5th year (9th semester) students as one lecture and one clinicalsession. The theoretical part covers topics which include endodontic emergencies andtheir management, traumatic injuries, restoration of the endodontically treated teeth,surgical endodontics and tooth discoloration and bleaching. The clinical componentallows the students to take up patients for diagnosis, treatment planning and managingthe cases requiring endodontic therapy in the maxillary and mandibular incisors andcanines. The course is given as one lecture and one clinical session per week, equivalentto 2 credit hours and 4 contact hours.



S.No. TOPICS NO. OF WEEKS CREDIT HOURS1. Endodontic emergencies and treatment 2 22. Traumatic Injuries

Classification Etiology Examination

3 3

Enamel fracture Crown fracture Crown-root fracture Root fracture Luxation Avulsion3. Restoration Of Endodontically TreatedTeeth

Definition Classification Indication Contraindication Fundamentals

3 3

Design principles Custom cast post and core Treatment planning Core materials Preparation for post and core4. Tooth Discoloration And Bleaching

Tooth discoloration 3 3 Vital bleaching Non-vital bleaching

5. Endodontic Surgery

Indications and contraindications General and systemic considerations Classification of endodontic surgical

3 3



procedures Principles of endodontic surgery Surgical drainage Flap designs Flap reflection Flap retraction Periradicular curettage Root end resection and preparation Root end filling Soft tissue repositioning Suturing

IV. CLINICALS No. ofweeks

ContacthoursOrientation to the Endodontics clinic, equipments and itsaccessories, and endodontic instruments.Introduction to Endodontics clinic system, patient - dentistrelationship , patient records and filing system

1 3

Patient preparation , position, assessment and diagnosis 1 3Access cavity preparation in Maxillary Central & LateralIncisors followed by pulp extirpation and thorough irrigationfollowed by Working Length Determination and giving closeddressing.

2 6Cleaning and Shaping of the root canals with step backtechnique along with copious irrigation and giving closeddressing. 2 6

Obturation of the prepared root canal space involvingapplication of endodontic sealer and lateral condensation ofthe gutta percha points followed by temporary restoration.2 6

Access cavity preparation in Maxillary Canine& maxillaryfirst premolar followed by pulp extirpation and thoroughirrigation followed by Working Length Determination and 2 6



giving closed dressing.Cleaning and Shaping of the root canals with step backtechnique along with copious irrigation and giving closeddressing.Obturation of the prepared root canal space involvingapplication of endodontic sealer and lateral condensation ofthe gutta percha points followed by temporary restoration.

22

66

III. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others14 - 14 -III. Addition learning hours expected for students– 20/Semester rIV. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning


Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Should be wellversed with all theconcepts ofsterilization anddisinfection inendodonticsStudents should beable to obtain adetailed casehistory of thepatient, diagnosethe disease andplan the treatmentaccordinglyShould be able tocarry out isolationof the operatoryfield.Realize andconsider the pain ,its causes,mechanism and itscontrol techniques.

Recognize andclassify thetraumatic injuriesas well as should

Explanationutilising Microsoftpower pointincluding picturesExplanations bydrawing picturesInteractions withthe students toexplain theconcepts taught todevelop selfinterest andcompetition amongthe fellow students.Completesupervision andinstruction on eachclinical case

Continuousassessments whichincludesQuizzes, mcq’s &Midtermexamination(T/P),ClinicalRequirementsAnd Finalexamination(T/P)



be well versed inits management.Well versed withthe restoration ofthe endodonticallytreated tooth.Recognize andmanage the varioustypes of toothdiscolorations.Recognize thevarious surgicalproceduresinvolved inendodontics andplan endodonticsurgery.

b. Cognitive Students willdevelop goodconcentration onthe topics whichwill result in goodperception andmemory all ofwhich leading tounderstanding,recollection,reproduction of thetaught concepts(both theoreticaland practical) atany given time.

Explanationutilising Microsoftpower pointExplanatorydrawing to clarifythe taught s partsGuiding studentsfollowing up thework at regulartime intervalsClinicaldemonstrations ,case presentationand supervision

Continuousassessments whichincludesQuizzes, Mcq’s &Midtermexamination(T/P)And Finalexamination(T/P)


The students areencouraged to havean attitude forcommitment tosucceed in the field,work well with thefellow students andmaintain goodrelationship withstaff members/patients , withresponsibilitytowards finishingall cases on time.

The students arealways encouragedto the best andassignments aregiven deadlines tobe submitted.Practicalrequirement are setat a definitenumber.Team work isencouraged byallowing thestudents to makepresentations in a

Assessment ofclinical cases andtheir completionand follow up at agiven period of timeAssignments ontheoretical aspectsthat is delivered at arequired timeAssesment by thestaff members ontheir behaviour /rapport with thepatients and



group. attendanceIssuing deadlineson a givenassignment/Clinical casesrequired


Develop the abilityto do a casepresentation to theclass utilisingMicrosoftPowerPointKnow the basics ofcommunication andinformationtechnology & utilisethese skills the bestway possible intheir assignmentsAbility to utiliseelectronic library/e-journals.


Evaluate theirmethod ofcollection of e-based facts &assessment of themethod andduration of timeinvolving the same.

e. Psychomotor skills Able to provide thetreatment details topatient /build upgood dentist-patient relationshipand provide thetreatment in a bestpossible waykeeping thepsychological statusof patients in mind.

ClinicaldemonstrationsCritical evaluationon the clinical workdone in aconstructivemanner.

The students willhave continuousassessment on thedevelopment oftactile sensationwhile working inthe root canal andthe accuracy ofhandling the rotaryinstruments and thestudents areexpected to fulfilthe requirementsset.V. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester




Continuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 5%MCQ’s II 5%Requirements 10%Midterm 20%Summative Assessment 60% Practical Exams 20%Written Exams 30%Oral Exams 10%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Endodontics: Principles and Practice by Mahmoud Torabinejad DMD MSD PhD andRichard E. Walton. 2008.2. Ingle's Endodontics 6/e by John I. Ingle, Leif K. Bakland, J. Craig, and Ph.D. Baumgartner.2007.3. Problem Solving in Endodontics: Prevention, Identification, and Management by JamesL. Gutmann, Thom Dumsha, and Paul Lovdahl. 2005.4. PDQ Endodontics, 2nd edition by John Ide Ingle. 2009.5. Clinical Endodontics: A Textbook by Leif Tronstad. 2008.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation


G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.



c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:




Course Specifications | 9th Semester | Pedodontics I | Page - 261

PEDODONTICS I1. Institution: JAZAN University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Pedodontics I , 533 PDSb. Credit hours 2 (1+1)c. Program in which course offered BDSd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse DR. GUNA SEKHARMADIRAJUDR. ARUN RATHNAMDR. NIDHI MADANe. Year/Semester at which course offered 5th Year | 9th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 433 PDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Al-Sawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Be able to understand normal and abnormal growth & development of teeth andocclusion and its clinical application in defining and management of problems inprimary & mixed dentitions. Be able to record and assess medical and dental history in children and adolescentpatients in relation to their dental treatment needs. Be able to perform clinical examination, take/interpret radiographs and arrive at properdiagnosis & formulate an appropriate treatment plan for various dental problems inchildren. Have knowledge of and apply different behaviour modification techniques used inchildren. Be able to apply the basic principles of four-handed dentistry, by working both as adentist and as a dental assistant. Be able to perform oral prophylactic and preventive procedures in Pedodontic patients. Have knowledge on the importance of oral health and discuss with parents and/orchildren different approaches for the prevention of dental disease in children &adolescents.C. Course descriptionDuring the clinical Pedodontics the aim of teaching is to implement the knowledgegained by the students in the Pre-clinic sessions. Clinical Pedodontics will be taught in5th & 6th years and has been divided into 4 courses i.e., Pedodontics I, II, III, & IV, whichcorresponds to 9th, 10th, 11th and 12th semesters respectively. Comprehensive care



concept will be adapted so that students develop and awareness of/and appreciation forthe child as a whole. The patients with age ranging from 3-14 years will be selected fortreatment in clinical Pedodontics.Pedodontics-I course is taught in 5th Year/9th Semester and includes study ofexamination, diagnosis & treatment planning for various dental problems in childrenfrom infancy through adolescence; radiographs/techniques in children; developmentalanomalies of teeth and jaws; development of normal occlusion; management of child indental office; preventive procedures; oral hygiene in children & adolescents includingInfant oral health care; and understanding of various gingival & periodontal diseases inchildren. The clinical sessions encompass extensive clinical training on recording cases,diagnosis & treatment of common problems in Pedodontics which also includes takingand interpreting intra-oral radiographs; behaviour modification of child patients;performing oral prophylactic procedures and application of topical fluorides.I. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of Weeks Contact hoursIntroduction to Clinical Pedodontics 1 1Eruption of teeth & Teething disorders 1 1Developmental anomalies of teeth/jaws 1 1Development of Occlusion in children 2 2Management of child in dental office 3 3Radiographs/techniques in children 1 1Oral hygiene procedures in children 1 1Gingival/Periodontal diseases in children 2 2Preventive procedures in children 1 1TOTAL 13 13

Schedule of Clinical Sessions

Topics to be covered

Topics No. of WeeksInfection control & Dental chair Operating positions -Medical/Dental history -



Recording Case history Clinical examination -Dental charting -Radiographic interpretation -Diagnosis -Treatment planning -Behaviour management/modification techniques -Oral prophylactic procedures -Topical fluoride application -Perform Education & motivation on oral health care -TOTAL 13

II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Clinics(Credit hours) Others13 - 13 -



Method ofAssessment

Knowledge Record case history & oralfindings of patients.Management of child indental clinic.Identify & treat dentalproblems inchildren/adolescents.Mechanism of action &application of topicalfluorides.Teach & motivateparents/childrenregarding proper

Lectures.Clinicaldiscussions &demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Casepresentations bystudents.

Continuous clinicalevaluation by staff.2 MCQ quiz examsMid-term MCQ examFinal theory examFinal clinical examOrals/viva-voce



brushing techniquesaccording to child’s age.Cognitive Identification of teeth &various developmentalabnormalities of teeth.Provide proper diagnosis& device appropriatetreatment plan for variousdental problems inprimary/mixed dentition.Be able to evaluate thepatient’s need and selectappropriate behaviourmodification technique.Evaluation and Selectionof Pedodontics patientsfor preventiveprocedures.



Interpersonal skills& Responsibilities

Should follow properprotocol for regularclinical attendance.Demonstrate ethicalrelationship with staff.Should develop goodworking relations with hisprofessional colleagues.Should wear a neat labcoat with name tag &ensure proper handling ofPedodontics patients.Establish and maintainaccurate patient records.

Clinical sessionsunder regularsupervision bystaff.Continuousevaluation duringthe course.


Students will be taught toregularly update theirknowledge onPedodontics by increaseduse of internet/web basedinformation.List of web sitesprovidingknowledge onPedodontics.Registration ofonline journals.

Continuous clinicalevaluation/monitoring by thestaff.Interactive sessionswith students.Psychomotor skills Should develop skills forperformingradiographic/preventiveprocedures.

Audio-visual/livedemonstration ofdifferent clinicaltechniquesExclusive trainingon clinicalprocedures‘Quota

Step-by-stepevaluation of eachprocedure by theconcerned staff.Evaluation of quotarequirements.Practical & Oralexams



requirements forclinical work toimprove clinicalefficiency’

V. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semesterAssessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 50% MCQ’s I 10%MCQ’s II 10%Midterm 20%

Continuous clinical evaluation 10%Summative Assessment 50% Practical Exams 20%Orals/Viva-voce 10%Written Exams 20%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:DR. GUNA SEKHAR MADIRAJUDR. ARUN RATHNAMDR. NIDHI MADANConsultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources:

Essential Text books:1. Dentistry for the Child and Adolescent by Ralph E. McDonald DDS MS, David R. AveryDDS MSD, and Jeffrey A. Dean. 2004.2. Fundamentals of Pediatric Dentistry by Mathewson JR, Robert E Primosch. QuintPub Co. 19953. Pediatric Dentistry: Infancy through Adolescence by Pinkham JR, 3rd Edition, 1993.Referral Text books:1. A Manual of Pediatric Dentistry by Andlaw R.J, Rock W.P; Churchill Livingstone,2000.2. Handbook of Pediatric Dentistry by Angus C. Cameron and Richard P. Widmer. 2008.3. Pediatric Dentistry by Richard.R.Welbury. Oxford University Press4. Pedodontics: A clinical approach by Goran Koch, Mosby Co. 1994.Periodicals/Journals:1. International Journal of Pediatric Dentistry (IJPD)2. Journal of Clinical Pediatric Dentistry (JCPD)3. Journal of Dentistry for Children (JDC)



4. Journal of American Academy of Pediatric Dentistry (AAPD)5. Journal of Indian Society of Pedodontics & Preventive Dentistry (JISPPD)Miscellaneous:1. Pedodontics with Interactive DVD-ROM by Marwah. 2008.2. Mini Atlas of Pedodontics (Anshan Gold Standard Mini Atlas Series) by NikhilMarwah and Vijaya Prabha K. 2007.

F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Clinics/labs for 40-60 studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Digital radiograph facility (RVG) with imaging software Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating areas which need further improvementand work collectively to achieve it. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports



Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:


Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune the course in linewith international standards.



10TH SEMESTER

FIFTH YEAR

TENTH SEMESTERCODE COURSE TITLE TH PR CRH COH P-REQ513 MDS Advanced Oral &

Maxillofacial Surgery I1 3 2 4 512 MDS522 RDS Operative Dentistry IV 1 3 2 4 521 RDS524 RDS Clinical Endodontics II 1 3 2 4 523 RDS532 PDS Periodontics IV 1 3 2 4 531 PDS534 PDS Pedodontics II 1 3 2 4 533 PDS535 PDS Preclinical Orthodontics 2 3 3 5 531 PDS542 SDS Clinical Removable

Prosthodontics IV1 3 2 4 541 SDS544 SDS Clinical Fixed

Prosthodontics II1 3 2 4 543 SDS551 DMS Dental Pharmacology 1 0 1 1 354 DMS

TOTAL 9 10 24 18 34


Course Specifications | 10th Semester | Advanced Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery I | Page - 269

ADVANCED ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY I1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Advanced Oral &Maxillofacial Surgery I513 MDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Ashwin. J.e. Year/Semester at which course offered 5th Year | 10th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 512 MDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Shawajrah Campus

B. Objectives

The students should be able to assess patients for major surgical procedures, properlytake physical examinations, advice investigations and plan treatment Apply knowledge to assess the patient, draw out a treatment plan and execute it by theHelp of his instructor for Fractures of middle third of facial skeleton, MandibularFractures, Condylar Fractures, and Orthognathic Surgeries.C. Course descriptionThis course will be taught in oral surgery course in 5th Year | 10th Semester. The course isintended to cover major oral surgical procedures, trauma and orthognathic surgeriesThe students should be able to assess patients for major surgical procedures, properly takephysical examinations, advice investigations and plan treatment. Apply knowledge to assess thepatient, draw out a treatment plan and execute it by the help of his instructor for Fractures ofmiddle third of facial skeleton, Mandibular Fractures, Condylar Fractures, and OrthognathicSurgeries. In the clinics the student will learn to perform surgical removal of impacted teeth,uncomplicated pre-prosthetic surgeries, biopsy of soft tissues, management of infections ofdental origin, management of impacted teeth which include flap design and suturing techniques.Students will also be taught in detail hospital rules and protocol, which include medicalrecords, doctor’s orders, progress notes, laboratory and radiographical results, graphics,operation notes and discharge summary.




1. Fractures of middle third of facial skeleton-I 1 42. Fractures of middle third of facial skeleton-II 1 4

3. Fractures of middle third of facial skeleton-III 1 4

4. Mandibular Fractures –I 1 4

5. Mandibular Fractures –II 1 4

6. Condylar Fractures –I 1 4

7. Condylar Fractures –II 1 4

8. Trauma Miscellaneous-I 1 4

9. Trauma Miscellaneous-II 1 4

10. Orthognathic Surgeries-I 1 4

11. Orthognathic Surgeries-II 1 4

II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others11 11


Skills Description Teaching strategies Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge To identifyfractures of middlethird of facial Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrations on Continuous clinicalevaluation by staff.2 MCQ quiz exams



skeleton and learnthe management.To identifymandibularfractures and learnthe management.To identifycondylar fracturesand learn themanagementTo identifyOrthognathicsurgeries andlearn themanagement.

patients/live models.Clinical sessionsunder supervision bystaff.Case presentationsby students.Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrations onpatients/live models.Clinical sessionsunder supervision bystaff.Case presentationsby students.

Mid-term MCQexamFinal theory examFinal clinical examOrals/viva-voce

b. Cognitive Identify trauma onradiographs. Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrations onpatients/live models.Clinical sessionsunder supervision bystaff.Case presentationsby students.



Should followproper protocolfor regular clinicalattendance.Demonstrateethicalrelationship withstaff.Should developgood workingrelations with hisprofessionalcolleagues.Should wear a neatapron/lab coatwith name tag.Ensure proper




handling ofpatientsd. CommunicationInformationTechnology &Numerical skills

Students will betaught to regularlyupdate theirknowledge on Oralsurgery byincreased use ofinternet/webbased information

List of web sitesproviding knowledgeon Oral Surgery.Registration ofonline journalsContinuous clinicalevaluation/monitoring by thestaff.Interactive sessionswith students

e. Psychomotor skills Should developskills foridentifying andmanaging traumapatients under thesupervision of staffExclusive training onclinical procedures Step-by-stepevaluation of eachprocedure by theconcerned staff.Practical & Oralexams


D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2hrs|week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resourcesA. Fonscaea Trauma SeriesB. An Atlas of Minor Oral Surgery: principles and practice, D A McGowan ISBN:1853177660C. An Outline of Oral Surgery: parts 1 and 2, H C Killey, L W Kay G R Seward,0723610614D. Maxillofacial and Dental Emergencies, J E Hawkesford 0192623915E. Principles of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery (5th edition) U J Moore 0632054387



F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Clinics with 40 dental chairs Recovery Room Minor Operation Theatre with 10 dental chairs Scrub Area Sterilisation Room Changing room with lockers for staff and studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors Computer systems

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaire Vivab. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement:


Course Specifications | 10th Semester | Operative Dentistry IV | Page - 275

OPERATIVE DENTISTRY IV1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Operative Dentistry IV522 RDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Dr Syed Nahid Basheere. Year/Semester at which course offered 5th Year | 10thSemesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 521 RDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Shawajrah

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Know the various advantages, disadvantages, indications and contraindications of DirectPosterior Esthetic Restoration Know the various causes of discoloration of vital teeth and its management Understand the various esthetic procedures and its cllinical application Know the various failures of operative restorations and how to counteract the same. Know the basic principles of cavity preparation for esthetic inlays and onlays Know the indications, contraindications, advantages & disadvantages of cast goldrestorations Know how to classify direct filling gold, and its advantages and disadvantagesC. Course description

This course is provided by the Restorative department during the second semester ofthe fifth year. The course consists of two parts, theory and clinics, in which the formerincludes lectures and seminar presentations and the later includes the application of thetheory knowledge gained in the theoretical sessionsThe course is given as one lecture and one lab sessions per week for the whole semesterand will have 2 credit hours and four contact hours.In this course the students will be trained to prepare cavities and restore with posteriorcomposite resin material, manage discolored vital teeth, counteract or repair the failed



restorations, know the differences between direct and indirect restorations, know thebasic principles of cavity preparation for cast gold and direct gold restorations, prepareand restore class II compound & complex cavities with Amalgam restorative material onpatients.I. Topics to be covered

Topics No. ofcredithours

Contacthours1 Direct Posterior Esthetic Restoration 2 22 Conservative Treatment of Vital Discolored Teeth 2 23 Esthetic Considerations in Operative Dentistry 2 24 Failures of amalgam Restorations 2 25 Failures of composite restorations 2 26 Indirect Posterior Esthetic Restoration 1 17 Introduction to Cast Gold Restoration 2 28 Introduction to Direct gold restoration 1 1

SINUM

CLINICS

1 Complex amalgam restorations2 Bonded amalgam restorations3 Management of deep carious lesions4 Management of badly broken teeth5 Management of hypersensitivity6 Management of vital discoloured teeth7 Demonstration of cast gold restorations

II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical Others14 --- 14 ---





Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Technique forcomposite use inthe treatment of theocclusal andproximal surfacesof posterior teeth.ConservativeTreatment of VitalDiscolored TeethRecognise thedifferences betweendirect and indirectposterior estheticrestorationsDescribe theadvantages anddisadvantages ofCast GoldRestorationDescribe basicconcepts of Directfilling goldrestoration-



b. Cognitive Students willdevelop goodconcentration onthe topics whichwill result in goodconcentration,perception andneverthelessmemory all ofwhich leading tounderstanding ,recollection,reproduction of thetaught concepts(both theoreticaland practical ) at





any given time.c. Interpersonal &Responsibilities

The students areencouraged to havean attitude forcommitment tosucceed in the field,work well with thefellow students andmaintain goodrelationship withstaffmembers/patients ,with responsibilitytowards finishingall cases on time.

The student arealways encouragedto the best infriendly way, andcases are given andcompletedaccordingly. Clinicalrequirement are setat a definitenumber

Assesment ofclinical cases andtheir completionand follow up at agiven period of timeAssignments ontheoretical aspectsthat is delivered at arequired timeAssesment by thestaff members onthe studentsbehaviour / rapportwith the patientsand attendanceIssuing deadlineson a givenassignment/clinicalcases requiredd. CommunicationInformationTechnology &Numerical skills

Know the basics ofcommunication andinformationtechnology, utilisethese skills the bestway possible intheir assignmentsability to utiliseelectronic library-e,journals.



e. Psychomotor skills Able to provide thetreatment details topatient /build upgood dentist-patient relationshipand provide thetreatment best waypossible andkeeping thepsychological status

ClinicaldemonstrationsCritical evaluationof the clinical workin a constructivemanner..




of patients in mind.Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester

Assessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 5%MCQ’s II 5%Requirements 10%Mid-term practicalexam 10%Mid-term writtenexam 10%Summative Assessment 60% Final Practical Exam 30%Final Written Exams 30%I. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/week

a- Dr Syed Nahid Basheerb- Dr Abbas RizviD. Learning resources1. Sturdevant's Art and Science of Operative Dentistry (Roberson, Sturdevant's Art andScience of Operative Dentistry) by Theodore Roberson, Harold O. Heymann, and EdwardJ. Swift. 2006.2. Textbook of Operative Dentistry by Sharad Chandra and Sangita Chandra. 2008.3. Principles of Operative Dentistry by A. J. E. Qualtrough, Julian Satterthwaite, LeeanMorrow, and Paul Brunton. 2005.4. Conservative Dentistry Including Endodontics: Questions and Answers by Bansal. 2008.5. Pre-Clinical Conservative Dentistry by Vimal K Sikri. 2009.E. Facilities requireda. Accommodation




F. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:


Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies.



Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.


Course Specifications | 10th Semester | Clinical Endodontics II | Page - 282

CLINICAL ENDODONTICS II1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Clinical Endodontics II524 RDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Prof. Hosham Khalifa KamalyDr. Abbas Rizvie. Year/Semester at which course offered 5th Year | 10th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 523 RDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Shawajarah

B. ObjectivesOn completion of the course the students should be able to: Differentiate between odontogenic and non-odontogenic pain and diagnose it. Have the knowledge of the effect of pulp diseases on periodontium and likewise theeffect of periodontal diseases on pulp. Understand the use of premedication in endodontics and endodontic pharmacology. Have the knowledge of the various types and factors responsible for differentendodontic mishaps. Understand the causes of endodontic failures and possess the ability to plan the re-treatment of the failed endodontic treatment. Perform endodontic procedures on the patient’s premolars and mandibular 1st molar.C. Course descriptionThe course is given to 5th year (10th semester) students as one lecture and one clinicalsession. The theoretical part covers topics which include non-odontogenic tooth ache,endodontic-periodontic interrelationship, pharmacology in endodontics, endodonticmishaps and it lays emphasis on the management of the failed endodontic procedures. .The clinical component allows the students to take up patients for diagnosis, treatmentplanning and managing the cases requiring endodontic therapy in the maxillary andmandibular premolars and mandibular 1st molar. The course is given as one lecture andone clinical session per week, equivalent to 2 credit hours and 4 contact hours.



S.No. TOPICS NO. OF WEEKS CREDIT HOURS

1. NON-ODONTOGENIC TOOTH ACHE

Acute pain syndromes

Trigeminal neuralgia Cluster headache Acute otitis media Maxillary sinusitis

3 3

Acute pain syndromes contd….

Sialolithiasis Cardiogenic jaw painChronic pain syndromes

Internal derangement of TMJChronic pain syndromes contd..

Facial myalgia Atypical facial pain Allergic sinusitis Causalgia Post herpetic neuralgia

2. Endodontic And Periodontic Lesions

Effect of pulp disease on periodontium Effect of endodntic treatment onperiodontium

3 3

Effect of periodontal disease on pulp Effect of periodontal treatment on pulp Combined endodontic-periodonticdiseases

3. Pharmacology in Endodontics 1 14. Endodontic Mishaps

Access related mishaps 3 3



Instrumentation related mishap Obturation related mishaps

4. RETREATMENT

Causes of endodontic failures 3 3Retreatment of endodontic failures

Case selection in retreatment Retreatment planningRetreatment of endodontic failures

contd…

Retreatment techniques Mechanical instrumentation

I. CLINICALS No. of Weeks Contact hoursApplication of the rubber dam for isolation of the tooth. 1 3Access cavity preparation for Maxillary First Molar, PulpExtirpation, Working Length Determination followed byirrigation and giving closed dressing. 2 6Cleaning and shaping of the root canal with step backtechnique along with copious irrigation followed byapplication of intra canal medicament and giving closeddressing.

2 6Obturation of the prepared root canal space involving takingthe master cone radiograph, application of sealer withlentilo-spiral and lateral condensation of the gutta perchapoints followed by temporary restoration.

2 6Access cavity preparation for Mandibular First & SecondMolar, Pulp Extirpation, Working Length Determinationfollowed by irrigation and giving closed dressing. 2 6Cleaning and shaping of the root canal with step backtechnique along with copious irrigation followed byapplication of intra canal medicament and giving closeddressing.

2 6



Obturation of the prepared root canal space involving takingthe master cone radiograph, application of sealer withlentilo-spiral and lateral condensation of the gutta perchapoints followed by temporary restoration.2 6

IV. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others13 - 13 -V. Addition learning hours expected for students– 20/Semester

VI. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of LearningSkills Description Teaching

strategiesMethod of Assessmenta. Knowledge Differentiatebetweenodontogenic andnon odontogenictooth ache.Recognize thevariousendodontic andperiodonticlesions & theinter-relationshipbetween them &theirmanagement.Recognize thevariousendodonticmishaps and themethods toprevent them .Understand theprinciples of re-treatment andperform re-treatment in thecases with failedendodontictreatment.

ExplanationutilisingMicrosoft powerpoint includingpicturesExplanations bydrawing picturesInteractions withthe students toexplain theconcepts taughtto develop selfinterest andcompetitionamong thefellow studentsCompletesupervision andinstruction oneach clinical case

Continuous assessmentswhich includesQuizzes, mcq’s & Midtermexamination(T/P),ClinicalRequirementsAnd Finalexamination(T/P)



b. Cognitive Students willdevelop goodconcentration onthe topics whichwill result ingoodconcentration,perception andneverthelessmemory all ofwhich leading tounderstanding,recollection,reproduction ofthe taughtconcepts (boththeoretical andpractical) at anygiven time.

ExplanationutilisingMicrosoft powerpointExplanatorydrawing toclarify the taughtpartsGuiding studentsfollowing up thework at regulartime intervalsClinicaldemonstrations, casepresentation andsupervision

Continuous assessmentswhich includesQuizzes, mcq’s & Midtermexamination(T/P)And Finalexamination(T/P)


The students areencouraged tohave an attitudefor commitmentto succeed in thefield, work wellwith the fellowstudents andmaintain goodrelationship withstaff members/patients , withresponsibilitytowardsfinishing allcases on time.

The student arealwaysencouraged tothe best andcases are givenand completedaccordingly.Clinicalrequirement areset at a definitenumber

Assessment of clinicalcases and theircompletion and follow upat a given period of timeAssignments ontheoretical aspects that isdelivered at a requiredtimeAssesment by the staffmembers on theirbehaviour / rapport withthe patients andattendanceIssuing deadlines on agiven assignment/Clinical cases requiredd. Communication


Develop theability to do acasepresentation tothe class utilisingMicrosoftPowerPoint

The students areguided to carryout web basedsearch andencouraged tocollect materialof relevancepertaining to

Evaluate their method ofcollection of e-based facts& assessment of themethod and duration oftime involving the same.



Know the basicsofcommunicationand informationtechnology &utilise theseskills the bestway possible intheirassignmentsAbility to utiliseelectroniclibrary/ e-journals.

operativedentistry andactively involvein circulating theelectronicallycollectedmaterial withthe fellowcolleagues andstaff members.

e. Psychomotor skills Able to providethe treatmentdetails to patient/build up gooddentist-patientrelationship andprovide thetreatment bestway possible andkeeping thepsychologicalstatus of patientsin mind.

ClinicaldemonstrationsCriticalevaluation onthe clinical workdone in aconstructivemanner.

The students will havecontinuous assessmenton the development ofthe tactile sensation ofworking in the rootcanals and accuracy ofhandling of rotaryinstruments s and thestudents are expected tofulfil the requirementsset.VII. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester

Assessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 5%MCQ’s II 5%Requirements 10%Midterm 20%Summative Assessment 60% Practical Exams 20%Written Exams 30%Oral Exams 10%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Endodontics: Principles and Practice by Mahmoud Torabinejad DMD MSD PhD andRichard E. Walton. 2008.



2. Ingle's Endodontics 6/e by John I. Ingle, Leif K. Bakland, J. Craig, and Ph.D. Baumgartner.2007.3. Problem Solving in Endodontics: Prevention, Identification, and Management by JamesL. Gutmann, Thom Dumsha, and Paul Lovdahl. 2005.4. PDQ Endodontics, 2nd edition by John Ide Ingle. 2009.5. Clinical Endodontics: A Textbook by Leif Tronstad. 2008.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation




Course Specifications | 10th Semester | Periodontics IV | Page - 290

PERIODONTICS IV1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Periodontics IV, 532 PDSb. Credit hours 4c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Dr. Ebtesam EL ZefzafDr. Mohammad SabirDr. Sameena SultanaDr. Reda Sabere. Year/Semester at which course offered 5th Year | 10th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 531 PDSg. Co-requisites for the courseh. Location if not main campus Shwajrah

B. ObjectivesUpon the completion of this course, students will be able to recognize, analyze and applyinformation presented relevant to the: Recent advances in periodontal surgical technology. Periodontal surgical procedures. Be able to plan specific surgical approach to certain periodontal conditions. Chemotherapeutic and Host Modulation Agents Periodontal Medicine Diagnosis and treatment of periodontal-endodontic lesions. Periodontal consideration in restorative dentistry. Occlusion and Orthodontic Therapy in Periodontics Periodontal Maintenance and Supportive Therapy Efficacy of periodontal therapy. Periodontics in General Practice. Be able to diagnose and make treatment plans for common periodontal conditions. Understand implants used in dentistry from a periodontal perspective. Understand surgical follow-up and wound healing.C. Course descriptionThe program in fifth year commences in-depth education in Periodontics, building onthe conceptual foundations established in the fourth year programs. In fifth year theprincipal objective of the full program in Periodontics is to educate and prepare generalpractitioners of dentistry to serve the universal public need of prevention, recognitionand comprehensive diagnosis and treatment of periodontal diseases. The programintegrates didactic, preclinical and clinical elements aiming to achieve detailed under-standing of the pathogenesis, diagnosis, and approaches to therapy for the morecommon types of periodontal conditions. The didactic element centres on recent



advances in Periodontology, periodontal medicine, dental implants esthetics andmaintenance, occlusion and maintenance and supportive therapy and fundamentals ofclinical decision-making. Special emphasis will be placed on evaluation of periodontaltreatment as well as the maintenance phase and the relationship between Periodonticsand other disciplines in dentistry. The clinical element centres on the control ofinflammatory periodontal conditions by concentrating on examination, patientmotivation, oral hygiene, and scaling and root planning skills and surgical approaches.The main objective of this semester is to present a more detailed program on diagnosis,rationale, and delivery of periodontal therapy for a wide range of periodontalconditions, building on the basic knowledge and instrumentation skills learned in theprevious semesters.I. Topics to be covered

Topics: Lectures No. ofWeeks

Contact hours

Recent Advances in Periodontal Surgical Technology 1 1 Chemotherapeutic and Host Modulation Agents – Part I Chemotherapeutic and Host Modulation Agents: Part II 2 2 Periodontal Medicine: Impact of Periodontal Infectionon Systemic Health – Part I Periodontal Medicine: Impact of Periodontal Infectionon Systemic Health: Part II

2 2 The Periodontics - Endodontics Continuum 1 1 Occlusion and Orthodontic Therapy in Periodontics 1 1 Periodontal-Restorative interrelationships 1 1 Periodontal Maintenance and Supportive Therapy 1 1 Implant Esthetcs, Recovery and Maintenance 1 1 Results of Periodontal Therapy 1 1 Periodontics in General Practice 1 1

Total 12 12

TOPICS : Practical Detailed periodontal case history Determine diagnosis, Prognosis Plan treatment Scaling, root planning Local drug delivery Supportive Periodontal Therapy Re-evaluation after Root Planning Periodontal Recall/Prophylaxis Periodontal surgery Handling basic surgical armamentarium. Post-operative instructions Post-surgical care

13 39

Total 13 39




strategiesMethod of

Assessmenta. Knowledge Integratetheoreticalknowledge relatedto Periodontics intoclinical practice.Each lecture willelaborate onseveral importantpoints associatedwith assignedreadings. Thepurposes of thelectures are toincrease theunderstanding andto complement theassigned readings.The lectures are nota replacement ofthe assignedreadings and otherresources.

1-Multiple choicequestions (MCQ)based on materialsfrom the lecturesand assignedreadings from thetext book.2-Short answer typequestions3-True/False typequestions4-Patient’s clinicalexamination andtreatment planning5-Viva voceb. Cognitive 1-Demonstrateability to use self-knowledge anddecision onworking withcolleagues, patients,and teacher.2-Develop a dentist-patient relationshipwith patients.3-Demonstrateknowledgeable skillperformance incarrying outspecific periodontalclinical procedures

1-Lectures,periodontal examand clinicalpractice, treatmentplanning ofperiodontal patient.2-Nonsurgical andsurgical treatmentof periodontalpatients.3-Small groupactivity rotation(Prophylaxis,Communicationwith Patients andRadiology).4-Seminars toinsure theappropriateapplication ofdifferent clinicalconcepts.

The followingcriteria will be usedto assess thestudents:1-ClinicalCompetencyAssessments:(i)-Clinicalperiodontal CasepresentationAssessment(ii)-PeriodontalDiagnosisAssessment(iii)-PeriodontalScaling and rootplanningAssessment2-ProfessionalEvaluation3-Daily Grading4- Prevent, assess

II. COURSE COMPONENTLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship12 -- 13



5-Case study todevelop rationalesfor periodontalassessments,diagnosis, andtreatment planning.and manage ofmedical and dentalemergencies.


1-Developawareness intoone’s own attitudetowardsperiodontaldiseases2-Value one’s ownmental healthpractices as aprofessionalgeneral dentalpractitioner.

1-Video taping ofactual student’sinteractions ingroups or one-to-one student patientinteraction (or roleplays) to teachdynamics ofinteraction.2- Directinteraction withpatients (real-lifesimulation) toapply and critiqueinterpersonal skills.

1-Oral semi-structure interview(to demonstrate theability ofcommunicationwith patients)2- Seminar (topresent projectoutcome as ademonstration ofability to applyinterviewing andinterpersonaltherapeuticcommunicationskills betweenstudents andpatients.d. CommunicationInformationTechnology &Numerical skills

Use of web basedmaterial related toPeriodontology. Group tutorial tofacilitate selection& utilization ofappropriate webbased periodonticmaterial.Assignments (topresent recentdifferent topicrelated toperiodontaltherapy.e. Psychomotor skills 1. Hand-eye co-ordination (to aid inproper harmlessand uneventfultreatment to thepatient and also thesupporting staff)

a) Skillful scalingprocedures onpatientsb) Improvingtactile sensationwhile probingsubgingival areasc) Probing andhandling hard andsoft tissuesd) Administer localanesthesiainjections withminimal pain anddiscomfort


2. Manual dexterity a) Carrying outscaling procedureswith skill anddexterity



b) Appropriate andeffective selectionof armamentariumfor clinicalproceduresc) Ability to beambidextrous asand when requiredd) Develop highlevels of tactilesensations for finerclinical procedures3.High visual acuity a) Developing highlevel of imaginationin relation to threedimensions to thinkand operate indifferent clinicalconditionsb) Ability to carryout differentclinical proceduresusing indirectvision (mirrorimages)VI. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester



Quiz Viva voce 10%


Quiz Viva voce 30%

10%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Carranza’s Clinical Periodontology: Newman, Takei, Klokkevold and Carranza, 10thedition, W. B. Saunders Co., 2006



2. Manual of Clinical Periodontics: A Reference Manual for Diagnosis & Treatment(Lexi-Comp's Dental Reference Library) by Francis G. Serio and Charles E., Ph.D.Hawley. 2009. Neild-Gehrig, Jill S.3. Fundamentals of Periodontal Instrumentation and Advanced Root Instrumentation,6th ed. Lippincott, Williams and Wilkins, 20074. Practical Periodontal Plastic Surgery by Serge Dibart and MamdouhKarima. 2006.5. Periodontics by Barry M. Eley BDS FDSRCS PhD, Mena Soory FDSRCS PhD FHEA, andJ. D. Manson. 2009.6. Practical Advanced Periodontal Surgery by Serge Dibart. 2007.7. Periodontics & Restorative Maintenance: A Clinical Atlas by Naoshi Sato. 2009.8. Comprehensive Periodontics for the Dental Hygienist (3rd Edition) by Mea A.Weinberg, Cheryl Westphal, Stuart J. Froum, and Milton Palat. 2009.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation


G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement:


Course Specifications | 10th Semester | Pedodontics II | Page - 297

PEDODONTICS II1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Pedodontics II , 534 PDSb. Credit hours 2 (1+1)c. Program in which course offered BDSd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse DR. GUNA SEKHARMADIRAJUDR. ARUN RATHNAMDR. NIDHI MADANe. Year/Semester at which course offered 5th Year | 10th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 533 PDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Al-Sawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Have knowledge of the principles of cavity preparation & its modifications in Primaryteeth Be able to classify and diagnose various pulpal diseases in children. Be able to perform adequate Isolation/moisture control procedures during clinicalwork. Have knowledge of various restorative/pulp capping materials and techniques used inprimary and young permanent teeth. Describe appropriate management for pain control in children. Have knowledge of various local anaesthetic techniques including appropriate dosagesused in children, mechanism of action, and complications associated with the use of LAin children. Have knowledge on armamentarium used for extraction and should be able to performsimple extraction procedures in Pedodontics patients. Be able to define the role of pharmacological management including sedation andgeneral anaesthesia in children.C. Course descriptionPedodontics-II course (Clinical Pedodontics) is taught in 5th Year/10th Semester andincludes lectures on modifications of principles of cavity preparation for primary dentition;Isolation techniques used in children; diagnosis of pulpal diseases; various pulp cappingmaterials and endodontic procedures in primary and young permanent teeth; Local anaesthesia



and oral surgical procedures including various cysts & tumours of jaws in children;pharmacological management of children will also be taught.The clinical sessions encompass extensive clinical training on performing basic restorations likeclass I, class II, caries excavation and ART; Use proper isolation techniques; recording cases &diagnosis of various pulpal diseases in primary and young permanent teeth; performing simpleextractions in children using appropriate local anaesthetic techniques; apply fissure sealants forselected teeth.I. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of Weeks Contact hoursCavity preparation & modifications in primary teeth 1 1Isolation of teeth 1 1Diagnosis of pulpal diseases in children 1 1Endodontic treatment of primary teeth 2 2Endodontic treatment of young permanent teeth 2 2Local anaesthesia & Oral surgical procedures in children 3 3Cysts/Tumours of soft tissue/bone in children 1 1Pharmacological behaviour management (RA, GA) 2 2TOTAL 13 13

Schedule of Clinical Sessions:


Topics No. of WeeksRecord cases i.e., history, clinical examination, radiographs, diagnosis &treatment planning in children -Basic/Simple restorations in children -Manipulation of dental materials -Isolation of teeth (rubber dam) -Caries excavation & ART -Administration of Local anaesthesia -Simple extractions of primary teeth -



Application of sealants in children -TOTAL 13




Method ofAssessment

Knowledge Recording history & oralfindings of patients.Various restorativematerials used in restoringvital & non-vital primaryand young permanentteeth.Nerve and blood supply ofprimary/permanent teethin children.Various local anaesthetictechniques and its dosage &complications in childrenSelection of teeth indicatedfor sealantsRole of sedation andgeneral anaesthesia inmanagement of child.



Cognitive Selection of appropriaterestorative material forrestoring primary teeth &young permanent teeth.Diagnosis of various pulpaldiseases in primary &young permanent teeth.Selection of appropriatelocal anaesthetictechnique/armamentariumfor extractions in children.

Lectures.Clinicaldiscussions &demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Casepresentations by




Selection of Pedodonticspatients for preventiveprocedures i.e., sealants. students.Interpersonal skills& Responsibilities

Should follow properprotocol for regular clinicalattendance.Demonstrate ethicalrelationship with staff.Should develop goodworking relations with hisprofessional colleagues.Should wear a neat lab coatwith name tag & ensureproper handling ofPedodontics patients.Establish and maintainaccurate patient records.



Students will be taught toregularly update theirknowledge on Pedodonticsby increased use ofinternet/web basedinformation.List of web sitesprovidingknowledge onPedodontics.Registration ofonline journals.

Continuous clinicalevaluation/monitoring by thestaff.Interactive sessionswith students.Psychomotor skills Develop skills inapplication of rubber damduring clinical procedures.Develop skills foradministration of localanaesthetic procedures inchildren.Perform simplerestorations & extractionsinvolving primary teeth

Audio-visual/livedemonstration ofdifferent clinicaltechniquesExclusive trainingon clinicalprocedures‘Quotarequirements forclinical work toimprove clinicalefficiency’



Continuous clinical evaluation 10%Summative Assessment 50% Practical Exams 20%Orals/Viva-voce 10%



Written Exams 20%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:DR. GUNA SEKHAR MADIRAJUDR. ARUN RATHNAMDR. NIDHI MADANConsultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources:

Essential Text books:1. Dentistry for the Child and Adolescent by Ralph E. McDonald DDS MS, David R. AveryDDS MSD, and Jeffrey A. Dean. 2004.2. Fundamentals of Pediatric Dentistry by Mathewson JR, Robert E Primosch. QuintPub Co. 19953. Pediatric Dentistry: Infancy through Adolescence by Pinkham JR, 3rd Edition, 1993.Referral Text books:1. A Manual of Pediatric Dentistry by Andlaw R.J, Rock W.P; Churchill Livingstone,2000.2. Handbook of Pediatric Dentistry by Angus C. Cameron and Richard P. Widmer. 2008.3. Pediatric Dentistry by Richard.R.Welbury. Oxford University Press4. Pedodontics: A clinical approach by Goran Koch, Mosby Co. 1994.Periodicals/Journals:1. International Journal of Pediatric Dentistry (IJPD)2. Journal of Clinical Pediatric Dentistry (JCPD)3. Journal of Dentistry for Children (JDC)4. Journal of American Academy of Pediatric Dentistry (AAPD)5. Journal of Indian Society of Pedodontics & Preventive Dentistry (JISPPD)

Miscellaneous:1. Pedodontics with Interactive DVD-ROM by Marwah. 2008.2. Mini Atlas of Pedodontics (Anshan Gold Standard Mini Atlas Series) by NikhilMarwah and Vijaya Prabha K. 2007.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 students



Clinics/labs for 40-60 studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Digital radiograph facility (RVG) with imaging software Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating areas which need further improvementand work collectively to achieve it. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awhole.e. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:

Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite.



Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning:

Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune the course in linewith international standards.


Course Specifications | 10th Semester | Preclinical Orthodontics | Page - 304

PRECLINICAL ORTHODONTICS1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Preclinical Orthodontics,535 PDSb. Credit hours 3c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible for course Dr Roby .P. Cheriane. Year/Semester at which course offered 5th Year | 10th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 431 PDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Al-Shawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Understand the significance of the major concepts of facial growth and development. Have a sound knowledge of normal and abnormal growth and development of dento-skeletal facial structures including conditions that interfere with the patient's ability tofunction. Be able to understand the different dimensional changes in arch length and widthduring the transition from primary to mixed and onto the permanent dentition. Be able to evaluate the eruption pattern as it relates to chronologic and skeletal age. Have knowledge of normal occlusion and the use of indices for orthodontic treatmentneeds. Have knowledge of classification of malocclusion and be able to understand the etiologyof orthodontic problems. Be able to understand the significance of oral and extra-oral habits as possible etiologicfactors in the development of malocclusion. Have a thorough understanding of the principles of orthodontic assessment, thedifferent aids used in the diagnostic process and the development of a problem list. Have knowledge about the biology of tooth movement and full understanding of theapplied forces to the teeth. Also be able to identify problems during orthodontictreatment to ensure healthy bone, gingival and periodontal ligament. Be able to understand the basic mechanics of tooth movement and its relevance toclinical application. Be well versed with the biomechanical methods adopted in orthodonticmechanotherapy. Have full understanding about removable appliances and the difference between asimple removable appliance and a functional appliance. Have basic understanding of fixed appliance mechanics that includes the use of differentbracket systems, bands and intraoral use of elastics.



Develop wire bending skills and be able to design and construct simple removableappliances.C. Course descriptionKnowledge of the basics of orthodontics is essential for the dental student. This course willprovide the undergraduate student the background of growth and development of dento-facialstructures, characteristics of normal occlusion, etiology, classification and diagnosis ofmalocclusion as well as orthodontic appliances and their biomechanics. The student is alsotrained to fabricate simple removable appliances. The course is of one semester consisting of:

Lecture (Two hours) Practical session (Three hours)

I. Topics to be coveredS.No. Topics No. of Weeks Contact hours

Lectures1 Introduction to Orthodontics ½ 12 Concepts of Growth and Development 1 23 Early Stages of Development ½ 14 Late Stages of development ½ 15 Development of DentitionFunctional Development of Stomatognathic system ½ 16 Normal OcclusionEpidemiology of Malocclusion ½ 17 Classification of Malocclusion ½ 18 Etiology of Malocclusion 1½ 39 Orthodontic Diagnosis 1 210 Model Analysis ½ 111 Cephalometric Landmarks ½ 112 Cephalometric Analysis ½ 113 Biology of Tooth Movement 1 214 Mechanical Principles in Orthodontic Force 1 215 Removable Appliances 1½ 316 Functional Appliances ½ 117 Extra-oral Orthopaedic Appliances ½ 118 Fixed Appliances ½ 1Practicals1 Wire bending exercises 4 122 Hawley Retainer - maxillary and mandibulara) C-claspsb) Labial bowsc) Acrylization

3 93 Removable appliance with Z-spring & finger springa) Adams claspsb) Z-spring and Finger springc) Boxing and Acrylization

3 94 Removable appliance for canine retraction 3 9



a) Jacksons claspsb) Helical and palatal canine retractorsc) Boxing and Acrylizationd) Lab Prescription writingII. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others26 39



Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge •Aims / scope of Orthodontics•Growth & development of face& teeth•Development of occlusion &function•Etiology & Classification ofMalocclusion•Orthodontic evaluation &examination•Diagnostic aids used inOrthodontics•Biomechanics of toothmovement•Adverse effects of orthodontictreatment•Materials used in Orthodontics•Types, principles, indications &components of orthodonticappliances

LecturesDiscussions withstudentsDemonstrations,audio-visual aids& study models

2 MCQ quizexamsMid-termMCQ examFinal theoryexamOral examContinuousevaluationduring thecourse.b. Cognitive •Recognition & Differencesbetween normal occlusion inprimary, mixed and permanentdentition.•Development of a problem listaccording to a certain givendata base.•Identification of basic elementsof removable orthodonticappliances.•Selection of appropriate designfor commonly used removableappliances.

LecturesDiscussions withstudentsDemonstrations,audio-visual aids& study modelsPre-clinicalpracticalsessions underregular

2 MCQ quizexamsMid-termMCQ &practicalexamFinal theory& practicalexamSpotters



supervision bystaff Oral examc. Interpersonal &Responsibilities

•Should follow proper protocolfor regular attendance.•Demonstrate ethicalrelationship with staff.•Should develop good workingrelations with his professionalcolleagues.•Should wear a neat lab coatwith name tag.•Ensure proper handling ofmaterials/equipment.

Pre-clinicalpracticalsessions underregularsupervision bystaffContinuousevaluationduring thecourse.


•Enhance good staff-studentcommunication.•Use of library & web basedinformation to improveknowledge.Interactivesessions withstudents.Registration ofonline journals.e. Psychomotor

skills•Develop wire bending skills.•Fabrication of simpleremovable appliances. Pre-clinicalpracticalsessions underregularsupervision bystaff

Step-by-stepevaluation ofeachprocedure byconcernedstaffMid-term &FinalpracticalexamsV. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester

Assessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 10%MCQ’s II 10%Midterm (MCQ &Practical) 15%Continuous evaluation 5%Summative Assessment 60% Practical Exams 20%Written Exams 40%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:



Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources

Essential books:1. Proffit WR, Fields HW Jr., Sarver DM. Contemporary Orthodontics. 4 ed. St. Louis: Mosby;2006.2. Graber TM. Orthodontics: Current Principles and Practice. Philadelphia: Saunders; 2000.3. Adams CP. The Design, Construction and use of Removable Orthodontic Appliances. 3rded. Bristol: John Wright; 1964.Recommended books:1. An Introduction to Orthodontics, Third Edition by Laura Mitchell. 2002, Oxford: OxfordUniversity Press.2. Textbook of Orthodontics, First Edition by Samir E. Bishara. 2001, Philadelphia:Saunders.3. Orthodontics: The Art and Science, First Edition by S.I. Bhalajhi. 1997, New Delhi: Arya(Medi) Publishing House.4. Principles and Practice of Orthodontics, Second Edition by JRE Mills. 1987, ChurchillLivingstone Dental Series.Reference books:1. Handbook of Orthodontics, Fourth Edition by Moyer and Robert E. 1988, Year BookMedical Publisher.2. Orthodontics for Dental Students by T.C. White and J.H. Gardiner.3. Dental Biomechanics by Arturo N. Natali. 2003.4. Orthodontic Materials: Scientific and Clinical Aspects by W.A. Brantley and T. Eliades.2000.5. Orthodontics at a Glance by Daljit S. Gill. 2008.6. Essentials of Orthodontia by Van Broadus Dalton. 2008.Additional learning resources:

Journals:1. Jefferson Y. Orthodontic diagnosis in young children: beyond dental malocclusion.General Dentistry. 2003;51(2):104-11.2. Harris EF. Root resorption during orthodontic therapy. Seminars in Orthodontics.2000;6(3):183-94.F. Facilities required



a. Accommodation Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Labs for 40-60 studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills.



Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.



11TH SEMESTER

SIXTH YEAR

ELEVENTH SEMESTERCODE COURSE TITLE TH PR CRH COH P-REQ611 MDS Advanced Oral &

Maxillofacial Surgery II1 3 2 4 513 MDS631 PDS Evidence Based Dentistry

& Research Methodology1 0 1 1 332 PDS633 PDS Pedodontics III 1 3 2 4 534 PDS635 PDS Clinical Orthodontics I 1 3 2 4 535 PDS641 SDS Advanced Prosthodontics I 1 3 2 4 544 SDS643 SDS Dental Implantology I 1 0 1 1 513 MDS661 DEN Comprehensive Care

Clinics I1 15 6 16 522 RDS663 DEN Practice Management &

Professional Conduct1 0 1 1 261 DEN

TOTAL 8 8 27 17 35


Course Specifications | 11th Semester | Advanced Oral & Maxillofacial Surgery II | Page - 312

ADVANCED ORAL & MAXILLOFACIAL SURGERY II1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Advanced Oral &Maxillofacial Surgery II611 MDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible forcourse Ashwin. J.e. Year/Semester at which course offered 6th Year | 11th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 513 MDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Shawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Do patient assessment and examination of the surgical problems and come up with anappropriate overall treatment plan. Be able to understand when a referral to a specialist is essential. Competent in physical evaluation and understand the clinical and lab findings, discussfindings, diagnosis, and treatment plan options and obtain informed consent to carry thetreatment. Manage patients' pain and anxiety through the use of local anaesthesia and otherprocedures. Manage uncomplicated extraction of single or multi-rooted, non-impacted teeth, rootpieces, pre-prosthetic surgery and other soft tissue infection of Dental origin. Assess and manage impacted teeth under a close supervision. The students should be ableto assess patients for major surgical procedures, properly take physical examinations,advice investigations and plan treatment. Apply knowledge to assess the patient, make diagnosis draw out a treatment plan forSalivary gland disorders. Apply knowledge to assess the patient, make diagnosis draw out a treatment plan for Oro-facial clefts. Apply knowledge to assess the patient, make diagnosis draw out a treatment plan for oro-antral fistulas.



Apply knowledge to assess the patient, make diagnosis draw out a treatment plan for oralmalignancies and reconstruction of head and neck.C. Course descriptionThis course will be taught in oral surgery course in 6th Year | 11th Semester. The course isintended to cover major and minor oral surgical procedures in Salivary gland disorders,Oro-facial clefts, Maxillary Sinus and its implications, oral malignancies and neckReconstruction of head and neck. Students will also be taught in detail hospital rulesand protocol, which include medical records, doctor’s orders, progress notes, laboratoryand radiographical results, graphics, operation notes and discharge summary.

I. Topics to be coveredTopics No. of Weeks Contact hours1. Salivary gland disorders-I 1 42. Salivary gland disorders-II 1 43. Oro-facial clefts-I 1 44. Oro-facial clefts-II 1 45. Maxillary Sinus and its implications-I 1 46. Maxillary Sinus and its implications-II 1 47. Cancer of Head and neck –I 1 48. Cancer of Head and neck – II 1 49. Cancer of Head and neck –III 1 410. Reconstruction of head and neck-I 1 411. Reconstruction of head and neck-I 1 4

II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others11 11





Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Identify salivarygland disorders,Oro-facial clefts,Cancer of Head andneck.

Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Case presentationsby students.Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Case presentationsby students.


b. Cognitive Identify salivarygland disorders,Oro-facial clefts,Cancer of Head andneck.Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Case presentationsby students.



Should followproper protocol forregular clinicalattendance.Demonstrateethical relationshipwith staff.Should develop




good workingrelations with hisprofessionalcolleagues.Should wear a neatapron/lab coat withname tag.Ensure properhandling ofpatientsd. CommunicationInformationTechnology &Numerical skills



e. Psychomotor skills Should developskills for identifyingsalivary glanddisorders, Oro-facial clefts, Cancerof Head and neck.patients

Exclusive trainingon clinicalprocedures Step-by-stepevaluation of eachprocedure by theconcerned staff.Practical & OralexamsV. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester

Assessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 15%MCQ’s II 15%Midterm 10%Summative Assessment 60% Practical Exams 20%Written Exams 40%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2hrs|week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. An Introduction to Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery (Oxford MedicalPublications) by David A. Mitchell. 2006.2. Contemporary Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery by James R. Hupp, Edward Ellis III, andMyron R. Tucker. 2008.



3. Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery Secrets by A. Omar Abubaker DMD PhD and Kenneth J.Benson. 2007.4. Clinical Review of Oral and Maxillofacial Surgery by Shahrokh C. Bagheri DMD MD andChris Jo. 2007.5. Manual of Minor Oral Surgery for the General Dentist by Karl R. Koerner. 2006.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Clinics with 40 dental chairs Recovery Room Minor Operation Theatre with 10 dental chairs Scrub Area Sterilisation Room Changing room with lockers for staff and studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors Computer systems

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaire Vivab. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement.


Course Specifications | 11th Semester | Evidence-Based Dentistry & Research Methodology |Page - 318

EVIDENCE-BASED DENTISTRY & RESEARCH METHODOLOGY1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Evidence-Based Dentistry &Research Methodology,631 PDSb. Credit hours 1c. Program in which the course is offered Dentistryd. Name(s) of the faculty member(s) responsible for thecourse Dr Kaushik SenguptaDr Aadil InamdarDr Santosh KumarTadakamandlae. Year/semester at which the course is offered 6th Year/11th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 332 PDSg. Co-requisites for the course –h. Location (if not main campus) Shawajara Campus

B. ObjectivesAfter completion of the course, the students should be able to: Discuss the basic components, merits, and demerits of the various design strategies used inbiomedical research Analyze research designs of articles published in the dental literature Explain the principles of evidence-based dentistry and their use in clinical decision making Frame precise, structured, and meaningful clinical questions, and locate and apply the bestavailable evidence to answer such questions Apply causal reasoning to interpret epidemiologic and other scientific evidence Interpret and use syntheses of epidemiological evidence carried out for purposes of makingclinical decisions and developing clinical practice guidelines Identify the components of a manuscript for publication and the different types of abstractsreporting original research Describe the uniform requirements for manuscripts submitted for publication in the peerreviewed literature as outlined by the INTERNATIONAL COMMITTEE of Medical JournalEditors Identify the standardized research reporting CHECKLISTS for specific epidemiologicalmethods and designs, especially those for reporting randomized controlled trials



C. Course descriptionEvidence-based dentistry is based on the method of evidence-based health care, which canbe explained as the "conscientious, explicit, and judicious use of the best available evidencein making optimal clinical decisions that meet individual patient needs." The Evidence-Based Dentistry and Research Methodology course is one of the most recently introducedcourses in the dental curriculum. It addresses the principles of observational andexperimental clinical epidemiological research as well as health economic and decisionanalytic modelling studies. It emphasizes the qualitative issues in the conception, design,conduct, and analysis of different research modalities used in clinical epidemiology. Thesources, assessment, and control of error, confounding, and bias for different researchdesigns are discussed. Students gain an understanding of systematic reviews and meta-analysis, the criteria for evidence classification, and the use of scientific evidence indeveloping clinical practice guidelines and health and regulatory policies. The course helpsdevelop the basic skills necessary to interpret scientific literature. It helps prepare studentsto structure and pose a clinical question, search for the best available evidence, criticallyappraise the information obtained, and apply relevant information to patient care. It alsoelaborates on the options to be taken when the evidence is equivocal and/or controversial.Teaching strategies include interactive discussion sessions, case presentations, andproblem-based learning exercises.I. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of weeks Contact hoursIntroduction to research methodology Correlational studies Case report and case series Surveys (cross-sectional, repeated cross-sectional,longitudinal) Case-control studies Cohort studies Quasi experimental studies Randomized controlled clinical trials

– Protocol and case report form development Systematic reviews and meta-analyses Clinical decision analysis Economic evaluation and health technologyassessment Clinical practice guidelines Qualitative research Introduction to scientific writing

8 8

Introduction to evidence-based medicine and dentistry 3 3



The philosophy of evidence-based medicine Definition and introduction to evidence-baseddentistry Levels of evidence Acquiring the evidence: how to find the current bestevidence?

– Evidence-based healthcare resources on the Web– Using the Medline database– Navigating through the Cochrane library

Critical appraisal of the dental literature– Assessing articles on the efficacy of treatments

Knowledge translation: getting evidence into practiceProblem-based learning exercises 2 2II. Course component

Lectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others11 2 – –III. Additional learning hours expected for students: 20 per semesterIV. Development of learning outcomes in different domains of learning

Skills Description Teaching strategies Method ofassessmenta. Knowledge Comprehensiveunderstanding andknowledge ofevidence-baseddentistry andepidemiologicalresearch methods

Understanding ofthe integration ofthe principles ofevidence-baseddentistry withdifferent dentalspecialties Understanding ofareas of currentresearch anddevelopment

Provision ofextensive learningnotes andmaterials tostudents Seminars Guided reading

Examinations Continuous take-home assignments Quizzes



Understanding ofthe scientificpublication processb. Cognitive Application of theconcepts andprinciples ofevidence-baseddentistry,epidemiologicalresearch, andscientific writing indifferent specialtyareas withindentistry

Class projects fromstudents Seminars fromstudents Writtenassignments fromstudents

Monthly assignmentreport Written assignmentreport




Group projects Continuousassessment Writtenexaminations Evaluation ofseminarpresentation


Practicalimplementation ofevidence-baseddentistry Identification of thebest availableevidence foranswering clinicalquestions indentistry Appropriatecomputer skills forundertakingliterature searchesand for preparingscientific documents Effectivecommunication(both written andoral)

Student-ledteaching materials Use of softwaresuch as EndNote Use of MicrosoftPower Point andother presentationplatforms andmethods Use of informationandcommunicationtechnology




Use of informationtechnology inacademics andresearch Presentation skillse. Psychomotor

skills– – –

V. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semesterAssessment Proportion Task Proportion

Continuous assessment 40% Quiz I 15%Quiz II 15%Midterm written exam 10%Summative assessment 60% Oral exam (viva voce) 20%Final written exam 40%D. Student supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2 h per week Academic advice: 2 h per weekE. Learning resources

Books1. Evidence-Based Medicine: How to Practice and Teach it (fourth edition) by Sharon E.Straus, Paul Glasziou, W. Scott Richardson, and R. Brian Haynes. Churchill Livingstone,2010.2. How to Read a Paper: The Basics of Evidence-Based Medicine (fourth edition) by TrishaGreenhalgh. BMJ Books, 2010.3. Knowledge Translation in Health Care: Moving from Evidence to Practice by Sharon Straus,Jacqueline Tetroe, and Ian D. Graham. Wiley-Blackwell, 2009.4. Evidence-Based Practice Workbook (second edition) by Paul P. Glasziou, Chris Del Mar, andJanet Salisbury. BMJ Books, 2007.5. Evidence-Based Medicine: A Framework for Clinical Practice by Daniel J. Friedland. PrenticeHall Health, 2011.6. The Philosophy of Evidence-Based Medicine by Jeremy H. Howick. Wiley-Blackwell, 2011.7. Evidence-Based Medicine Toolkit (second edition) by Carl Heneghan and DouglasBadenoch. BMJ Books, 2006.8. Evidence-Based Dentistry: An Introduction by Allan Hackshaw, Elizabeth Paul, andElizabeth Davenport. Wiley-Blackwell, 2006.9. Evidence-Based Dentistry for Effective Practice by Jan Clarkson, Jayne E. Harrison, AmidIsmail, Ian Needleman, and Helen V. Worthington. Taylor & Francis, 2002.



10. Clinical Epidemiology: The Essentials (fourth edition) by Robert H. Fletcher and Suzanne W.Fletcher. Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, 2005.11. Clinical Epidemiology: How to Do Clinical Practice Research (third edition) by R. BrianHaynes, David L. Sackett, Gordon H. Guyatt, and Peter Tugwell. Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, 2005.12. Epidemiology in Medicine by Charles H. Hennekens and Julie E. Buring. Lippincott Williams& Wilkins, 1987.13. Clinical Research in Oral Health by William V. Giannobile, Brian A. Burt, and Robert J. Genco.Wiley-Blackwell, 2010.14. Scientific Writing: Easy When You Know How by Jennifer Peat, Elizabeth Elliott, LouiseBaur, and Victoria Keena. BMJ Books, 2002.Journal articles1. Healey D, Lyons K. Evidence-based practice in dentistry. New Zealand Dental Journal.2002;98:32–35.2. Sutherland SE. Evidence-based dentistry: Part I. Getting started. Journal of the CanadianDental Association. 2001;67:204–206.3. Sutherland S. Evidence-based dentistry: Part II. Searching for answers to clinical questions:How to use Medline. Journal of the Canadian Dental Association. 2001;67:277–280.4. Sutherland SE, Walker S. Evidence-based dentistry: Part III. Searching for answers toclinical questions: finding evidence on the internet. Journal of the Canadian DentalAssociation. 2001;67:320–323.5. Sutherland S. Evidence-based dentistry: Part IV. Research design and levels of evidence.Journal of the Canadian Dental Association. 2001;67(7):375–378.6. Oxman AD, Sackett DL, and Guyatt GH. Users' guides to the medical literature. I. How to getstarted. The Evidence-Based Medicine Working Group. Journal of the American MedicalAssociation. 1993;270:2093–2095.7. Guyatt GH, Sackett DL, Cook DJ. Users' guides to the medical literature. II. How to use anarticle about therapy or prevention. A. Are the results of the study valid? Evidence-BasedMedicine Working Group. Journal of the American Medical Association. 1993;270:2598–2601.8. Guyatt GH, Sackett DL, Cook DJ. Users' guides to the medical literature. II. How to use anarticle about therapy or prevention. B. What were the results and will they help me incaring for my patients? Evidence-Based Medicine Working Group. Journal of the AmericanMedical Association. 1994;271:59–63.9. Dans AL, Dans LF, Guyatt GH, Richardson S. Users' guides to the medical literature: XIV.How to decide on the applicability of clinical trial results to your patient. Evidence-BasedMedicine Working Group. Journal of the American Medical Association. 1998;279:545–549.10. Guyatt GH, Sinclair J, Cook DJ, Glasziou P. Users' guides to the medical literature: XVI. Howto use a treatment recommendation. Evidence-Based Medicine Working Group and theCochrane Applicability Methods Working Group. Journal of the American MedicalAssociation. 1999;281:1836–1843.11. Hunt DL, Jaeschke R, McKibbon KA. Users' guides to the medical literature: XXI. Usingelectronic health information resources in evidence-based practice. Evidence-Based



Medicine Working Group. Journal of the American Medical Association. 2000;283:1875–1879.12. Richardson WS, Wilson MC, Williams JW Jr, Moyer VA, Naylor CD. Users' guides to themedical literature: XXIV. How to use an article on the clinical manifestations of disease.Journal of the American Medical Association. 2000;284:869–875.13. Guyatt GH, Sackett DL, Sinclair JC, Hayward R, Cook DJ, Cook RJ. Users' guides to the medicalliterature. IX. A method for grading health care recommendations. Evidence-BasedMedicine Working Group. Journal of the American Medical Association. 1995;274:1800–1804.14. Egger M, Smith GD, Phillips AN. Meta-analysis: principles and procedures. British MedicalJournal. 1997;315:1533–1537.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40 to 60 students Laboratories for 40 to 60 studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to the Internet Institutional membership-based access to medical literature databases (includingMedline) and reputed and relevant online journals Software: Microsoft Office and EndNotec. Other resources Overhead projectors

H. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining student feedback on the effectiveness of teaching Teacher-student discussion, focus groups Student surveys on the effectiveness of teaching




Course Specifications | 11th Semester | Pedodontics III | Page - 326

PEDODONTICS III1. Institution: JAZAN University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Pedodontics III , 633 PDSb. Credit hours 2 (1+1)c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible for course DR. GUNA SEKHARMADIRAJUDR. ARUN RATHNAMDR. NIDHI MADANe. Year/Semester at which course offered 6th Year | 11th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 534 PDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Al-Sawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Have knowledge of the various preventive and interceptive procedures in primary andmixed dentition. List various endodontic/pulp capping materials and techniques used in primary andyoung permanent teeth. Have knowledge of different types of oral habits in children including their etiology,sequelae & management. Demonstrate an understanding of minor orthodontic problems encountered in primary& mixed dentition including their etiology, sequelae and management. Be able to demonstrate classification, indications, contraindications, advantages anddisadvantages of various space maintainers used in children. Have knowledge on the role of diet/nutrition in oral health; importance of dietcounselling and perform the same involving both the parents and children.C. Course descriptionPedodontics-III course (Clinical Pedodontics) is taught in 6th Year/11th Semester andincludes lectures on preventive and interceptive procedures in primary and mixed dentition;etiology, sequelae and management of oral habits in children; minor orthodontic problemsencountered in primary & mixed dentition including their etiology, sequelae and management;classification, indications, contraindications, advantages and disadvantages of various spacemaintainers used in children; genetics in Pedodontics & Role of Diet/Nutrition in child’s oralhealth and importance of diet counselling. The clinical sessions encompass extensive clinicaltraining on performing simple extractions in children using appropriate local anaesthetic



techniques; restoration of vital and non-vital primary & young permanent teeth; fabrication ofremovable space maintainers and habit breaking appliances in selected children.I. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of Weeks Contact hoursPreventive Orthodontics 2 2Interceptive Orthodontics 2 2Oral habits in children 3 3Minor orthodontic problems in children 1 1Space maintenance in Pedodontics 3 3Nutrition & Genetics in Pedodontics 2 213 13

Schedule for clinical sessions:

II. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of WeeksRecord cases i.e., history, clinical examination, radiographs, diagnosis &treatment planning in children -Administration of Local anaesthetic techniques (...continued) -Simple extractions of primary teeth (...continued) -Basic endodontic procedures in primary teeth (Pulp capping,pulpotomy) -Removable space maintainers in Pedodontic patients -Habit breaking appliances -

TOTAL 13

III. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Clinics (Credit hours) Others13 - 13 -



IV. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20/Semester

V. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of LearningSkills Description Teaching

strategiesMethod of

AssessmentKnowledge Various preventive andinterceptive orthodonticprocedures in children.Etiology, sequelae andmanagement of oral habitsand minor orthodonticproblems seen in children.Factors to be considered inthe selection of spacemaintainers in children.Relation between diet &dental caries in children.

Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Case presentationsby students.

Continuous clinicalevaluation by staff.2 MCQ quiz examsMid-term MCQexamFinal theory examFinal clinical examOrals/viva-voceCognitive Selection of appropriaterestorative material forrestoring vital and non-vital primary & youngpermanent teeth.Selection of appropriatelocal anaesthetictechnique/armamentariumfor extractions in children.Understand the etiologyand management of oralhabits, space deficiency &minor orthodonticproblems in children.



Interpersonal skills& Responsibilities

Should follow properprotocol for regular clinicalattendance.Demonstrate ethicalrelationship with staff.Should develop goodworking relations with hisprofessional colleagues.Should wear a neat lab coatwith name tag & ensureproper handling of




Pedodontic patients.Establish and maintainaccurate patient records.Communication,InformationTechnology &Numerical skills

Students will be taught toregularly update theirknowledge on Pedodonticsby increased use ofinternet/web basedinformation.List of web sitesprovidingknowledge onPedodontics.Registration ofonline journals.

Continuous clinicalevaluation/monitoring by thestaff.Interactive sessionswith students.Psychomotor skills Develop skills forunderstanding the etiologyand management ofdeleterious oral habits andminor orthodonticproblems encountered inchildren.Fabrication of removablespace maintainers.Fabrication of removableappliances for correctingoral habits & minororthodontic problems inchildren.

Audio-visual/livedemonstration ofdifferent clinicaltechniquesExclusive trainingon clinicalprocedures‘Quotarequirements forclinical work toimprove clinicalefficiency’


VI. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semesterAssessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 50% MCQ’s I 10%MCQ’s II 10%Midterm 20%

Continuous clinical evaluation 10%Summative Assessment 50% Practical Exams 20%Orals/Viva-voce 10%Written Exams 20%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:

DR. GUNA SEKHAR MADIRAJUDR. ARUN RATHNAMDR. NIDHI MADANConsultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/week




Essential Text books:1. Dentistry for the Child and Adolescent by Ralph E. McDonald DDS MS, David R. AveryDDS MSD, and Jeffrey A. Dean. 2004.2. Fundamentals of Pediatric Dentistry by Mathewson JR, Robert E Primosch. QuintPub Co. 19953. Pediatric Dentistry: Infancy through Adolescence by Pinkham JR, 3rd Edition, 1993.Referral Text books:1. A Manual of Pediatric Dentistry by Andlaw R.J, Rock W.P; Churchill Livingstone,2000.2. Handbook of Pediatric Dentistry by Angus C. Cameron and Richard P. Widmer. 2008.3. Pediatric Dentistry by Richard.R.Welbury. Oxford University Press4. Pedodontics: A clinical approach by Goran Koch, Mosby Co. 1994.Periodicals/Journals:1. International Journal of Pediatric Dentistry (IJPD)2. Journal of Clinical Pediatric Dentistry (JCPD)3. Journal of Dentistry for Children (JDC)4. Journal of American Academy of Pediatric Dentistry (AAPD)5. Journal of Indian Society of Pedodontics & Preventive Dentistry (JISPPD)Miscellaneous:1. Pedodontics with Interactive DVD-ROM by Marwah. 2008.2. Mini Atlas of Pedodontics (Anshan Gold Standard Mini Atlas Series) by NikhilMarwah and Vijaya Prabha K. 2007.


H. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks



Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating areas which need further improvementand work collectively to achieve it. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune the course in linewith international standards.


Course Specifications | 11th Semester | Clinical Orthodontics I | Page - 332

CLINICAL ORTHODONTICS I1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general information1. Course title and code Clinical Orthodontics I, 635PDS2. Credit hours 23. Program in which course offered Dentistry4. Name of faculty member responsible for course Dr Roby .P. Cherian5. Year/Semester at which course offered 6th Year | 11th Semester6. Pre-requisites for the course 535 PDS7. Co-requisites for the course -8. Location if not main campus Al-Shawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Have a thorough understanding of treatment planning of orthodontic problems. Be able to recognize esthetic deficiencies and dental development problems andunderstand their relationship to the overall management of the orthodontic patient. He/she should be able to recognize the importance of coordinating treatment timing asit coincides with facial and somatic growth. Be able to recognize those complex problems that are beyond the ability of the generalpractitioner to treat and must know when to refer to a competent and qualifiedorthodontist specialist. Have sufficient knowledge to be able to communicate with the orthodontic specialistand understand the nature of the treatment being rendered. Be familiar with the different methods of space gaining in orthodontics includingexpansion and therapeutic extractions. Have a full understanding of guidance of eruption through serial extraction and spacemaintenance. Know the different kinds of space maintainers, when to use them and why. Recommend early and comprehensive orthodontic management that should be carriedout at the correct time. Be able to identify a malocclusion and describe the major characteristics of a skeletal,dental or combined malocclusion. Have an understanding of the management of different types of malocclusion. Understand the factors leading to relapse of treated malocclusion and the role ofretainers in preventing it. Be able to trace and evaluate a cephalometric radiograph by performing a complete



cephalometric analysis. Be able to perform and evaluate space analysis for the mixed and permanent dentitionas part of diagnostic procedures during treatment planning. Be able to recognize and utilize the different types of removable and functionalappliances. Be able to identify a skeletal discrepancy malocclusion that will require growthmodification therapy, thus should have basic information about headgear, facemask andfunctional appliances.

C. Course descriptionThis course prepares the students for the clinical session scheduled next semester. Studentslearn to identify, classify, describe and differentiate occlusal problems in children and adults.Preventive, interceptive and corrective procedures are taught, as well as recognition of severeproblems which require patients to be referred to an orthodontist. In addition, the course willexpose the students to the various orthodontic records and it will prepare the students toanalyze them and interpret the findings to arrive at a diagnosis. The course also allows thestudents to recognize the various orthodontic appliances and be familiar with their applications.The course consists of: Lecture (One hour) Clinical session (Three hours)


Lectures1 Orthodontic Treatment Planning 3 32 Space Gaining in Orthodontics 1 13 Treatment in Pre-adolescent children 3 34 Management of Class I malocclusion 2 25 Management of Class II div.1 malocclusion 1 16 Management of Class II div.2 malocclusion 1 17 Management of Class III malocclusion 1 18 Retention 1 1Clinicals1 Study Modela) Impression and pouringb) Model trimming and finishing 2 6

2 Classification of Malocclusion (models) 1 33 Radiographs (OPG, Occlusal) 1 34 Hand-wrist radiograph 1 35 Cephalometric Tracing 1 36 Cephalometric Analysis 2 67 Model Analysisa) Permanent dentitionb) Mixed dentition 2 6



8 Removable appliances Demonstration 1 39 Functional and Extra-oral appliances Demonstration 1 310 Soldering and Welding 1 3II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others13 39

III. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20/Semester


strategiesMethod of

Assessmenta. Knowledge •Different treatmentmodalities in primary, mixedand permanent dentition(Preventive, Interceptive,Corrective)•Differences betweenmoderate & severe problems•Methods of gaining space inOrthodontics•Features, Etiology &Management of the differenttypes of malocclusions•Causes of relapse & Differenttypes of retainers

LecturesDiscussions withstudentsDemonstrations,audio-visual aids& study modelsClinicaldiscussions &demonstrationson patients/livemodels.

2 MCQ quizexamsMid-termMCQ examFinal theoryexamOral examContinuousevaluationby staff.b. Cognitive •Recognition of differentclasses of malocclusion•Analysis & interpretation ofcephalometric tracings &models•Interpretation of otherorthodontic records•Diagnosis of malocclusionusing diagnostic records•Identification of types &components of differentorthodontic appliances•Treatment planning in pre-adolescents, adolescents &adults•Treatment planning for

LecturesDemonstrations,audio-visual aids& study modelsClinicaldiscussions &demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsundersupervision bystaff.

2 MCQ quizexamsMid-termMCQ &clinical examFinal theory& clinicalexamSpottersOral examContinuous



moderate & severe problems clinicalevaluationby staff.c. Interpersonal &

Responsibilities•Should follow properprotocol for regularattendance.•Demonstrate ethicalrelationship with staff.•Should develop goodworking relations with hisprofessional colleagues.•Should wear a neat lab coatwith name tag.•Ensure proper handling ofmaterials/equipment.

Clinical sessionsundersupervision bystaff.Continuousevaluationduring thecourse.


•Students will be taught toregularly update theirknowledge on Orthodonticsby increased use ofinternet/web basedinformation.List of web sitesprovidingknowledge onOrthodontics.

Continuousmonitoringby the staff.e. Psychomotor skills •Develop skills for labprocedures•Undertake a cephalometrictracing & landmarkidentification•Undertake cephalometric &model measurements

Demonstrations& workshops ofdifferent clinicaltechniquesClinical sessionsundersupervision bystaff.

Step-by-stepevaluation ofeachprocedurebyconcernedstaffMid-term &Final clinicalexamsV. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester

Assessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 10%MCQ’s II 10%Midterm (MCQ &Clinical) 15%Continuousevaluation 5%Summative Assessment 60% Practical Exams 20%Written Exams 40%



D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources

Essential books:1. Proffit WR, Fields HW Jr., Sarver DM. Contemporary Orthodontics. 4 ed. St. Louis: Mosby;2006.2. Graber TM. Orthodontics: Current Principles and Practice. Philadelphia: Saunders; 2000.3. Mitchell L. An Introduction to Orthodontics. 3rd ed. Oxford: Oxford University Press;2002.Recommended books:1. Proffit WR, White RP, Sarver DM. Contemporary Treatment of Dentofacial Deformity.2002.2. Nanda R, Kapila S. Current Therapy in Orthodontics. 2009.3. Bhalajhi SI. Orthodontics: The Art and Science. 1st ed. New Delhi: Arya (Medi)Publishing House; 1997.Reference books:1. English JD, Peltomaki T, Pham-Litschel K. Mosby's Orthodontic Review. 2008.2. Clark WB, Preston B, Cope J, Darendeliler A. Orthodontic and Dentofacial OrthopaedicTreatment. 2009.Additional learning resources:

Journals:1. Ngan P, Fields H. Orthodontic diagnosis and treatment planning in the primarydentition. ASDC Journal of Dentistry for Children. 1995;62(1):25-33.2. Ngan P, Alkire RG, Fields H. Management of space problems in the primary and mixeddentitions. Journal of American Dental Association. 1999;130(9):1330-9.3. Evans CA. Anteroposterior skeletal change: growth modification. Seminars inOrthodontics. 2000;6(1):21-32.4. Proffit WR. The timing of early treatment: an overview. American Journal ofOrthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics. 2006;129(4 Suppl 1):S47-9.Websites:1. Proffit WR, Fields HW Jr., Sarver DM. Contemporary Orthodontics e-edition: Text withContinually Updated Online Reference. 2007.

F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation Lecture rooms for 40-60 students



Labs for 40-60 studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills.



Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.


Course Specifications | 11th Semester | Comprehensive Care Clinics I | Page - 339

COMPREHENSIVE CARE CLINICS I1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Comprehensive Care ClinicsI, 661 DENb. Credit hours 6c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible for course -e. Year/Semester at which course offered 6th Year | 11th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course -g. Co-requisites for the course 522 RDSh. Location if not main campus - Shawajra campus

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Thoroughly diagnose conditions of the oral cavity and its related structures, usingproper diagnostic tools. Build a comprehensive treatment plan for the prevention and treatment of oralcondition. Provide treatment to each patient so that the oral health is restored to a healthy andfunctional state. Perform proficiently preventive and therapeutic procedures that are used by practisingdentists in the treatment of patients.C. Course descriptionStudents at the final year (sixth) are introduced to the multidisciplinary clinical programafter they have finished all the basic laboratory and clinical courses in dentistry. Theclinical Comprehensive Care Clinics (CCC) introduces the student to multidisciplinarytreatment planning and the concept of appropriately phased patient care. Studentsparticipate in the evaluation, planning and management of the comprehensivetreatment needs for their assigned adult patients. The concept of such a comprehensiveprogram, as the name suggests, is the total patient care experience from initial patientpresentation to treatment completion, and is thus implemented and emphasised in thiscourse. Comprehensive Care Clinics educate students in the assessment, diagnosis andsequencing of patient care through comprehensive treatment planning sessionsdesigned to ensure case understanding, rational treatment decisions and an appropriatetreatment plan. This course is designed to increase the student’s skills in all

disciplines. Patient care is carried out under the supervision and teaching of clinicalinstructors and staff members from each discipline are responsible for articulating thetreatment philosophies of their various specialties and coordinating these philosophieswith the concept of comprehensive dentistry.




Topics No. of Weeks Contact hoursIntroduction to the course 1 16Comprehensive examination process including muscleexamination and TMJ analysis 1 16Diagnosis and treatment planning 1 16Referrals and consultation process 1 16Clinical photography 1 16Operative lecture 1 16Endodontic lecture 1 16Periodontics lecture 1 16Prosthodontics lecture 1 16Oral surgery lecture 1 16Oral Medicine lecture 1 16Orthodontics lecture 1 16

II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship OthersIII. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20/Semester


strategiesMethod of

Assessmenta. Knowledgeb. Cognitivec. Interpersonal &

Responsibilitiesd. Communication


e. Psychomotor skills

V. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semesterAssessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 60% Procedure Points 15%Procedure Evaluation 25%Instructor’s Evaluation 10%Midterm 10%Summative Assessment 40% Case presentation 20%Viva Voce 10%Final Theory Exam 10%




1. Interdisciplinary Treatment Planning: Principles, Design, Implementation by MichaelCohen. 2008.2. Essential Dental Handbook: Clinical and Practice Management Advice from the Expertsby Robert R. Edwab. 2003.3. Dental Team Companion: Clinical Practice - 6 (Quintessentials of Dental Practice) byMabel Slater. 2009.4. Medical and Dental Space Planning: A Comprehensive Guide to Design, Equipment, andClinical Procedures by Jain Malkin. 2002.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation


G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college



Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.


Course Specifications | 11th Semester | Practice Management & Professional Conduct | Page -343

PRACTICE MANAGEMENT & PROFESSIONAL CONDUCT1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Practice Management &Professional Conduct, 663DENb. Credit hours 1c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible for course -e. Year/Semester at which course offered 6th Year | 11th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 261 DENg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Al Shawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesThe course is designed: To provide the basic knowledge and skills of management and administration To strengthen students’ skills of clinical practice management To strengthen students To make student appreciate and be aware of different sides of business in health care To make the students competent enough to launch themselves after graduation in aprivate health care marketC. Course descriptionThis course was incorporated in recognition of the active change in the health caremarket in Saudi Arabia and to launch students into this ever increasing private healthcare practices. The course will give the students an outline of the health care system inthe Kingdom of Saudi Arabia. The course will also create awareness among the dentalstudents about the general principals of practice management in the clinics. The coursewill take its basis from the present market scenario and the current rules and regulationrelated to dental practice. Teaching would be aided with examples from real experiencesand events. Renowned speakers on the subject will be invited as guest for lectures onthe topic of professional conduct.


II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others





strategiesMethod of

Assessmenta. Knowledgeb. Cognitivec. Interpersonal &

Responsibilitiesd. Communication


e. Psychomotor skills



F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Labs for 40-60 studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors




b. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.



12TH SEMESTER

SIXTH YEAR

TWELFTH SEMESTERCODE COURSE TITLE TH PR CRH COH P-REQ612 MDS Temporo Mandibular

Disorder (TMD) & OroFacial Pain

1 0 1 1 611 MDS632 PDS Community Dental

Practice1 3 2 4 331 PDS634 PDS Pedodontics IV 1 3 2 4 633 PDS636 PDS Clinical Orthodontics II 1 3 2 4 635 PDS642 SDS Advanced Prosthodontics

II1 3 2 4 641 SDS644 SDS Dental Implantology II 1 0 1 1 643 SDS662 DEN Comprehensive Care

Clinics II 1 15 6 16 661 DEN664 DEN Special Care Dentistry 1 0 1 1TOTAL 8 8 27 17 35


Course Specifications | 12th Semester | Temporo-Mandibular-Disorder & Oro-Facial Pain | Page- 347

TEMPORO-MANDIBULAR-DISORDER & ORO-FACIAL PAIN1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Temporo-MandibularDisorder & Oro-facial Pain,612 MDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible for

courseAshwin. J.e. Year/Semester at which course offered 6th Year | 12th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 611 MDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Shawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Have knowledge of the patho-physiological processes involved in the cranio-facialregion. Understand the various social, psychological, physiological and pathological etiologicalfactors contributing to the development of TMD and oro-facial pain. Be able to plan management of TMD and oro-facial pain after collection of variousinvestigative reports. Be able to perform selective procedures and evaluate treatment and managementoutcome of the patients suffering for TMD and oro-facial pain.C. Course descriptionThis course is taken in the fifth year in conjugation with courses in oral and maxillofacialsurgery. The course provides information on the diagnosis and the management of Temporo-mandibular disorders (TMD) and oro-facial pain. The course will consist of lectures andseminars. The knowledge provided will consist of the role of the dentist in the management ofTMD and oro-facial pain. The knowledge gained will help dental clinicians in differentialdiagnosis of oro-facial pain disorders. Topics will cover TMD disorders and oro-facial paindisorders and the role of the dentist in managing these disorders.



I. Topics to be coveredTopics No. of Weeks Contact hours1. Pain-I 1 42. Pain-II 1 43. Trigeminal neuralgia 1 44. Mechanisms of control of pain 1 45. Anatomy of TMJ-I 1 46. Anatomy of TMJ-II 1 47. Myofascial Pain Dysfunction Syndrome 1 48. Internal derangement-I 1 49. Internal derangement-II 1 410. Ankylosis-I 1 411. Ankylosis-II 1 4

II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others11 11III. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20hrs/semesterIV. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of Learning


Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Identify trigeminalneuralgia, ankylosis,MPDS and internalderangementpatients and learnthe basicmanagement.

Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Case presentationsby students.Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Case presentationsby students.




b. Cognitive Identify trigeminalneuralgia, ankylosis ,MPDS and internalderangementLectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Case presentationsby students.


c. InterpersonalSkills &Responsibilities

Should follow properprotocol for regularclinical attendance.Demonstrate ethicalrelationship withstaff.Should develop goodworking relationswith his professionalcolleagues.Should wear a neatapron/lab coat withname tag.Ensure properhandling of patients






Should develop skillsfor Identifytrigeminal neuralgia,ankylosis, MPDS andinternalderangementExclusive trainingon clinicalprocedures Step-by-stepevaluation of eachprocedure by theconcerned staff.Practical & Oralexams

V. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semesterAssessment Proportion Task Proportion



Continuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 15%MCQ’s II 15%Midterm 10%Summative Assessment 60% Practical Exams 20%Written Exams 40%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2hrs|week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resources1. Temporomandibular Disorders: An Evidenced-Based Approach to Diagnosis andTreatment by Daniel M. Laskin, Charles S. Greene, and William L. Ph.D. Hylander. 2006.2. Oro-facial Pain: Understanding Temporomandibular (Tmj Disorders) by Joseph A.Gibilisco, Charles McNeill, and Harold T. Perry. 1994.3. Oro-facial Pain and Headache by YairSharav and Rafael Benoliel. 2008.4. Temporomandibular Joint Disorders: Diagnosis and Treatment by D.D.S. Mark H.Friedman. 1985.5. Joint and Muscle Dysfunction of the Temporomandibular Joint (Cells Tissues Organs(Formerly ACTA Anatomical)) (v. 174, No. 1-2) by Arthur W. English. 2003.6. Local Anaesthesia in Dentistry by Paul D. Robinson PhD BDS MBBS FDS, Thomas R. PittFord PhD BDS FDS, and Fraser McDonald PhD MSc BDS FDS MOrth. 2000.7. Local Anaesthesia in Dentistry by J. A. Baart and H. S. Brand. 2008.8. Manual of Local Anaesthesia in Dentistry by A.P. Chitre. 2006.9. Local anaesthesia in dentistry: Illustrated handbook on dental local anaesthesia by JHaglund. 1978.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Clinics with 40 dental chairs Recovery Room Minor Operation Theatre with 10 dental chairs Scrub Area Sterilisation Room Changing room with lockers for staff and studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors



Computer systemG. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching:

Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaire Vivab. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awhole.e. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:

Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite.



Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning:

Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.


Course Specifications | 12th Semester | Community Dental Practice | Page - 353

COMMUNITY DENTAL PRACTICE1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Community Dental Practice,632 PDSb. Credit hours 3c. Program in which the course is offered Dentistryd. Name(s) of faculty member(s) responsible for thecourse Dr Santosh KumarTadakamandlaDr Kaushik SenguptaDr Aadil Inamdare. Year/semester at which the course is offered 6th Year/12th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 331 PDSg. Co-requisites for the course –h. Location (if not main campus) Shawajara Campus

B. ObjectivesAfter completion of the course, the students should be able to: Apply knowledge of dental epidemiology in the planning, execution, and interpretation ofdental surveys Plan an appropriate oral health promotion strategy for a particular community Perform prophylactic measures such as fluoride mouthrinse, fluoride tablets and gels,nutritional counselling, plaque control instruction, and dental sealants Describe the processes and controversies associated with water fluoridation Discuss the current trends in the provision and financing of dental care Identify the various methods of dental manpower planning Formulate arguments for the planning and provision of care in the community to meet oralhealth needsC. Course descriptionThe Community Dental Practice course deals with the practical application of the conceptstaught in the Community Dentistry (331 PDS) course. This is undertaken in light of the oralhealth problems prevalent among the people in the surrounding areas. A detailed review ofthe clinical measures of oral health status and sociodental indicators and the factorsinvolved in the prevention and control of dental diseases is undertaken. Understanding ofthe financing of dental care, assessment of community dental health needs, and manpowerplanning and supply of dental services is fostered. Special emphasis is placed on dentalsurvey research and the provision of both clinical and health promotion experiences tostudents in community-based settings. Students are presented with the opportunity to



apply the skills taught to the conduct of oral health surveys, health promotion activities,and screening and preventive dental treatment.I. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of weeks ContacthoursLectures in community dental practice

– Measurement of oral diseases (dental caries,periodontal diseases, and other common orofacialdisorders)– Prevention of dental caries– Prevention of periodontal diseases– Prevention of oral cancer and other important oralconditions– Basic oral health surveys– Financing of dental care– The dental workforce and dental organizations

8 8

Survey project 1 4Visits– Primary health care settings and/or water fluoridationplants

1 4Camps (screening, health promotion, preventivetreatment) in– The general population– Schools and other educational facilities– Institutions for the physically/mentally compromised– Refugee camps and correctional facilitiesHealth promotion project

4 16

II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others8 – 24 –

III. Additional learning hours expected for students: 20 per semesterIV. Development of learning outcomes in different domains of learning

Skills Description Teaching strategies Method ofAssessmenta. Knowledge Comprehensiveunderstanding andknowledge of

Provision ofextensive learningnotes and Examinations Continuous take-home assignments



dental workforce,dentalorganizations, andthe financing ofdental care Comprehensiveunderstanding ofthe implementationof basic oral healthsurveys Understanding ofthe modes ofprevention andmeasurement ofcommon oraldiseases

materials tostudents Seminars Guided reading

Population surveys Quizzes

b. Cognitive Application of theknowledge of themeasurement oforal diseases inestimating oraldisease burden ofspecific populations Application of theknowledge of basicoral health surveysin conductingpopulation-basedsurveys

Class projects fromstudents Seminars fromstudents Surveyassignments fromstudents

Monthly assignmentreport Survey report Written assignmentreport




Group projects Continuousassessment Writtenexaminations Evaluation ofseminar presentation


Practicalimplementation ofthe knowledgegained inconducting oral Student-ledteaching materials Use of softwaresuch as MicrosoftExcel and SPSS for

Continuousassessment Assessment ofsoftware proficiency Written



health surveys Appropriatecomputer skills forcompiling dataobtained from themeasurement oforal diseases Effectivecommunication(both written andoral) Use of informationtechnology inacademics andresearch Presentation skills

compiling dataobtained frompopulation-basedsurveys Use of MicrosoftPower Point andother presentationplatforms andmethods Use of informationandcommunicationtechnology

examinations


– – –V. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester


Continuous assessment 40% Quiz I 10%Quiz II 10%Midterm written exam 20%Summative assessment 60%

Survey project 10%Health promotionproject 10%Oral exam (viva voce) 10%Practical exam 10%Final written exam 20%D. Student supportFaculty members are available for individual student consultations and academic adviceConsultations: 2 h per week Academic advice: 2 h per weekE. Learning resources1. Oral Health Surveys: Basic Methods (fourth edition) by the World Health Organization.World Health Organization, 1997.2. Prevention of Oral Disease (fourth edition) by John J. Murray, June H. Nunn, and James G.Steele. Oxford University Press, 2003.3. Dentistry, Dental Practice, and the Community (sixth edition) by Brian A. Burt andSteven A. Eklund. Saunders, 2005.



4. Primary Preventive Dentistry (seventh edition) by Norman O. Harris, Franklin Garcia-Godoy, and Christine N. Nathe. Prentice Hall, 2008.5. Concepts in Dental Public Health (second edition) by Jill Mason. Lippincott Williams &Wilkins, 2010.6. Developing Practice for Public Health and Health Promotion (third edition) by JennieNaidoo and Jane Wills. Bailliere Tindall, 2010.7. Prevention of Oral Disease (fourth edition) by John J. Murray, June H. Nunn, and James G.Steele. Oxford University Press, 2003.8. Successful Preventive Dental Practices by Robert F. Barkley. BookSurge Publishing,2010.9. Dental Caries: The Disease and Its Clinical Management (second edition) by OleFejerskov and Edwina Kidd. Wiley-Blackwell, 2008.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40 to 60 students Laboratories for 40 to 60 studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD ROM facility Computers with access to the Internet Institutional membership-based access to medical literature databases (includingMedline) and reputed and relevant online journals Software: Microsoft Office, SPSS, and Endnotec. Other resources Overhead projectors

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining student feedback on the effectiveness of teaching Teacher-student discussion, focus groups Student surveys on the effectiveness of teaching




Course Specifications | 12th Semester | Pedodontics IV | Page - 359

PEDODONTICS IV1. Institution: JAZAN University2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Pedodontics IV , 634 PDSb. Credit hours 2 (1+1)c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible for course DR. GUNA SEKHARMADIRAJUDR. ARUN RATHNAMDR. NIDHI MADANe. Year/Semester at which course offered 6th Year | 12th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 633 PDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Al-Sawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Be able to manage traumatic dental injuries in children. Have knowledge on prevention of dental trauma in children. Demonstrate an understanding of the role of a Pedodontist in managing a cleft lip &palate child. Have knowledge on the diagnosis and dental management of disabilities in children. Demonstrate an understanding of the importance of comprehensive oral care inchildren. Have knowledge on recent advances in the field of Pedodontics. Obtain a basic idea regarding the set-up of a Pedodontic clinic.C. Course descriptionPedodontics-IV course is the last course in Clinical Pedodontics and will be taught in 6th

Year/12th Semester and includes lectures on management and prevention of traumatic dentalinjuries to primary & permanent dentition; clinical findings and dental management of disabledchildren; Pedodontist role in cleft lip & palate management; Recent advances in Pedodontics;and basic idea in setting up of a Pedodontic clinic. The Clinical sessions encompass extensiveclinical training on recording history of trauma including clinical findings & diagnostic tests;emergency and restorative management of traumatised vital and non-vital primary/permanentteeth; dental management/referral of medically compromised/disabled children and;comprehensive oral care in children with emphasis on importance of follow-up visits.




Topics No. of Weeks Contact hoursTraumatic dental injuries in children: Classification,Management & Prevention 6 6Disabled children: Clinical findings & Dental management 3 3Role of Pedodontist in Cleft lip & palate management 1 1Comprehensive oral care in children 1 1Recent advances in Pedodontics 1 1Set-up of a Pedodontic clinic 1 1TOTAL 13 13

Schedule for clinical sessions:


Topics No. of WeeksRecord cases i.e., history of trauma, clinical examination, radiographs,diagnosis & treatment planning -Management of children with traumatic dental injuries -Diagnosis and management/referral of disabled children -Comprehensive oral care in children: Case presentation/discussion -TOTAL 13






strategiesMethod of

AssessmentKnowledge Emergency andrestorative managementof dental trauma.Preventive measures totraumatic dental injuriesin children.Dental managementand/or referral ofdisabled children.Pedodontist role inmanaging cleft lip/palatechildren.Recent advances inmaterials/techniquesused in Pedodontics.



Cognitive Selection of appropriatetreatment modality fortraumatised teeth inchildren.Lectures.Clinical discussions& demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsunder supervisionby staff.Case presentationsby students.

Continuous clinicalevaluation by staff.2 MCQ quiz examsMid-term MCQexamFinal theory examFinal clinical examOrals/viva-voceInterpersonal skills& Responsibilities

Should follow properprotocol for regularclinical attendance.Demonstrate ethicalrelationship with staff.Should develop goodworking relations with hisprofessional colleagues.Should wear a neat labcoat with name tag &ensure proper handling ofPedodontic patients.Establish and maintainaccurate patient records.


CommunicationInformationTechnology &

Regularly update theirknowledge on variousadvances in Pedodontics List of web sitesprovidingknowledge on Continuous clinicalevaluation/monitoring by the



Numerical skills by increased use ofinternet/web basedinformation.Demonstrate anunderstanding of use ofinformation technology asa means ofcommunication for datacollection & analysis forself-directed learning.Make verbal and writtenpresentations usingappropriate audio-visualaids.

Pedodontics.Registration ofonline journals. staff.Interactive sessionswith students.

Psychomotor skills Develop skills foremergency & restorativemanagement of dentaltrauma in children.Develop skills formanaging variousdisabilities in children.

Audio-visual/livedemonstration ofdifferent clinicaltechniquesExclusive trainingon clinicalprocedures



Continuous clinical evaluation 10%Summative Assessment 50% Practical Exams 20%Orals/Viva-voce 10%Written Exams 20%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:

DR. GUNA SEKHAR MADIRAJUDR. ARUN RATHNAMDR. NIDHI MADANConsultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/week




Essential Text books:1. Dentistry for the Child and Adolescent by Ralph E. McDonald DDS MS, David R. AveryDDS MSD, and Jeffrey A. Dean. 2004.2. Fundamentals of Pediatric Dentistry by Mathewson JR, Robert E Primosch. QuintPub Co. 19953. Pediatric Dentistry: Infancy through Adolescence by Pinkham JR, 3rd Edition, 1993.Referral Text books:1. A Manual of Pediatric Dentistry by Andlaw R.J, Rock W.P; Churchill Livingstone,2000.2. Handbook of Pediatric Dentistry by Angus C. Cameron and Richard P. Widmer. 2008.3. Pediatric Dentistry by Richard.R.Welbury. Oxford University Press4. Pedodontics: A clinical approach by Goran Koch, Mosby Co. 1994.Periodicals/Journals:1. International Journal of Pediatric Dentistry (IJPD)2. Journal of Clinical Pediatric Dentistry (JCPD)3. Journal of Dentistry for Children (JDC)4. Journal of American Academy of Pediatric Dentistry (AAPD)5. Journal of Indian Society of Pedodontics & Preventive Dentistry (JISPPD)Miscellaneous:1. Pedodontics with Interactive DVD-ROM by Marwah. 2008.2. Mini Atlas of Pedodontics (Anshan Gold Standard Mini Atlas Series) by NikhilMarwah and Vijaya Prabha K. 2007.





b. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating areas which need further improvementand work collectively to achieve it. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune the course in linewith international standards.


Course Specifications | 12th Semester | Clinical Orthodontics II | Page - 365

CLINICAL ORTHODONTICS II1. Institution: Jazan University2. College: Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Clinical Orthodontics II, 636PDSb. Credit hours 2c. Program in which course offered Dentistryd. Name of faculty member responsible for course Dr Roby. P. Cheriane. Year/Semester at which course offered 6th Year | 12th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course 635 PDSg. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Al-Shawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Be able to differentiate between limited and isolated problems that might be effectivelytreated as part of a general practice from those requiring complex or comprehensiveorthodontic treatment. Be able to inform the patients/parents regarding the nature and extent of the orthodonticproblem and provide the appropriate management and/or referral. Understand the relationship between various dental specialities and must be able toassume the role of primary treatment coordinator in integrating a multi-disciplinaryapproach to the care of the adult patient. Should have an understanding of combined surgical and orthodontic therapy and should beable to explain to patients the procedures and their sequencing with orthodontic treatment.That should include timing, preoperative orthodontics, surgical procedures, andpostoperative orthodontics and anticipated results. Be able to consult and communicate with orthodontists and other specialists regardingtotal dental care of patients. Be able to contribute to multi-disciplinary approach of treatment. Should have basic information about the temporomandibular joint and its relation totemporomandibular disorders. Should have an understanding of the new developments in the field of orthodontics such asuse of implants, onplants, distraction osteogenesis etc. To help the students to resolve the problems and meet the challenges that are encounteredin the clinical practice through the participation in the discussion of carefully selectedorthodontic cases that demand from the students’ acquisition of critical thinking, problemsolving proficiency, self-directed learning strategies and team participation skills.



To familiarize the students with the appropriate procedures of orthodontic diagnosis andtreatment planning. Be able to perform a full diagnostic set-up that includes intraoral and extraoralphotographs, impression for study models, cephalometric and intraoral radiographs. Be able to assess the patient's profile and facial esthetics. Be able to independently assess the orthodontic needs of a patient. Be able to understand an orthodontic assessment and suggest possible outline treatmentplans. Be able to provide an initial orthodontic diagnosis, explain and discuss the nature oforthodontic treatment to the patient and parent. Be able to diagnose and plan treatment under the supervision of a senior academic staff. Be able to design and construct a removable appliance to treat simple malocclusion usuallyperformed by general dentists. Be able to design, insert and adjust an active removable appliance to move a single tooth orto correct a crossbite by movement of a segment of an arch. Be able to recognize the fixed orthodontic appliance and its components.

C. Course descriptionThis advanced course is the last of the three courses. This course aims mainly at theapplication of all the diagnostic procedures taught in the Pre-Clinical Orthodontics and ClinicalOrthodontics - I courses. This course consists of lectures, problem-based tutorial sessions and aclinical component. Familiarization with the procedure used by orthodontists in the correctionof severe malocclusion enables students to select those patients requiring referral. Limitationsof orthodontic treatment alone and coordination of a multi-disciplinary team in treatment ofcomplicated cases are discussed. Emphasis is given to diagnosis of difficult cases and thetraining of dental/medical consultation and referral system.Students will be participating in problem-based tutorial sessions to analyze the orthodonticcases chosen to cover the following topics: Orthodontic diagnosis and treatment planning of Class I, II and III malocclusion. Orthodontic treatment of patients with medical disorders. Early orthodontic treatment. Management of dentofacial skeletal problems (A-P / Vertical / Transverse). Assessment of patients for orthognathic surgery and growth modification.This method of learning involves an active participation of the students in their learningthrough generating hypotheses to explain the problems under discussion, contributingresources and knowledge to the group, and demonstrating the ability to understand and applythe available evidence to analyze the case.The clinical component emphasizes diagnosis and treatment planning for different typesof malocclusion besides carrying out treatment procedures on patients in the orthodontic clinic.Each student is required to treat a simple case usually treated by the general dentist during thecourse. The students are then required to present their treated cases with pre- and post-treatment records to their fellow colleagues and the orthodontic faculty. The course consists of:



Lecture (One hour) Tutorial (One hour) Clinical (Three hours)


Lectures1 Adjunctive Orthodontic treatment 1 12 Adult Orthodontics 1 13 Surgical Orthodontics 1 14 Minor surgical procedures in Orthodontics 1 15 Cleft lip and palate 1 16 TMJ and TMD disorders 1 17 Recent advances in Orthodontics 1 1Tutorials1 Problem based learning-IClass I non-skeletal 1 12 Problem based learning-IIClass I skeletal 1 13 Problem based learning-IIIClass II non-skeletal 1 14 Problem based learning-IVClass II skeletal 1 15 Problem based learning-VClass III non-skeletal 1 16 Problem based learning-VIClass III skeletal 1 1Clinical1 Introduction to Diagnosis with diagnostic aids &Treatment planning 1 32 Case History, Clinical examination, Impression,Photographs & Radiographs 1 33 Cephalometric Tracing and Analysis 2 64 Model Analysis 1 35 Diagnosis and Formulation of a treatment plan 1 36 Designing and Fabrication of the RemovableAppliance 2 67 Delivery of Appliance & post-insertion instructions 1 3

8 Fixed appliance Demonstration 1 39 Case Presentations 3 9

II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others



7 6 39III. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20/Semester


strategiesMethod of

Assessmenta. Knowledge •Special considerations intreatment of adults•Major & minor surgicalprocedures•New developments inOrthodontics•Management of cleft lip andpalate patients•Limitations of orthodontictreatment alone and specialproblems

LecturesProblem-basedtutorialsDiscussions withstudentsDemonstrations,audio-visual aids& study models

2 MCQ quizexamsMid-termMCQ examFinal theoryexamOral examContinuousevaluationby staff.b. Cognitive •Diagnosis & treatmentplanning of different kinds ofskeletal & non-skeletalmalocclusion•Diagnosis of a patient byinterpretation of case history,clinical examination &diagnostic records collected &etiologic factors for thisparticular malocclusion•Formulation of a treatmentplan for the patient & design anappropriate removablemechanotherapyRecognition of basic elements offixed orthodontic appliances

Problem-basedtutorialsClinicaldiscussions &demonstrationson patients/livemodels.Clinical sessionsundersupervision bystaff.Casepresentations bystudents.

2 MCQ quizexamsMid-termMCQ &clinical examFinal theory& clinicalexamSpottersOral examContinuousclinicalevaluationby staffc. Interpersonal &

Responsibilities•Should follow proper protocolfor regular attendance.•Demonstrate ethicalrelationship with staff.•Should develop good working

Clinical sessionsundersupervision bystaff.Continuousevaluationduring thecourse.



relations with his professionalcolleagues.•Should wear a neat lab coatwith name tag.•Ensure proper handling oforthodontic patients.d. Communication


• Enhance good student-patientcommunication.•Students will be taught toregularly update theirknowledge on Orthodontics byincreased use of internet/webbased information.

List of web sitesprovidingknowledge onOrthodontics.Discussions ofonline journals.

Continuousmonitoringby the staff.


•Develop clinical skills forperforming examination andimpression taking on patient•Undertake a simplecephalometric & model analysis•Construct, insert & adjust asimple removable appliance forpatient

Audio-visual /live / typhodontdemonstration ofdifferent clinicaltechniques.Exclusivetraining onclinicalprocedures.Clinical sessionsundersupervision bystaff.

Step-by-stepevaluation ofeachprocedure byconcernedstaffMid-term &Final clinicalexams

V. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semesterAssessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 10%MCQ’s II 10%Midterm(MCQ &Clinical) 15%Continuous evaluation 5%Summative Assessment 60% Practical Exams 20%Written Exams 40%

D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/week




Essential books:1. Proffit WR, Fields HW Jr., Sarver DM. Contemporary Orthodontics. 4 ed. St. Louis: Mosby;2006.2. Mitchell L. An Introduction to Orthodontics. 3rd ed. Oxford: Oxford University Press;2002.3. Singh G. Textbook of Orthodontics. 2nd ed. Jaypee Brothers; 2007.Recommended books:1. Graber T, Vanarsdall R, Vig K. Orthodontics: Current Principles and Techniques. 2005.2. Graber TM. Orthodontics: Current Principles and Practice. Philadelphia: Saunders; 2000.3. Bhalajhi SI. Orthodontics: The Art and Science. 1st ed. New Delhi: Arya (Medi)Publishing House; 1997.4. Burstone CJ, Marcotte MR. Problem solving in Orthodontics: Goal-oriented treatmentstrategies. 2000.5. Millett D, Welbury R. Clinical problem solving in Orthodontics and Paediatric Dentistry.2005.Reference books:1. Nanda R. Temporary anchorage devices in Orthodontics. 2008.2. William JK, Cook PA, Issacson KG, Thom AR. Fixed orthodontic appliances, principles andpractice. Butterworth-Heinemann Ltd. 1996.3. Eliades T, Pandis N, Johnston LE Jr., White LW. Self-ligation in Orthodontics. 2009.Additional learning resources:

Journals:1. Burden D, Mullally B, Sandler J. Orthodontic treatment of patients with medicaldisorders. European Journal of Orthodontics. 2001;23(4):363-72.2. Vlachos CC. Orthodontic treatment for the cleft palate patient. Seminars in Orthodontics.1996;2(3):197-204.3. Bailey LJ, Proffit WR, White R Jr. Assessment of patients for orthognathic surgery.Seminars in Orthodontics. 2000;5(4):183-94.4. Turley P. Managing the developing Class III malocclusion with palatal expansion andfacemask therapy. American Journal of Orthodontics and Dentofacial Orthopedics.2002;122(4):349-52.Websites:1. Proffit WR, Fields HW Jr., Sarver DM. Contemporary Orthodontics e-edition: Text withContinually Updated Online Reference. 2007.



F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Labs for 40-60 studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields.



Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.


Course Specifications | 12th Semester | Comprehensive Care Clinics II | Page - 373

COMPREHENSIVE CARE CLINICS II3. Institution: Jazan University4. College: College of Dentistry

H. Course identification and general informationi. Course title and code Comprehensive Care ClinicsII, 662 DENj. Credit hours 6k. Program in which course offered Dentistryl. Name of faculty member responsible for course -m. Year/Semester at which course offered 6th Year | 12th Semestern. Pre-requisites for the course -o. Co-requisites for the course 522 RDS & 661 DENp. Location if not main campus - Shawajra campus

I. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should: Design a comprehensive treatment plan, bearing in mind the specific needs of his

patient. Manage common clinical problems presented by dental patient at the primary carelevel. Recognize those conditions which lie outside the scope of general dental practice

and refer them to appropriate specialist for investigations and management.

J. Course descriptionThis course features an intensive clinical emphasis with lectures, seminars, conferences,and patient care experiences which will further develop the student’s expertise in the fieldof comprehensive dentistry. Each student will learn how to visualize optimum dentistry from anaesthetic, functional, biological and structural perspective. The curriculum exposes students to avariety of comprehensive dentistry techniques and new modalities of treatment. Students willtreat a variety of patients under the close guidance of a diverse and experienced faculty.In the theoretical part of the course, teachers present scenarios for clinical problems andconduct discussions about these problems. It includes also lectures about principles of generaldental practice, quality assurance and medico-legal regulations and ethics in dental practice.Upon completion of this course, students will have an increased understanding of the biologicalbasis of comprehensive dentistry theory and practice.VI. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of Weeks Contact hoursIntroduction to the course 1 16Practice-based research 2 32Risk management in dental practice 1 16Law and Ethics in Dentistry 1 16



Dentistry for Geriatric patients 1 16Operative lecture 1 16Endodontic lecture 1 16Periodontics lecture 1 16Prosthodontics lecture 1 16Oral surgery lecture 1 16Orthodontics lecture 1 16VII. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others

VIII. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20/Semester

IX. Development of Learning Outcomes in Domains of LearningSkills Description Teaching

strategiesMethod of

Assessmentf. Knowledgeg. Cognitiveh. Interpersonal &

Responsibilitiesi. Communication


j. Psychomotor skills

X. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semesterAssessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 60% Procedure Points 15%Procedure Evaluation 25%Instructor’s Evaluation 10%Midterm 10%Summative Assessment 40% Case presentation 20%Viva Voce 10%Final Theory Exam 10%

K. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekL. Learning resources5. Interdisciplinary Treatment Planning: Principles, Design, Implementation by MichaelCohen. 2008.6. Essential Dental Handbook: Clinical and Practice Management Advice from the Expertsby Robert R. Edwab. 2003.7. Dental Team Companion: Clinical Practice - 6 (Quintessentials of Dental Practice) byMabel Slater. 2009.



8. Medical and Dental Space Planning: A Comprehensive Guide to Design, Equipment, andClinical Procedures by Jain Malkin. 2002.M. Facilities requiredd. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 students Labs for 40-60 studentse. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsf. Other resources Overhead projectors

N. Course evaluation and improvement processesf. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireg. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.h. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.i. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholej. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields.


Course Specifications | 12th Semester | Special Care Dentistry | Page - 376

Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.SPECIAL CARE DENTISTRY

1. Institution: JAZAN University

2. College: College of Dentistry

A. Course identification and general informationa. Course title and code Special Care Dentistry,664 DENb. Credit hours 1 (DIDACTIC)c. Program in which course offered Dentistry (BDS)d. Name of faculty member responsible for course Dr. Guna Sekhar Madirajue. Year/Semester at which course offered 6th Year | 12th Semesterf. Pre-requisites for the course -g. Co-requisites for the course -h. Location if not main campus Al-Sawajrah Campus

B. ObjectivesBy the end of the course the students should:1. Be able to describe normal development and potential abnormalities in general growth,craniofacial growth, growth of dento-alveolar complex and tooth eruption.



2. Understand the role and apply the knowledge of cell biology & genetic principles in thediagnosis of oro-facial and dental conditions.3. Be able to recognize syndromes where oro-facial features form significant component ofa syndrome.4. Be able to deliver appropriate drug regimen for special care patients in dentistry.5. Recognize the impact of disability on patients and their families.6. Be able to communicate effectively with special needs people.7. Recognize the role of multidisciplinary team in management of patients with specialhealth care needs.8. Diagnose and design a comprehensive but feasible treatment plan, keeping in view ofthe specific needs of special health care/disabled patients.9. Be able to plan oral health promotion policies for special population groups.

C. Course descriptionSpecial care dentistry is concerned with the improvement of oral health in individuals andgroups in society who are unable to accept routine dental/oral care because of some physical,intellectual, emotional, medical, mental, sensory or social impairment or a combination of thesefactors. Special knowledge & skills including a multidisciplinary team approach is needed toprovide comprehensive oral care both in individuals and among special population groups. Thefocus should be on the provision of oral care rather than on the specific dental procedures.Special care dentistry is one of the advanced courses given in the 6th Year | 12th Semester. It isa didactic only course with 1 credit hour/week and provides knowledge required to understandthe concepts of disability, impairment and oral health related to special care people includingassessment/diagnosis, formulation of a feasible treatment plan to deliver preventive &comprehensive oral care in special needs people attending comprehensive care clinics II andalso individuals/groups at community level.I. Topics to be covered

Topics No. of Weeks Contact hoursBiological sciences of relevance to special care dentistry Cell biology & microbiology Growth & development Oral & related systemic diseases 2

Pharmacology and therapeutics 2Role of Behavioural sciences 1Impairment, disability and oral health Definitions/Concepts Conditions leading to Impairment & disability Oral health in disability

2Oral health care planning for the individual 2



Assessment & Diagnosis Treatment planning & Prevention Behaviour managementClinical Special Care dentistry Restorative care Periodontal care Endodontic care Removable & fixed prosthetic care Orthodontic care Oral medicine & Oral pathology Oral surgery Management of Medical emergencies

2

Oral health care and oral health promotion for specificpopulation groups 2

II. Course ComponentLectures Tutorials Practical/Fieldwork/Internship Others13 - - -III. Addition learning hours expected for students – 20/Semester


strategiesMethod of

AssessmentKnowledge Normal development andpotential abnormalities ingeneral growth, craniofacialgrowth, growth of dento-alveolar complex and tootheruption.Concepts of disability,impairment and barriersencountered in oral care.Oral & dental manifestationsof specific conditions.Appropriate drug regimen forspecial care patients indentistry.Relation between disabilityand oral health & preventiveoral care.

LecturesCase basedlearningSelf-directedlearning

2 MCQ quiz examsMid-term MCQ examFinal theory examOrals/viva-voce



Development of services forspecial population groupsincluding ethnic & refugeegroups etc. who are sociallyexcluded.Cognitive Recognize normal andatypical/abnormal behaviourpatterns in adolescents/adultswith impairment anddisability.Identify and assess the personwho requires special oralhealth care.

LecturesCase basedlearningSelf-directedlearning

2 MCQ quiz examsMid-term MCQ examFinal theory examOrals/viva-voceInterpersonal &Responsibilities

Able to work effectively withother health careprofessionals & dentalspecialities.Understand the importance ofreferral to other specialities asappropriate.Consult and collaborate withcolleagues in other medical &surgical specialities whereappropriate.

Interactivesessions withstudents


Use digital imaging deviceseffectively.Demonstrate positive andproactive attitude to newtechnology.Apply the principles ofconfidentiality relating towritten, electronic and digitalclinical records.

Interactivesessions withstudents Continuousevaluation/monitoringby the staff

Psychomotorskills

Develop skills to communicateeffectively with individualsrequiring special care. Interactivesessions withstudents Continuousevaluation/monitoring by the staffV. Schedule of assessment task for students during the semester

Assessment Proportion Task ProportionContinuous Assessment 40% MCQ’s I 5%MCQ’s II 5%Midterm 20%Course Work 10%Summative Assessment 60% Oral Exams 20%



Written Exams 40%D. Students supportFaculty available for individual student consultations and academic advice:

Consultations: 2hrs/week Academic advice: 2hrs/weekE. Learning resourcesRecommended text books:1. Special Care in Dentistry. Handbook of Oral Health care. Crispian Scully CBE,Pedro Diz Dios, Navdeep Kumar. Churchill Livingstone.2. A Clinical guide to Special Care Dentistry. Janice J Fiske, Dougall A, Donald .P.Lewis. Publisher: British Dental Journal.3. Special Care Dentistry. Fiske J, Raifque S, Boyle C, Burke M, Dickinson C.Quintessence Publishing Co. Limited, London, UK.F. Facilities requireda. Accommodation

Lecture rooms for 40-60 studentsb. Computing resources Computers with CD/DVD Rom facility Computers with access to internet Institutional membership access to reputed and relevant web journalsc. Other resources Overhead projectors

G. Course evaluation and improvement processesa. Strategies for obtaining students feedback on effectiveness of teaching: Teacher-Student discussion, focus groups Student’s surveys on effectiveness of teaching Student’s personal written feedbacks Teaching appraisal questionnaireb. Other strategies for evaluation of teaching by the instructor or by thedepartment: Monitoring student’s performance and progress through periodicexaminations and assessments exercises. Feedback, self-appraisal and departmental discussions on evaluating theeffectiveness of teaching. Peer evaluations. Students and departmental feedbacks.c. Processes for improvement of teaching: By identifying and evaluating weak areas and working on itsimprovement. Continuing dental education programs. Visiting experts in relevant fields for performance modelling.



d. Processes for verifying standards of students achievement: Random sampling and checking of exam papers by examinationcommittee Evaluation and assessment of student’s exam reports Remarking of sample assignment within the faculty members and facultyfrom outside the college Evaluation of students performance, tutors and examination reports as awholee. Arrangements for review and effective planning for the course:Review: Semester and yearly reviews for student’s performance in all teachingfields. Reviewing feedbacks for planning and improvement of transferableskills. Reviewing feedbacks on the level of retention of required knowledgefrom faculty teaching courses that demand this course as pre-requisite. Comparing student’s performance benchmark from other similarinstitutes and working on its improvement.Planning: Syllabus updates to meet the changing community needs andrequirements. Reviews and feedbacks for teachers for planning improvementstrategies. Provide additional training for staff as and when required. Review of teaching performance indicators to propose improvementstrategies. Interdepartmental collaboration and planning to tune course in line withinternational standards.

course specifications -...

Documents